Backhoe Loader310J and 310SJEngines 4045DT060, 4045HT054

Transcription

*OMT210365*
Backhoe Loader
310J and 310SJ
Engines 4045DT060,
4045HT054 and 4045TT094
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
310J and 310SJ Backhoe Loaders
Engines 4045DT060, 4045HT054
and 4045TT094
OMT210365 ISSUE B3
(ENGLISH)
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents
are known to the State of California to cause cancer,
birth defects, and other reproductive harm.
If this product contains a gasoline engine:
WARNING
The engine exhaust from this product contains
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.
The State of California requires the above two warnings.
Additional Proposition 65 Warnings can be found in this manual.
Worldwide Construction
And Forestry Division
LITHO IN U.S.A.
Introduction
Foreword
READ THIS MANUAL carefully to learn how to operate
and service your machine correctly. Failure to do so
could result in personal injury or equipment damage.
This manual and safety signs on your machine may also
be available in other languages. (See your John Deere
dealer to order.)
equipment as described in this manual. The warranty is
explained on the warranty certificate or statement which
you should have received from your dealer.
MEASUREMENTS in this manual are given in both
metric and customary U.S. unit equivalents. Use only
correct replacement parts and fasteners. Metric and inch
fasteners may require a specific metric or inch wrench.
This warranty provides you the assurance that John
Deere will back its products where defects appear within
the warranty period. In some circumstances, John Deere
also provides field improvements, often without charge
to the customer, even if the product is out of warranty.
Should the equipment be abused, or modified to change
its performance beyond the original factory specifications,
the warranty will become void and field improvements
may be denied. Setting fuel delivery above specifications
or otherwise overpowering machines will result in such
action.
RIGHT-HAND AND LEFT-HAND sides are determined by
facing in the direction of forward travel.
THE TIRE MANUFACTURER'S warranty supplied with
your machine may not apply outside the U.S.
WRITE PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS (P.I.N.)
in the Machine Numbers section. Accurately record all
the numbers to help in tracing the machine should it be
stolen. Your dealer also needs these numbers when you
order parts. File the identification numbers in a secure
place off the machine.
If you are not the original owner of this machine, it is in
your interest to contact your local John Deere dealer to
inform them of this unit's serial number. This will help John
Deere notify you of any issues or product improvements.
THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE CONSIDERED a permanent
part of your machine and should remain with the machine
when you sell it.
WARRANTY is provided as part of John Deere's support
program for customers who operate and maintain their
DX,IFC7 -19-03APR09-1/1
IMPORTANT
Warranty will not apply to engine and drivetrain failures
resulting from unauthorized adjustments to this engine.
Unauthorized adjustments are in violation of the emissions
regulations applicable to this engine and may result in
substantial fines and penalties.
VD76477,000104D -19-27JUN12-1/1
020113
PN=2
Introduction
TX1053039 —19—19MAR10
Emissions Control Warranty Statement—U.S. and Canada
VD76477,000104E -19-04JAN10-1/1
020113
PN=3
Introduction
Technical Information Feedback Form
We need your help to continually improve our technical
publications. Please copy this page and FAX or mail your
comments, ideas and improvements.
SEND TO:
John Deere Dubuque Works
18600 South John Deere Road
Attn: Publications, Dept. 324
Dubuque, IA 52004-0538
USA
FAX NUMBER: 1-563-589-5800 (USA)
Publication Number:
Page Number:
Ideas, Comments:
Name:
Phone:
Email Address:
THANK YOU!
TX,TM,FAX -19-03JUL01-1/1
020113
PN=4
Contents
Page
Page
Safety—Safety And Operator Conveniences
Safety—Safety Signs
Safety and Operator Convenience Features .....1-1-1
Safety Signs ......................................................1-5-1
Safety Signs—Backhoe Coupler (If Equipped) ..1-5-3
Replace Safety Signs ........................................1-5-4
Safety—General Precautions
Recognize Safety Information ...........................1-2-1
Follow Safety Instructions..................................1-2-1
Operate Only If Qualified ...................................1-2-1
Wear Protective Equipment...............................1-2-2
Avoid Unauthorized Machine Modifications.......1-2-2
Inspect Machine ................................................1-2-2
Stay Clear of Moving Parts................................1-2-2
Avoid High-Pressure Oils ..................................1-2-3
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids ...............................1-2-3
Work In Ventilated Area.....................................1-2-4
Prevent Fires .....................................................1-2-4
Prevent Battery Explosions ...............................1-2-5
Handle Chemical Products Safely .....................1-2-5
Dispose of Waste Properly ................................1-2-5
Prepare for Emergencies...................................1-2-6
Clean Debris from Machine ...............................1-2-6
Operation—Operator’s Station
Pedals and Levers.............................................2-1-1
Pedals and Levers—If Equipped With
Pilot Controls.................................................2-1-1
Fire Extinguisher Location .................................2-1-1
Standard Display Monitor (SDM).......................2-1-2
Standard Display Functions...............................2-1-3
Anti-Theft Security System Configuration..........2-1-4
Anti-Theft Security System Operation ...............2-1-6
Standard Display Monitor
(SDM)—Normal Display................................2-1-7
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Monitor Messages.........................................2-1-8
Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main Menu ....2-1-8
Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main
Menu—Codes ...............................................2-1-9
Menu—Monitor............................................2-1-10
Menu—Job Timer........................................2-1-11
Menu—Settings...........................................2-1-11
Right-Side Console Functions .........................2-1-12
Controls—Steering Console ............................2-1-14
Pilot Control Enable/Disable Switch—If
Equipped .....................................................2-1-15
Pattern Select Switch—If Equipped.................2-1-15
Engine Speed Control Knob ............................2-1-16
Horn Button .....................................................2-1-16
Defroster, Heater, and Air Conditioner
Controls—If Equipped .................................2-1-17
Side Windows—Secondary Exits ....................2-1-18
Rear Windows .................................................2-1-18
Adjusting Seat .................................................2-1-19
Steering Wheel Tilt Lever—If Equipped ..........2-1-20
12-Volt Accessory Outlets ...............................2-1-21
Safety—Operating Precautions
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly .................1-3-1
Start Only From Operator's Seat .......................1-3-1
Use and Maintain Seat Belt ...............................1-3-1
Prevent Unintended Machine Movement ..........1-3-1
Prevent Unintended Machine
Movement—If Equipped With Pilot
Controls.........................................................1-3-2
Avoid Work Site Hazards...................................1-3-2
Keep Riders Off Machine ..................................1-3-3
Avoid Backover Accidents .................................1-3-3
Avoid Machine Tipover ......................................1-3-3
Add and Operate Attachments Safely ...............1-3-4
Use Special Care When Operating ...................1-3-4
Operating or Traveling On Public Roads...........1-3-4
Inspect and Maintain ROPS ..............................1-3-5
Safety—Maintenance Precautions
Park and Prepare for Service Safely .................1-4-1
Service Cooling System Safely .........................1-4-1
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating.........1-4-2
Make Welding Repairs Safely ...........................1-4-2
Drive Metal Pins Safely .....................................1-4-2
Service Tires Safely...........................................1-4-3
Operation—Operating The Machine
Inspect Machine Daily Before Starting ..............2-2-1
Check Instruments Before Starting....................2-2-2
Engine Break-In Period .....................................2-2-3
Continued on next page
Original Instructions. All information, illustrations and specifications in this
manual are based on the latest information available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice.
COPYRIGHT © 2013
DEERE & COMPANY
Moline, Illinois
All rights reserved.
A John Deere ILLUSTRUCTION ® Manual
Previous Editions
Copyright © 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2012
i
020113
PN=1
Contents
Page
Page
Starting the Engine ............................................2-2-3
Starting Fluid—Cold Weather Start
Aid—If Equipped ...........................................2-2-4
Using Coolant Heater—If Equipped ..................2-2-5
Warm-Up ...........................................................2-2-5
Cold Weather Warm-Up ....................................2-2-6
Ride Control Operation—If Equipped ................2-2-6
Pilot Control Operation—If Equipped ................2-2-7
Driving the Machine...........................................2-2-7
Cruise Control....................................................2-2-9
Operating Stabilizers .........................................2-2-9
Operating Boom Lock......................................2-2-10
Operating Swing Lock .....................................2-2-11
Operating Swing Lock Pin ...............................2-2-11
Operating Backhoe—John Deere
Two-Lever Controls .....................................2-2-12
Operating Backhoe—Excavator
Two-Lever Controls .....................................2-2-13
Operating Backhoe—John Deere Pilot
Controls.......................................................2-2-14
Operating Backhoe—Excavator Pilot
Controls.......................................................2-2-15
Operating Extendible Dipperstick—If
Equipped .....................................................2-2-16
Operating Extendible Dipperstick With
Attachments ................................................2-2-17
Operating Extendible Dipperstick
Lock—If Equipped.......................................2-2-17
Operating Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic
Selective Flow Functions—If Equipped.......2-2-18
Operating Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic
Functions—If Equipped...............................2-2-19
Operating Hydraulic Thumb—If Equipped.......2-2-20
Operating Backhoe Coupler—If Equipped ......2-2-21
Operating Loader Coupler—If Equipped .........2-2-22
Operating Loader.............................................2-2-23
Operating Differential Lock ..............................2-2-24
Operating Mechanical Front Wheel
Drive (MFWD)—If Equipped .......................2-2-24
Lifting ...............................................................2-2-25
Parking the Machine........................................2-2-25
Loading Machine on a Trailer ..........................2-2-26
Towing .............................................................2-2-27
Diesel Engine Oil—Tier 3 and Stage III
A Engines......................................................3-1-9
Diesel Engine Oil and Filter Service
Intervals—Tier 3/Stage III A Engine ............3-1-10
Transmission, Axles, and Mechanical
Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Oil ...................3-1-11
Hydraulic Oil ....................................................3-1-11
Grease.............................................................3-1-12
Heavy Duty Diesel Engine Coolant .................3-1-12
Drain Intervals for Diesel Engine Coolant........3-1-13
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Coolant
Extender......................................................3-1-13
Supplemental Coolant Additives......................3-1-14
Operating in Warm Temperature Climates ......3-1-14
Additional Information About Diesel
Engine Coolants and John Deere
COOL-GARD™ II Coolant Extender ...........3-1-15
Testing Diesel Engine Coolant.........................3-1-16
Maintenance—Periodic Maintenance
Service Machine at Specified Intervals..............3-2-1
Check Hour Meter Regularly .............................3-2-1
Prepare Machine for Maintenance ....................3-2-1
Engine Identification ..........................................3-2-2
Loader Boom Service Lock ...............................3-2-5
Opening and Closing Engine Hood ...................3-2-5
Fuel Tank ...........................................................3-2-5
Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and
3-Way Coolant Test Kit..................................3-2-6
Service Intervals ................................................3-2-7
Required Parts...................................................3-2-9
Maintenance—As Required
Check Tire Pressure..........................................3-3-1
Tire Inflation Pressures......................................3-3-2
Check Wheel Fasteners ....................................3-3-4
Clean Cab Air Filters—If Equipped....................3-3-4
Drain Water and Sediment from Water
Separator ......................................................3-3-6
Drain Auxiliary Water Separator Fuel
Filter—If Equipped ........................................3-3-6
Clean or Replace Air Cleaner
Elements—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine..............3-3-7
Clean or Replace Air Cleaner
Elements—Tier 2/Stage II Engine .................3-3-8
Grease MFWD Drive Shaft Splines—If
Equipped .......................................................3-3-8
Grease Non-Powered Front Wheel
Bearings—If Equipped ..................................3-3-9
Check Coolant .................................................3-3-10
Maintenance—Machine
Diesel Fuel.........................................................3-1-1
Lubricity of Diesel Fuel ......................................3-1-1
Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel ......................3-1-2
Biodiesel Fuel ....................................................3-1-3
Testing Diesel Fuel ............................................3-1-4
Minimizing the Effect of Cold Weather
on Diesel Engines .........................................3-1-5
Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants .................3-1-6
Diesel Engine Break-In™ Oil.............................3-1-6
Diesel Engine Oil—Tier 2 and Stage II
Engines .........................................................3-1-7
Diesel Engine Oil and Filter Service
Intervals—Tier 2/Stage II Engine ..................3-1-8
Maintenance—Every 10 Hours or Daily
Check Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level .................3-4-1
Check Engine Oil Level .....................................3-4-2
Check Coolant Level .........................................3-4-3
Inspect Fuel Water Sediment Bowls..................3-4-4
Grease Loader Pivots........................................3-4-5
ii
020113
PN=2
Contents
Page
Page
Grease Multipurpose Bucket Pivots—If
Equipped .......................................................3-4-6
Grease Stabilizer Pivots and Cylinder Pins .......3-4-6
Grease Backhoe Boom, Crowd
Cylinders and Pivots .....................................3-4-7
Grease Backhoe Bucket Cylinder and Pivots....3-4-8
Grease Backhoe Swing Cylinder and Pivots .....3-4-8
Grease Loader Quick Coupler—If Equipped .....3-4-9
Grease Non-Powered Front Axle
Steering Pivots—If Equipped ........................3-4-9
Grease MFWD Front Axle and
Universal Joints—If Equipped .......................3-4-9
Grease Backhoe Coupler Mechanical
Jack—If Equipped .......................................3-4-10
Grease Front Axle Pivot Pin ............................3-4-10
Replace Cab Air Filters......................................3-9-4
Inspect Belt........................................................3-9-5
Replace Hydraulic Oil Filter ...............................3-9-6
Replace Fuel Breather.......................................3-9-6
Change Transmission Oil and Replace Filter ....3-9-7
Check Coolant ...................................................3-9-8
Maintenance—Every 2000 Hours
Adjust Engine Valve Lash (Clearance) ............3-10-1
Change Hydraulic Reservoir Oil ......................3-10-1
Change MFWD Planetary Housing
Oil—If Equipped ..........................................3-10-2
Change MFWD Front Axle Housing
Oil—If Equipped ..........................................3-10-2
Change Rear Axle and Planetary
Housing Oil..................................................3-10-3
Inspect and Clean Hydraulic Reservoir
Fill Screen ...................................................3-10-4
Check Transmission Oil Level ...........................3-5-1
Grease Backhoe Coupler Fittings—If
Equipped .......................................................3-5-1
Draining the Cooling System—Tier
3/Stage IIIA Engine .....................................3-11-1
Draining the Cooling System—Tier
2/Stage II Engine.........................................3-11-2
Filling the Cooling System—Tier
3/Stage IIIA Engine .....................................3-11-3
Filling the Cooling System—Tier
2/Stage II Engine.........................................3-11-4
Maintenance—Initial Service—250 Hours
Change Engine Break-In Oil and
Replace Filter ................................................3-6-1
Check MFWD Planetary Housing
Oil—If Equipped ............................................3-7-1
Check MFWD Axle Oil Level—If Equipped .......3-7-1
Check Battery Electrolyte Level and Terminals ..3-7-2
Check Rear Axle Oil Level.................................3-7-4
Take Engine Oil Sample ....................................3-7-4
Miscellaneous—Machine
External Service Brake Inspection.....................4-1-1
Check and Adjust Backhoe Boom Lock ............4-1-2
Inspecting and Cleaning Dusty
Secondary and Primary Element ..................4-1-3
Check Receiver-Dryer—If Equipped .................4-1-3
Checking Coolant Hoses and Radiator .............4-1-4
Do Not Service or Adjust Injection
Nozzles or Injection Pump ............................4-1-5
Precautions for Alternator and Regulator ..........4-1-5
Using Battery Charger .......................................4-1-6
Using Booster Batteries—12-Volt System .........4-1-6
Handling, Checking and Servicing
Batteries Carefully.........................................4-1-7
Replacing Batteries ...........................................4-1-8
Removing Batteries ...........................................4-1-9
JDLink™ Machine Monitoring System
(MMS)—If Equipped......................................4-1-9
Replacing Fuses................................................4-1-9
Remove and Install Halogen Bulb ...................4-1-13
Checking Starting System ...............................4-1-14
Fluid Sampling Test Ports—If Equipped ..........4-1-14
Changing Loader Buckets ...............................4-1-15
Adding Front Counterweights ..........................4-1-16
Reversing Stabilizer Feet ................................4-1-16
Adding Liquid Ballast to Front Tires.................4-1-17
Welding On Machine .......................................4-1-17
Checking Ride Control Accumulator—If
Equipped .....................................................4-1-18
Check Air Intake Hose.......................................3-8-1
Check Boom-to-Dipperstick Pin Bolt Torque .....3-8-1
Drain Fuel Tank Water and Sediment................3-8-2
Change Engine Oil and Replace Filter ..............3-8-3
Replace Primary and Final Fuel
Filters—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine...................3-8-4
Replace Fuel Filter—Tier 2/Stage II Engine ......3-8-5
Replace Auxiliary Water Separator
Fuel Filter—If Equipped ................................3-8-5
Clean Engine Crankcase Ventilation
Tube—Tier 2/Stage II Engine........................3-8-6
Tube—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine ....................3-8-6
Take Fluid Samples ...........................................3-8-6
Clean, Pack, and Adjust Non-Powered
Front Wheel Bearings—If Equipped..............3-9-1
Replace Hydraulic Reservoir Breather ..............3-9-2
Replace Engine Air Cleaner
Elements—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine..............3-9-3
Replace Engine Air Cleaner
Elements—Tier 2/Stage II Engine .................3-9-4
iii
020113
PN=3
Contents
Page
Page
Discharge Ride Control System
Hydraulic Pressure—If Equipped ................4-1-19
Discharge Pilot Control System
Hydraulic Pressure—If Equipped ................4-1-19
Lowering Boom Without Electrical
Power—For Machines With Pilot Controls ..4-1-20
Check Park Brake............................................4-1-20
Bleeding Fuel System......................................4-1-21
Brake Bleeding Procedure...............................4-1-22
Service Recommendations For
Snap-To-Connect (STC®) Fittings ..............4-1-24
Adjusting Pilot Control Wrist Rest—If
Equipped .....................................................4-1-25
Toe-In Check and Adjust .................................4-1-26
Installing Teeth on Backhoe Bucket.................4-1-27
Do Not Service Control Valves,
Cylinders, Pumps or Motors........................4-1-27
Keep ROPS Installed Properly ........................4-1-28
Hardware Torque Specifications......................4-1-28
Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values.....4-1-29
Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values..............4-1-30
Inspect Loader Boom Service Lock.................4-1-30
310J Backhoe Loader Lifting
Capacities—Standard Dipperstick ................4-6-8
Capacities—Extendible Dipperstick
(Retracted) ....................................................4-6-8
(Extended).....................................................4-6-9
310SJ Dimensions...........................................4-6-10
310SJ Backhoe Loader Weight .......................4-6-14
310SJ Buckets.................................................4-6-15
310SJ Backhoe Loader Lifting
Capacities—Standard Dipperstick ..............4-6-15
(Retracted) ..................................................4-6-16
(Extended)...................................................4-6-16
Miscellaneous—Operational Checkout
Operational Checkout Procedure ......................4-2-1
Miscellaneous—Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Procedure ...............................4-3-1
Engine ...............................................................4-3-2
Electrical System ...............................................4-3-5
Steering System ................................................4-3-9
Hydraulic System.............................................4-3-10
Transmission ...................................................4-3-12
MFWD .............................................................4-3-12
Rear Axle.........................................................4-3-13
Air Conditioning ...............................................4-3-14
Miscellaneous—Storage
Prepare Machine for Storage ............................4-4-1
Monthly Storage Procedure...............................4-4-1
Miscellaneous—Machine Numbers
Record Product Identification Number (PIN) .....4-5-1
Record Engine Serial Number...........................4-5-1
Record Transmission Serial Number.................4-5-1
Record Rear Axle Housing Serial Number ........4-5-2
Record Mechanical Front Wheel Drive
(MFWD) Front Axle Housing Serial
Number—If Equipped....................................4-5-2
Keep Proof of Ownership ..................................4-5-2
Keep Machines Secure .....................................4-5-3
Miscellaneous—Specifications
Travel Speeds ...................................................4-6-1
Backhoe Loader Drain and Refill Capacities .....4-6-1
310J Backhoe Loader Dimensions....................4-6-2
310J Backhoe Loader Specifications ................4-6-6
310J Backhoe Loader Weight ...........................4-6-7
310J Buckets .....................................................4-6-7
iv
020113
PN=4
Safety—Safety And Operator Conveniences
Safety and Operator Convenience Features
2
3
1
17
5
16
6
13
4
12
7
14
10
8
9
T145296 —UN—05SEP01
15
11
T145296
Please remember, the operator is the key to preventing
accidents.
1. Headlights/Taillights. Two front halogen driving/work
lights and two rear halogen work lights.
2. Signal/Warning Lights. Roof mounted turning signal
lights and warning lights for on-road use.
3. ROPS Protection. Certified rollover protection
structure surrounds the operator. Integral roof
provides overhead protection.
4. Seat Position Sensor. An audio/visual warning alerts
operator when transmission control lever (TCL) is
in forward/reverse and the seat turned toward the
backhoe position.
5. Interior Rearview Mirror. Offers the operator a view
of activity behind him.
6. Handholds. Large and conveniently placed
handholds, make it easy to enter or exit the operator's
station.
7. Loader Boom Service Lock. Provided for working on
or around this machine with the boom raised.
8. Engine Fan Guard. A secondary engine fan guard
inside engine compartment encloses rotating fan
blades.
9. Bypass Start Protection. Shielding over the starter
solenoid helps prevent dangerous bypass starting.
10. Ground-Level Fueling, Daily Service Checks.
Ground-level fueling feature eliminates the need to
climb on the machine to fuel it.
11. Steps. Wide, skid-resistant steps provide excellent
footing for getting in/out of operator's station.
12. Independent Parking/Secondary Brake.
Independent, electrically controlled, parking brake
electrically engages when the engine is stopped.
13. Neutral Start. The machine will not move until the
Transmission Control Lever (TCL) is cycled back to
neutral and the park brake is released, regardless of
TCL position at startup.
14. Backup Alarm. Alerts bystanders when the machine
is shifted into reverse.
15. Seat Belt Retractors. Seat belt retractors help keep
belts clean and convenient to use.
16. Exceptional Visibility. Views to either side and front
or rear working tools are unrestricted.
17. Operator Manual Holder. A sealed manual holder
keeps manual clean and dry.
VD76477,000126F -19-14JUL09-1/1
1-1-1
020113
PN=9
Recognize Safety Information
T133555 —UN—28AUG00
This is the safety alert symbol. When you see this
symbol on your machine or in this manual, be alert
for the potential of personal injury.
Follow the precautions and safe operating practices
highlighted by this symbol.
A signal word — DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION —
is used with the safety alert symbol. DANGER identifies
the most serious hazards.
T133588 —19—28AUG00
On your machine, DANGER signs are red in color,
WARNING signs are orange, and CAUTION signs are
yellow. DANGER and WARNING signs are located near
specific hazards. General precautions are on CAUTION
labels.
TX03679,00016CC -19-05FEB10-1/1
Follow Safety Instructions
TS201 —UN—23AUG88
Carefully read all safety messages in this manual and on
your machine safety signs. Keep safety signs in good
condition. Replace missing or damaged safety signs. Be
sure new equipment components and repair parts include
the current safety signs. Replacement safety signs are
available from your John Deere dealer.
There can be additional safety information contained on
parts and components sourced from suppliers that is not
reproduced in this operator's manual.
Learn how to operate the machine and how to use controls
properly. Do not let anyone operate without instruction.
Keep your machine in proper working condition.
Unauthorized modifications to the machine may impair the
function and/or safety and affect machine life.
If you do not understand any part of this manual and need
assistance, contact your John Deere dealer.
DX,READ -19-16JUN09-1/1
Operate Only If Qualified
Do not operate this machine unless the operator's manual
has been read carefully, and you have been qualified by
supervised training and instruction.
Operator should be familiar with the job site and
surroundings before operating. Try all controls and
machine functions with the machine in an open area
before starting to work.
Know and observe all safety rules that may apply to every
work situation and work site.
TX03679,00016FA -19-03JAN07-1/1
1-2-1
020113
PN=10
Wear Protective Equipment
Guard against injury from flying pieces or metal or debris;
wear goggles or safety glasses.
Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment
appropriate to the job.
Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of
the operator. Do not wear radio or music headphones
while operating machine.
Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impairment
or loss of hearing. Wear suitable hearing protection such
as earmuffs or earplugs to protect against objectionable or
uncomfortable loud noises. Radio or music headphones
are not suitable to use for hearing protection.
OUT4001,0000570 -19-12FEB10-1/1
Avoid Unauthorized Machine Modifications
John Deere recommends using only genuine John Deere
replacement parts to ensure machine performance.
Never substitute genuine John Deere parts with alternate
parts not intended for the application as these can
create hazardous situations or hazardous performance.
Non-John Deere parts, or any damage or failures resulting
from their use are not covered by any John Deere warranty.
Modifications of this machine, or addition of unapproved
products or attachments, may affect machine stability or
reliability, and may create a hazard for the operator or
others near the machine. The installer of any modification
which may affect the electronic controls of this machine is
responsible for establishing that the modification does not
adversely affect the machine or its performance.
Always contact an authorized dealer before making
machine modifications that change the intended use,
weight or balance of the machine, or that alter machine
controls, performance or reliability.
AM40430,00000A9 -19-20AUG09-1/1
Inspect Machine
Keep all guards and shields in good condition and properly
installed. Fix damage and replace worn or broken parts
immediately. Pay special attention to hydraulic hoses and
electrical wiring.
T6607AQ —UN—18OCT88
Inspect machine carefully each day by walking around it
before starting.
TX03679,0001734 -19-08JAN08-1/1
Entanglements in moving parts can cause serious injury.
Stop engine before examining, adjusting or maintaining
any part of machine with moving parts.
Keep guards and shields in place. Replace any guard
or shield that has been removed for access as soon as
service or repair is complete.
T133592 —UN—12SEP01
Stay Clear of Moving Parts
TX03679,00016D2 -19-08JAN08-1/1
1-2-2
020113
PN=11
Avoid High-Pressure Oils
This machine uses a high-pressure hydraulic system.
Escaping oil under pressure can penetrate the skin
causing serious injury.
T133509 —UN—17MAR06
Never search for leaks with your hands. Protect hands.
Use a piece of cardboard to find location of escaping oil.
Stop engine and relieve pressure before disconnecting
lines or working on hydraulic system.
T133840 —UN—20SEP00
If hydraulic oil penetrates your skin, see a doctor
immediately. Injected oil must be removed surgically
within hours or gangrene may result. Contact a
knowledgeable medical source or the Deere & Company
Medical Department in Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.
TX03679,00016D3 -19-03NOV08-1/1
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids
X9811 —UN—23AUG88
Inspect hydraulic hoses periodically – at least once
per year – for leakage, kinking, cuts, cracks, abrasion,
blisters, corrosion, exposed wire braid or any other signs
of wear or damage.
Replace worn or damaged hose assemblies immediately
with John Deere approved replacement parts.
Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin
causing serious injury.
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before
disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands
and body from high-pressure fluids.
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any fluid
injected into the skin must be surgically removed within
a few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors unfamiliar
with this type of injury should reference a knowledgeable
medical source. Such information is available in
English from Deere & Company Medical Department in
Moline, Illinois, U.S.A., by calling 1-800-822-8262 or +1
309-748-5636.
DX,FLUID -19-12OCT11-1/1
1-2-3
020113
PN=12
Work In Ventilated Area
Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death. If
it is necessary to run an engine in an enclosed area,
remove the exhaust fumes from the area with an exhaust
pipe extension.
If you do not have an exhaust pipe extension, open the
doors and get outside air into the area.
DX,AIR -19-17FEB99-1/1
T133552 —UN—14SEP00
Prevent Fires
Handle Fuel Safely: Store flammable fluids away from
fire hazards. Never refuel machine while smoking or when
near sparks or flame.
Clean Machine Regularly: Keep trash, debris, grease
and oil from accumulating in engine compartment, around
fuel lines, hydraulic lines, exhaust components and
electrical wiring. Never store oily rags or flammable
materials inside a machine compartment.
T133553 —UN—07SEP00
Maintain Hoses and Wiring: Replace hydraulic hoses
immediately if they begin to leak, and clean up any oil
spills. Examine electrical wiring and connectors frequently
for damage.
Keep A Fire Extinguisher Available: Always keep a
multi-purpose fire extinguisher on or near the machine.
Know how to use extinguisher properly.
T133554 —UN—07SEP00
TX03679,00016F5 -19-26JUN09-1/1
1-2-4
020113
PN=13
Prevent Battery Explosions
Keep sparks, lighted matches, and open flame away from
the top of battery. Battery gas can explode.
Do not charge a frozen battery; it may explode. Warm
battery to 16°C (60°F).
Never check battery charge by placing a metal object
across the posts. Use a volt-meter or hydrometer.
DX,SPARKS -19-03MAR93-1/1
Handle Chemical Products Safely
A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) provides specific
details on chemical products: physical and health hazards,
safety procedures, and emergency response techniques.
Check the MSDS before you start any job using a
hazardous chemical. That way you will know exactly what
the risks are and how to do the job safely. Then follow
procedures and recommended equipment.
TS1132 —UN—26NOV90
Direct exposure to hazardous chemicals can cause
serious injury. Potentially hazardous chemicals used with
John Deere equipment include such items as lubricants,
coolants, paints, and adhesives.
(See your John Deere dealer for MSDS’s on chemical
products used with John Deere equipment.)
DX,MSDS,NA -19-03MAR93-1/1
Dispose of Waste Properly
Use leakproof containers when draining fluids. Do not use
food or beverage containers that may mislead someone
into drinking from them.
Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into
any water source.
TS1133 —UN—26NOV90
Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the
environment and ecology. Potentially harmful waste used
with John Deere equipment include such items as oil, fuel,
coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries.
Air conditioning refrigerants escaping into the air can
damage the Earth’s atmosphere. Government regulations
may require a certified air conditioning service center to
recover and recycle used air conditioning refrigerants.
Inquire on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste
from your local environmental or recycling center, or from
your John Deere dealer.
DX,DRAIN -19-03MAR93-1/1
1-2-5
020113
PN=14
Prepare for Emergencies
Be prepared if a fire starts.
Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service,
hospital, and fire department near your telephone.
Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.
DX,FIRE2 -19-03MAR93-1/1
Clean Debris from Machine
Clean any oil spills or fuel spills on machine surfaces.
Temperature in engine compartment may go up
immediately after engine is stopped. BE ON GUARD
FOR FIRES DURING THIS PERIOD.
Open access door(s) to cool the engine faster, and clean
engine compartment.
T6669AG —UN—18OCT88
Keep engine compartment, radiator, batteries, hydraulic
lines, exhaust components, fuel tank, and operator's
station clean and free of debris.
OUT4001,00000E3 -19-20AUG09-1/1
1-2-6
020113
PN=15
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly
T133468 —UN—30AUG00
Prevent falls by facing the machine when you get on and
off. Maintain 3-point contact with steps and handrails.
Never use machine controls as handholds.
Use extra care when mud, snow, or moisture present
slippery conditions. Keep steps clean and free of grease
or oil. Never jump when exiting machine. Never mount or
dismount a moving machine.
TX03679,00016F2 -19-12FEB07-1/1
T133715 —UN—07SEP00
Start Only From Operator's Seat
Avoid unexpected machine movement. Start engine only
while sitting in operator's seat. Ensure all controls and
working tools are in proper position for a parked machine.
Never attempt to start engine from the ground. Do not
attempt to start engine by shorting across the starter
solenoid terminals.
TX03679,0001799 -19-22APR10-1/1
Use and Maintain Seat Belt
T133716 —19—14SEP00
Use seat belt when operating machine. Remember to
fasten seat belt when loading and unloading from trucks
and during other uses.
Examine seat belt frequently. Be sure webbing is not
cut or torn. Replace seat belt immediately if any part is
damaged or does not function properly.
The complete seat belt assembly should be replaced
every three years, regardless of appearance.
TX03679,00016DD -19-19MAR07-1/1
Prevent Unintended Machine Movement
1
Be careful not to accidentally actuate steering, travel
or other controls. Engage park brake and lower work
equipment to the ground during work interruptions.
Stop the engine before allowing anyone to approach
the machine. Follow proper parking procedures before
leaving the operator's station.
P
TX1014609 —UN—19DEC06
Always set the park lock brake switch to the ON
position (1) before leaving the operator's seat for any
reason.
1— ON Position
VD76477,0001204 -19-02FEB07-1/1
1-3-1
020113
PN=16
Prevent Unintended Machine Movement—If
Equipped With Pilot Controls
TX1014474 —UN—12DEC06
Be careful not to accidentally actuate control levers
when co-workers are present. Always lock hydraulics on
backhoe during work interruptions. Lock hydraulics before
allowing anyone to approach machine.
Pilot Enable Switch
VD76477,0001200 -19-05SEP12-1/1
Avoid Work Site Hazards
Avoid contact with gas lines, buried cables and water
lines. Call utility line location services to identify all
underground utilities before starting work.
T147554 —UN—01NOV01
Prepare work site properly. Avoid operating near
structures or objects that could fall onto the machine. Clear
away debris that could move unexpectedly if run over.
Avoid boom or attachment contact with overhead
obstacles or overhead electrical lines. Never move any
part of machine or load closer than 3 m (10 ft) plus twice
the line insulator length to overhead wires.
T147555 —UN—13DEC01
Keep bystanders clear at all times. Keep bystanders
away from raised booms, attachments, and unsupported
loads. Avoid swinging or raising booms, attachments, or
loads over or near personnel. Use barricades or a signal
person to keep vehicles and pedestrians away. Use a
signal person if moving machine in congested areas or
where visibility is restricted. Always keep signal person in
view. Coordinate hand signals before starting machine.
Operate only on solid footing with strength sufficient
to support machine. Be especially alert working near
embankments or excavations.
Avoid working under over-hanging embankments or
stockpiles that could collapse on machine.
Reduce machine speed when operating with tool on or
near ground when obstacles may be hidden (e.g., during
snow removal or clearing mud, dirt, etc.). At high speeds
hitting obstacles (rocks, uneven concrete or manholes)
can cause a sudden stop. Always wear your seat belt.
VD76477,000001C -19-16NOV11-1/1
1-3-2
020113
PN=17
Keep Riders Off Machine
Riders on machine are subject to injury such as being
struck by foreign objects and being thrown off of the
machine. Riders also obstruct the operator’s view resulting
in the machine being operated in an unsafe manner.
T148715 —UN—06DEC01
Only allow the operator on the machine. Keep riders off.
TX03768,0000BAF -19-27MAR09-1/1
Before moving machine, be sure all persons are
clear of the machine travel path. Turn around and look
directly for best visibility. Use mirror to assist in checking
behind the machine. Keep windows and mirror clean and
in good repair.
Be certain backup warning alarm is working properly.
Use a signal person when backing if view is obstructed
or when in close quarters. Keep signal person in view at
all times. Use prearranged hand signals to communicate.
T145317 —UN—06SEP01
Avoid Backover Accidents
TX03768,0000B8B -19-20DEC06-1/1
Avoid Machine Tipover
Use seat belt at all times.
Do not jump if the machine tips. You will be unlikely to
jump clear and the machine may crush you.
Load and unload from trucks or trailers carefully. Be
sure truck is wide enough and secured on a firm level
surface. Use loading ramps and attach them properly to
truck bed.
Be careful on slopes. Use extra care on soft, rocky or
frozen ground because machine may slip sideways in
these conditions.
T147495 —19—26OCT01
Ensure solid footing. Use extra care when operating on
stockpile materials, or near banks or excavations that may
cave-in and cause machine to tip or fall.
TX03768,0000BA3 -19-07SEP06-1/1
1-3-3
020113
PN=18
Add and Operate Attachments Safely
Always verify compatibility of attachments by contacting
your authorized dealer. Adding unapproved attachments
may affect machine stability or reliability and may create a
hazard for others near the machine.
Ensure that a qualified person is involved in attachment
installation. Add guards to machine if operator protection
is required or recommended. Verify that all connections
are secure and attachment responds properly to controls.
Carefully read attachment manual and follow all
instructions and warnings. In an area free of bystanders
and obstructions, carefully operate attachment to learn its
characteristics and range of motion.
TX03679,00016F0 -19-12FEB07-1/1
Use Special Care When Operating
Operate carefully with raised loads. Raising the load
reduces machine stability, especially on side slopes on
soft terrain. Drive and turn slowly with a raised load.
Ensure that objects in the bucket are secure. Do not
attempt to lift or carry objects that are too big or too long to
fit inside the bucket unless secured with an adequate chain
or other device. Keep bystanders away from raised loads.
T148749 —UN—05DEC01
Never use the loader to lift people. Do not allow anyone
to ride in the bucket or use the bucket as a work platform.
Never lift an object above or near another person.
T147438 —UN—26OCT01
Be careful when lifting objects. Never attempt to lift
objects too heavy for your machine. Assure machine
stability and hydraulic capability with a test lift before
attempting other maneuvers. Use an adequate chain or
sling and proper rigging techniques to attach and stabilize
loads.
TX03768,0000B70 -19-27MAR09-1/1
Machines that work near vehicle traffic or travel slower
than normal highway speeds must have proper lighting
and markings to assure they are visible to other drivers.
Install additional lights, beacons, slow moving vehicle
(SMV) emblems, or other devices and use as required to
make the machine visible and identify it as a work machine.
Check state and local regulations to assure compliance.
Keep these devices clean and in working condition.
T141891 —UN—22MAY01
Operating or Traveling On Public Roads
TX03679,00017C8 -19-02MAR07-1/1
1-3-4
020113
PN=19
Inspect and Maintain ROPS
A damaged roll-over protective structure (ROPS) should
be replaced, not reused.
The protection offered by ROPS will be impaired if ROPS
is subjected to structural damage, is involved in an
overturn incident, or is in any way altered by welding,
bending, drilling, or cutting.
If ROPS was loosened or removed for any reason, inspect
it carefully before operating the machine again.
To maintain the ROPS:
• Replace missing hardware using correct grade
hardware.
• Check hardware torque.
• Check isolation mounts for damage, looseness or wear;
replace them if necessary.
• Check ROPS for cracks or physical damage.
TX03679,000179F -19-07SEP06-1/1
1-3-5
020113
PN=20
Park and Prepare for Service Safely
Warn others of service work. Always park and prepare
your machine for service or repair properly.
to the ground.
• Engage park brake.
• Stop engine and remove key.
• Attach a “Do Not Operate” tag in an obvious place in
the operator's station.
Securely support machine or attachment before working
under it.
T133332 —19—14DEC01
• Park machine on a level surface and lower equipment
• Do not support machine with any hydraulically actuated
tools or attachments.
• Do not support machine with cinder blocks or wooden
pieces that may crumble or crush.
• Do not support machine with a single jack or other
this machine with the loader boom raised.
Understand service procedures before beginning repairs.
Keep service area clean and dry. Use two people
whenever the engine must be running for service work.
devices that may slip out of place.
• Always install boom lock before working on or around
TX03679,0001809 -19-02MAR07-1/1
Service Cooling System Safely
Do not service radiator through the radiator cap. Only fill
through the surge tank filler cap. Shut off engine. Only
remove surge tank filler cap when cool enough to touch
with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
Explosive release of fluids from pressurized cooling
system can cause serious burns.
VD76477,0001157 -19-20DEC06-1/1
1-4-1
020113
PN=21
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating
Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust.
Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is heated
by welding, soldering, or using a torch.
Remove paint before heating:
• Remove paint a minimum of 100 mm (4 in.) from area
•
•
to be affected by heating. If paint cannot be removed,
wear an approved respirator before heating or welding.
If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust.
Wear an approved respirator.
If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper with
soap and water before welding. Remove solvent or
paint stripper containers and other flammable material
from area. Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes
before welding or heating.
Do not use a chlorinated solvent in areas where welding
will take place.
Do all work in an area that is well ventilated to carry toxic
fumes and dust away.
Dispose of paint and solvent properly.
DX,PAINT -19-24JUL02-1/1
Make Welding Repairs Safely
Avoid welding or heating near pressurized fluid lines.
Flammable spray may result and cause severe burns if
pressurized lines fail as a result of heating. Do not let heat
go beyond work area to nearby pressurized lines.
Remove paint properly. Do not inhale paint dust or fumes.
Use a qualified welding technician for structural repairs.
T133547 —UN—31AUG00
IMPORTANT: Disable electrical power before
welding. Turn off main battery switch
or disconnect positive battery cable.
Separate harness connectors to engine and
vehicle microprocessors.
Make sure there is good ventilation. Wear eye protection
and protective equipment when welding.
TX03679,00016D5 -19-24SEP07-1/1
Always wear protective goggles or safety glasses and
other protective equipment before striking hardened
parts. Hammering hardened metal parts such as pins and
bucket teeth may dislodge chips at high velocity.
Use a soft hammer or a brass bar between hammer and
object to prevent chipping.
T133738 —UN—14SEP00
Drive Metal Pins Safely
TX03679,0001745 -19-07SEP06-1/1
1-4-2
020113
PN=22
Service Tires Safely
Explosive separation of a tire and rim parts can cause
serious injury or death.
Do not attempt to mount a tire unless you have the proper
equipment and experience to perform the job.
Always maintain the correct tire pressure. Do not inflate
the tires above the recommended pressure. Never weld
or heat a wheel and tire assembly. The heat can cause
an increase in air pressure resulting in a tire explosion.
Welding can structurally weaken or deform the wheel.
When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and extension
hose long enough to allow you to stand to one side and
NOT in front of or over the tire assembly. Use a safety
cage if available.
Check wheels for low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged
rims or missing lug bolts and nuts.
DX,RIM -19-24AUG90-1/1
1-4-3
020113
PN=23
TX1016262 —19—14DEC06
Safety Signs
1-5-1
VD76477,0001540 -19-06JUN07-1/2
020113
PN=24
TX1016263 —19—14DEC06
VD76477,0001540 -19-06JUN07-2/2
1-5-2
020113
PN=25
TX1024865 —19—10JUL07
Safety Signs—Backhoe Coupler (If Equipped)
Safety Signs—If Equipped with Backhoe Coupler
VD76477,000152B -19-26JUN07-1/1
1-5-3
020113
PN=26
Replace Safety Signs
There can be additional safety information contained on
parts and components sourced from suppliers that is not
reproduced in this operator's manual.
Replace missing or damaged safety signs. Use this
operator’s manual for correct safety sign placement.
DX,SIGNS -19-18AUG09-1/1
1-5-4
020113
PN=27
Pedals and Levers
3— Backhoe Auxiliary
Hydraulic Function Foot
Pedal
T163833B —UN—13JAN03
1— Backhoe Control Lever
2— Boom Lock Lever
HG31779,00001C3 -19-31OCT06-1/1
Pedals and Levers—If Equipped With Pilot
Controls
3— Backhoe Auxiliary
Hydraulic Function Foot
Pedal
T163834B —UN—13JAN03
1— Backhoe Pilot Controls
2— Boom Lock Lever
HG31779,00001C4 -19-31OCT06-1/1
Fire Extinguisher Location
NOTE: Be familiar with the operation of the fire
extinguisher. Inspect the fire extinguisher and
service the fire extinguisher regularly
The designated location for mounting the fire extinguisher
is inside the cab and to the right of the steering console.
TX1043059A —UN—29MAY08
1— Fire Extinguisher
Fire Extinguisher Location
MB60223,0000057 -19-22APR09-1/1
2-1-1
020113
PN=28
Standard Display Monitor (SDM)
3
2
4
1
7
17
16
5
15
6
14
13
11
12
1— STOP Indicator
2— Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
3— Converter Oil Temperature
Gauge
4— Fuel Level Gauge
5— Display Window
6— Park Brake Indicator
7— Hydraulic Oil Filter Restriction
Indicator
8— Diagnostic Code Indicator
9— Joystick Enable Indicator
10— Hydraulic Oil Temperature
Indicator
• MENU provides initial entry into machine settings,
•
diagnostics and monitor functions. Once a main menu
has been selected, pressing MENU again will return to
the Normal Display Mode Menu.
BACK will back out of a menu, one item each time the
key is pressed. The BACK key will eventually return to
the normal display.
11— Not Used This Application
12— Fasten Seat Belt Indicator
14— MFWD Indicator
15— Engine Alternator Voltage
Indicator
10
9
TX1002567
TX1002567 —UN—30JAN06
8
16— Engine Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
17— Engine Oil Pressure
Indicator
• NEXT will move to the next selection within a menu or
•
mode. Press NEXT to cycle through all the possible
selections in a menu.
SELECT toggles between displays during normal
operation. During menu modes, SELECT will activate
the currently chosen menu, provide additional
information on codes, make selection and reset timers.
VD76477,00011A9 -19-07MAR07-1/1
2-1-2
020113
PN=29
Standard Display Functions
1—Stop Indicator:
IMPORTANT: If STOP indicator lights and alarm
sounds for more than 10 seconds with engine oil
pressure indicator lit, stop machine immediately
and investigate cause of problem.
If STOP indicator lights and alarm sounds for
more than 10 seconds with engine coolant
temperature gauge needle in red zone, reduce
load and run engine for 1—2 minutes at slow
idle to allow time to cool. If STOP indicator
remains lit and engine coolant temperature
gauge needle does not fall to an acceptable
operating temperature, stop engine and
investigate problem. Do not restart engine
until problem has been corrected.
The STOP indicator lights and alarm sounds when:
• Engine oil pressure is low.
• Engine coolant temperature is excessively high.
• Transmission control lever (TCL) is shifted into “forward”
F or “reverse” R with park brake ON.
IMPORTANT: If hydraulic oil filter restriction indicator
lights and hydraulic oil is warm, change filter
as soon as possible to prevent damage.
NOTE: On the 310SJ model, the hydraulic oil filter
restriction warning is disabled (will NOT activate)
for temperatures 38° C (100° F) and below.
Indicator will light when hydraulic oil filter element is
restricted.
NOTE: Cold oil can cause indicator to light temporarily.
Allow time for oil to warm up and indicator to
go out before servicing filter.
8—Diagnostic Code Indicator: Indicator will light when a
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is activated; text message
and code appears in display window. It may not be
necessary to stop the engine immediately, but the cause
should be investigated as soon as possible. Press MENU,
BACK, NEXT or SELECT to acknowledge message and
turn indicator off.
• TCL is shifted into “forward” F or “reverse” R with
9—Joystick Enabled Indicator: Joystick Enable
Indicator will light when joysticks are enabled. Light will
go OFF whenever joysticks become disabled.
2—Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge: When engine
coolant temperature is too high the gauge needle will
enter red zone, STOP indicator will light, and alarm will
sound. Do not stop engine. Reduce load and run engine
at slow idle for 1—2 minutes. If gauge needle does not
fall to an acceptable operating level, stop engine. See
your authorized dealer.
10—Hydraulic Oil Temperature Indicator: Indicator will
light when hydraulic oil temperature is high. Reduce load
immediately. Actuate backhoe bucket unload function.
park brake OFF and seat rotated toward the backhoe
position.
3—Torque Converter Oil Temperature Gauge: When
torque converter oil temperature is too high, gauge needle
will enter red zone, STOP indicator will light, and alarm
will sound. Reduce load immediately, shift into NEUTRAL
and run engine at slow idle. Inspect for plugged oil cooler.
11—Not used this application.
12—Fasten Seat Belt Indicator: Indicator will light for
the first 5 seconds after the engine is started to warn the
operator to fasten seat belt.
13—Not used this application.
14—MFWD Indicator: Indicator will light when
mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) is engaged.
4—Fuel Level Gauge: Gauge shows fuel level in tank.
Fuel level gauge needle will enter red zone when fuel
level is low.
15—Engine Alternator Voltage Indicator: Indicator will
light when alternator output voltage drops below 12V.
Check electrical system or recharge battery, if necessary.
5—Display Window: Display window has six active
displays; two constant and four selectable.
16—Engine Air Filter Restriction Indicator: When air
filter elements are restricted, indicator will light. Clean
or change filter elements.
• FNR (Constant)
• Tachometer (Constant)
• Hour Meter (Selectable)
• Hydraulic Oil Temperature (Selectable)
• Battery Voltage (Selectable)
• Job Timer (Selectable)
17—Engine Oil Pressure Indicator:
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible engine damage. If
engine oil pressure indicator light comes
on while operating, stop machine. STOP
ENGINE IMMEDIATELY.
Press NEXT to scroll through listing, to view desired data.
6—Park Brake Indicator: Indicator will light when park
brake is engaged.
When engine oil pressure is low, indicator will light, STOP
indicator will flash and alarm will sound. Stop machine.
STOP ENGINE IMMEDIATELY.
7—Hydraulic Oil Filter Restriction Indicator:
VD76477,00011AA -19-14JUL09-1/1
2-1-3
020113
PN=30
Anti-Theft Security System Configuration
IMPORTANT: The default Owner security code for
the anti-theft security system is 111 for 3-digit
security systems, and 00111 for 5-digit security
systems. The default Operator security codes
are 000, 999, and 998 for 3-digit security
systems, and 00000, 00999, and 00998 for
5-digit security systems.
8. Press the SELECT button to select the displayed
locking method.
9. The selected locking method displays for 2 seconds
before the SDM returns to the normal display mode
menu.
When providing Operator security codes to
machine users, owners should not provide
operators with the default codes. Instead,
owners should first change the default Operator
security codes to other values before providing
codes to machine users. Refer to Changing
an Operator or Owner Security Code in this
section for more information.
Once the anti-theft security system has been enabled,
either as a factory installed option or field installation, the
system needs to be configured. Select the locking method
and change the Owner and Operator security codes, as
necessary.
Changing an Operator or Owner Security Code
IMPORTANT: If all three available Operator security
codes will not be used, make sure the unused
codes are changed to something other then their
default values. Leaving access to the machine
by means of default codes is not recommended.
The following rules apply when changing security codes:
• An Operator security code can only be changed if that
•
security code or the Owner security code is used during
the change procedure.
The Owner security code can be used to reset all codes
back to their defaults by accessing the RESET ALL
menu option.
The anti-theft security system resets all Operator
security codes and the Owner security code to the
default values when the Master security code is used to
enable the system.
The Owner security code can only be changed by
someone using the Owner security code. The Owner
security code must be entered before changing that
code.
Selecting the Locking Method
•
Complete the following procedure to select the locking
method for the anti-theft security system. Only someone
with the Owner security code can configure the locking
method. There are four locking options available within
the anti-theft security system:
•
• Prompt for Lock
• Auto Lock—5 Minutes
• Anti-theft off (machine is not locked)
1. Press the MENU button on the standard display
monitor (SDM) to access the MAIN MENU.
2. Press the NEXT button until MAIN MENU ANTITHEFT
displays.
displays.
3. Press the SELECT button to display ANTITHEFT SET
CODES.
CODES.
4. Press the SELECT button. Display shows ANTITHEFT
OWNER.
5. If changing an Operator security code, press the NEXT
button to display the appropriate Operator security
code to change. If changing the Owner security code,
proceed to next step.
4. Press the NEXT button to display ANTITHEFT
CONFIG.
5. Press the SELECT button to display OWNER CODE
0 0 0 (3-digit system) or OWNER CODE 0 0 0 0 0
(5-digit system).
6. Press the SELECT button. Display shows CURRENT
CODE 0 0 0 (3-digit system) or CURRENT CODE 0
0 0 0 0 (5-digit system).
6. Enter the current Owner security code. The current
locking method displays.
7. Enter the Owner security code or current Operator
security code for the code to be changed.
7. Press the NEXT button to display the appropriate
locking method.
a. Press the NEXT button or the BACK button to
change the number displayed in the active (flashing)
field. The NEXT button increments the current digit;
the BACK button decrements the current digit.
• ANTITHEFT OFF
• PROMPT FOR LOCK
• AUTOLOCK 5 MINUTES
• AUTOLOCK 60 MINUTES
2-1-4
MD04263,00003A7 -19-22APR09-1/2
020113
PN=31
b. Press the SELECT button to accept the number
displayed (flashing) in the active field and shift the
active field to the next digit to the right.
NOTE: Pressing the SELECT button to accept the last
digit (third digit or fifth digit depending on system
configuration) processes the entered security
code. If the code is incorrect, an error message
appears on the monitor display.
The anti-theft security system allows three
attempts to enter a valid security code before
requiring the key switch to be turned OFF and
ON to restart the process.
“111”, “000”, “999”, and “998”, respectively, for 3-digit
security systems, and “00111”, “00000”, “00999”, and
“00998” for 5-digit security systems.
9. The default codes display before the SDM returns to
the normal display mode menu.
NOTE: If owner code is not available, security codes
can be reset using the Master security code.
See your authorized dealer.
Changing System Security Code Length
Use this procedure to select the length of security code
to use with the anti-theft security system, either 3-digit or
5-digit. The system default is 3-digit.
8. Enter the new security code.
9. The new security code displays for 3 seconds before
the SDM returns to the normal display mode menu.
Resetting Operator and Owner Security Codes
displays.
CODES.
displays.
4. Press the NEXT button until ANTITHEFT SYSTEM
displays.
CODES.
5. Press the SELECT button. Display shows OWNER
CODE 0 0 0 (3-digit system) or OWNER CODE 0 0 0
0 0 (5-digit system).
4. Press the SELECT button. Display shows ANTITHEFT
OWNER.
5. Press the NEXT button until ANTITHEFT RESET ALL
displays.
6. Press the SELECT button. Display shows OWNER
CODE 0 0 0 (3-digit system) or OWNER CODE 0 0 0
7. Enter the current Owner security code.
6. Enter the current Owner security code.
7. The current Antitheft System will be displayed, either
ANTITHEFT 3-DIGIT or ANTITHEFT 5-DIGIT. To
change the selection, press the NEXT button to cycle
between the different systems and then press the
SELECT button to activate. At this point, all codes will
be set to anti-theft system defaults, but the system
locking method will remain unchanged.
8. The anti-theft security system resets the Owner and
three Operator security codes to their defaults of
MD04263,00003A7 -19-22APR09-2/2
2-1-5
020113
PN=32
Anti-Theft Security System Operation
IMPORTANT: When providing Operator security codes
to machine users, owners should not provide
operators with the default codes. Instead,
owners should first change the default Operator
security codes to other values before providing
codes to machine users. See Anti-Theft Security
System Configuration in this section.
1. Turn key switch to OFF.
2. Machine remains unlocked for the next 60 minutes.
After 60 minutes, a valid 3-digit or 5-digit security
code, depending on system configuration, is required
for machine operation.
Unlocking the Machine (Operator and Owner)
NOTE: On a locked machine, engine can be started
but will shut down after 3 seconds.
1. Sit in the operator's seat to power up the engagement
and monitor unit.
Locking the Machine (Operator and Owner)
2. Turn key switch to ON position.
There are three different locking methods available with
the anti-theft security system. See Anti-Theft Security
System Configuration for more information on selecting a
locking method.
3. The standard display monitor (SDM) displays ENTER
CODE 0 0 0 (3-digit system) or ENTER CODE 0 0 0
4. Enter the appropriate security code:
• Prompt for Lock
NOTE: On a locked machine, engine can be started
but will shut down after 3 seconds.
Prompt for Lock
2. The monitor display shows HIT SELECT TO LOCK.
NOTE: If you do not press SELECT to lock the machine
within 20 seconds of turning key switch OFF, the
SDM will NOT lock the machine.
3. Press the SELECT button within 20 seconds to lock
the machine.
Auto Lock—5 Minutes
2. Machine remains unlocked for the next 5 minutes.
After 5 minutes, a valid 3-digit or 5-digit security code,
depending on system configuration, is required for
machine operation.
Auto Lock—60 Minutes
configuration) processes the entered security code.
5. Once a security code is entered, the monitor displays
UNLOCKING ANTITHEFT while the SDM attempts to
unlock the machine.
6. The SDM display shows ANTITHEFT UNLOCKED
if the security code was correct and the machine is
unlocked.
The display shows FAILED TO UNLOCK if the security
code was incorrect.
NOTE: The anti-theft security system allows three
MD04263,00003A8 -19-22APR09-1/1
2-1-6
020113
PN=33
Standard Display Monitor (SDM)—Normal Display
When key switch is turned to the ON/RUN position:
• Indicator Lights:
•
•
All indicator lights come on for 5
seconds. If the engine is cold, the oil pressure indicator
and STOP indicator will remain lit, after the others go
out. Park brake indicator will also stay on.
Gauges: Backlights come on and gauge needles cycle,
before settling to actual readings.
Monitor Display Window: All LCD segments light,
followed by the machine model number and then the
last screen displayed at engine shut down.
Display window has six active displays, two constant and
four selectable.
Transmission indicator(s) and the tachometer are constant
displays.
NOTE: Transmission indicator shows the actual gear
the transmission is in, not the position of the
transmission control lever (TCL).
Transmission indicator shows the travel position of the
transmission control lever (TCL), F—forward, N—neutral,
R—reverse and the speed range (1, 2, 3, or 4) selected
by the operator.
(SDM) will show ?F for any forward gear, ?R for any
reverse gear, or ?N when in neutral. This will allow the
operator to move the machine for diagnostics or repair.
Tachometer shows engine speed in revolutions-per-minute
(rpm).
Press NEXT button repeatedly, to scroll through the
selectable displays.
Hour meter, Battery Voltage, Hydraulic Oil Temperature,
and Job Timer are operator selectable displays.
Hour Meter shows total machine hours, to the nearest
tenth of an hour, and accumulates time only when the
engine is running.
Hydraulic Oil Temperature is displayed in either degrees
Fahrenheit or Celsius depending on the units selected.
For further information, see Standard Display Monitor
(SDM)—Main Menu—Monitor in this section.
Battery Voltage is displayed to the nearest tenth of a volt.
Job Timer can be set to record time for a specific job or
operator. For further information, see Standard Display
Monitor (SDM)—Main Menu—Job Timer in this section.
When a transmission fault code is present and the TCL
has been placed in gear, the Standard Display Monitor
MD04263,00000BD -19-14JUL09-1/1
2-1-7
020113
PN=34
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Monitor
Messages
displays on the SDM until the fault either is resolved or the
operator presses any button on the SDM.
The standard display monitor (SDM) automatically
displays a message for certain diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs). When the DTC is initially active, a message
The DTCs that automatically generate a SDM message
include:
Monitor Text
Description
CONVERTER OIL TEMP
Torque Converter Oil Temperature High
CONVERTER OIL TEMP
Torque Converter Oil Temperature Sensor (B6) Input Voltage High
CONVERTER OIL TEMP
Torque Converter Oil Temperature Sensor (B6) Input Voltage Low
DIFF LOCK SW FAULT
Differential Lock Switch Stuck
ECU CONFIG MISMATCH
Security Violation
ENG TEMP SENSOR FLT
Engine Coolant Temperature Input Voltage High
ENG TEMP SENSOR FLT
Engine Coolant Temperature Input Voltage Low
ENGINE AIR FILTER
Engine Air Filter Restricted
ENGINE OVER TEMP
Engine Coolant Temperature Extremely High
FUEL TEMP CONTROL
Internal ECU Failure
HI SYSTEM VOLTAGE
System Voltage High
HYD OIL FILTER
Hydraulic Oil Filter Restricted
HYD OIL TEMP XXX (temperature value)
Hydraulic Oil Temperature High
HYD OIL TEMP XXX (temperature value)
Hydraulic Oil Temperature Moderately High
LOW ENGINE OIL PRES
Engine Oil Pressure Extremely Low
LOW SYSTEM VOLTAGE
System Voltage Low
NO CLUTCH DISCONNECT
Clutch Disconnect Device Fault
Clutch Disconnect Switch Stuck Closed
Switch Short to Ground
TURN SEAT TO REAR
Seat Position Front Switch (S17) Short Circuit to Power or Stuck Closed
Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main Menu
The Main Menu provides the capability to select the next
submenus. The Main Menu is accessed by pressing the
MENU button. The submenus under Main Menu include:
1. Codes: View active or stored diagnostic trouble codes
(DTC).
2. Monitor: Change display units and language.
3. Job Timer: Set-up or reset job timer.
4. Settings: Operator selectable preferences.
MAIN MENU
CODES
MONITOR
JOB TIMER
TX1015152 —19—22JAN07
VD76477,0001544 -19-01FEB08-1/1
JH91824,00009AE -19-10FEB10-1/1
2-1-8
020113
PN=35
Press the MENU button to display the Main Menu.
Codes will be highlighted. Press the SELECT button to
display the Codes submenu.
The submenus under Codes include:
• Active
• Stored
CODES
ACTIVE
STORED
TX1015154 —19—22JAN07
Menu—Codes
Press NEXT to toggle between ACTIVE and STORED
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC).
Press SELECT to view details of either code type.
VD76477,00011EB -19-21DEC06-1/3
If no codes have been received (ACTIVE) or recorded
(STORED), NO ACTIVE or NO STORED CODES will
appear on display. If codes have been received or
recorded, the most recent code will appear first, numbered
1/X, along with the controller ID and the DTC.
TX1003365 —UN—03FEB06
In the example shown, 1 of 2 codes is displayed. The
code was reported by the Engine Control Unit (ECU) and
it is number 105.15.
DTC Example
Press NEXT to scroll through codes or press SELECT
to view code details; a text message will give a brief
description of what occurred to trigger the code. Stored
codes also include hour meter readings of the first and
last occurrence of the DTC.
NOTE: The DTC is stored every time the engine is
started with an active code. Total number of
occurrences may reflect the number of times the
engine was restarted, rather than the number of
times the DTC actually occurred. Stored codes
should only be cleared by a trained service
technician. See your authorized dealer.
FUEL GAUGE
SENSOR
OUT OF
RANGE HIGH
TX1003367 —19—22JAN07
VD76477,00011EB -19-21DEC06-2/3
Text Message
TX1003369 —UN—03FEB06
Hour Meter Readings
VD76477,00011EB -19-21DEC06-3/3
2-1-9
020113
PN=36
Menu—Monitor
Use the NEXT button to highlight the Monitor option and
press SELECT to view the Monitor submenu.
The submenus under Monitor include:
• Units
• Language
MONITOR
UNITS
LANGUAGE
Press SELECT to view display options.
TX1015155 —19—22JAN07
SELECTED will appear when settings are changed,
then display returns to MONITOR menu.
ENGLISH
METRIC
SELECTED
Units
ENGLISH
S PA N I S H
FRENCH
SELECTED
TX1003379 —19—22JAN07
•
METRIC. Press SELECT to display readings in either
English or Metric units.
LANGUAGE: Press NEXT to scroll through available
languages (English, Spanish or French). Press
SELECT to change display text to desired language.
TX1003377 —19—22JAN07
• UNITS: Press NEXT to toggle between ENGLISH and
Languages
VD76477,00011EC -19-31OCT06-1/1
2-1-10
020113
PN=37
Menu—Job Timer
Use the NEXT button to highlight the Job Timer option
and press SELECT to view the Job Timer submenu.
TX1015156 —19—22JAN07
JOB TIMER
UNHIDE
RESET TIME
Job timer is a resettable hour meter that can be used to
time specific tasks to the nearest tenth of an hour. Job
timer accumulates hours whenever the engine is running,
even if the display is hidden. Accumulated hours are
stored in memory when the key switch is turned off.
The submenus under Job Timer include:
• Hide or Unhide
• Reset Timer
Press NEXT to toggle between HIDE or UNHIDE and
RESET TIME.
Press SELECT to reset timer to zero hours. RESET will
appear when hours are cleared and then display returns
to the JOB TIMER menu.
Press SELECT to hide or show job timer. HIDDEN or
UNHIDDEN will appear on display and then return to the
JOB TIMER menu.
VD76477,00011ED -19-14DEC06-1/1
Standard Display Monitor (SDM) Main Menu—Settings
Settings is the menu option that allows the operator to
select his/her preferences.
- Antispill Factory - Restores factory settings
• Stabilizer Speeds
“SAVING SELECTION” will appear once a preference has
been selected.
•
Use the NEXT button to highlight the Settings option and
press SELECT to view the Settings submenu.
The submenus under Settings include:
•
• Backhoe Accu-swing™
•
- Off
- Fast Stop
- Medium Stop
- Slow Stop
Setting Antispill
•
NOTE: Changing selections in this menu will be
confirmed with an audible alarm
•
- Boom and Bucket - Locks in settings
- Slow
- Medium
- Fast
Selective Flow (if equipped)
- Flow Rate - 5-35 gallons per minute.
- Flow Relief Pressure
- OFF
- 1200-3500 psi
- Fast
Loader Auxiliary Speed (if equipped)
- Slow
- Medium
- Fast
Backhoe Auxiliary Speed (if equipped)
- Slow
- Medium
- Fast
Differential Lock Speed Limit
- Off
- On
Accu-swing is a trademark of Deere & Company
JH91824,00009A8 -19-14MAY10-1/1
2-1-11
020113
PN=38
TX1059518A —UN—15MAY09
Right-Side Console Functions
1— Park Brake Switch
2— Key Switch
3— Horn Button
4— Ride Control Switch and
Indicator—If Equipped
5— Beacon Switch—If Equipped
6— Pattern Select Switch and
7— Not Used
8— Auxiliary Hydraulic Function
Switch and Indicator—If
Equipped
9— Not Used
10— Engine Speed Control Knob
11— Start Aid Switch—If
Equipped
12— Side Docking Lights Switch
13— Rear Work Lights Switch
14— Mechanical Front Wheel
Drive (MFWD) Switch—If
Equipped
15— Air Suspension Seat Height
Adjustment Switch—If
Equipped
16— Rear Wiper Switch—If
Equipped
1—Park Brake Switch: Push left half of switch to engage
park brake. Push right half of switch to disengage park
brake.
17— Display Monitor
18— Blower Speed Knob—If
Equipped
19— Temperature Control
Knob—If Equipped
20— Defroster, Heater, and Air
Conditioner Switch—If
Equipped
2—Key Switch: This switch has three positions:
6—Pattern Select Switch and Indicator—If Equipped:
Push the upper half of switch to activate the excavator
control pattern. Push the lower half of switch to activate
the backhoe control pattern.
• Position where ignition key can be inserted or removed
7—Not Used
•
8—Auxiliary Hydraulic Function Switch and
Indicator—If Equipped: Push switch to activate and
deactivate backhoe auxiliary hydraulic attachments. The
switch has three positions:
•
is the “off” position. No circuits are active in this position.
Turn key clockwise from the “off position. This is the
“run” position for the engine.
Turn key clockwise from the “run” position. This is the
“start” position for the engine. After starting engine,
release key. Key will return to “run” position.
3—Horn Button: Press button to sound the horn.
• Push upper half to activate auxiliary hydraulic function
• Push to middle position to transfer control to the
backhoe auxiliary function foot switch
4—Ride Control Switch and Indicator—If Equipped:
Push upper half of switch to activate ride control. Switch
will light when ride control is activated. Push lower half of
switch to deactivate ride control.
5—Beacon Switch—If Equipped: Push the upper half of
switch to turn beacon light on. Push lower half of switch to
turn beacon light off.
• Push lower half to deactivate the auxiliary hydraulic
function
9—Not Used
10—Engine Speed Control Knob: Rotate knob clockwise
to increase engine speed. Rotate counterclockwise to
decrease engine speed.
2-1-12
TX18203,00004B6 -19-15MAY09-1/2
020113
PN=39
11—Start Aid Button—If Equipped: Press and hold
button when engine is cold and cranking to inject starting
fluid into engine during cold weather start-up.
12—Side Docking Lights Switch: Push the upper half
of switch to turn side docking lights on. Push lower half
of switch to turn lights off.
13—Rear Working Lights Switch: Push switch to middle
position to turn first set of rear work lights on. Push top
half of switch to turn entire set of rear work lights on. Push
bottom half of switch to turn rear work lights off.
14—Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Switch—If
Equipped: Push switch up to engage the MFWD axle.
Push switch down to disengage the MFWD axle.
15—Air Suspension Seat Height Adjustment
Switch—If Equipped:
CAUTION: Ensure seat is locked in position
before operating machine. A seat that is loose
or not properly locked can cause loss of control
of machine and injuries or death.
Push upper half of switch to increase air suspension seat
height and firmness of ride. Push lower half of switch to
decrease air suspension seat height and firmness of ride.
16—Rear Wiper Switch—If Equipped:
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to wiper blades,
DO NOT operate wipers if blades are
frozen to windshield.
18—Blower Speed Knob—If Equipped: Turn knob
clockwise to increase blower speed or counterclockwise
to reduce blower speed. The blower knob has four speed
settings plus an “Off” position.
19—Temperature Control Knob—If Equipped: Turn
knob to adjust air temperature. Turn clockwise towards
HOT (red) for warmer air (best for heating and defrosting).
Turn counterclockwise towards COLD (blue) for cooler air
(best for venting and air conditioning).
20—Defroster, Heater, and Air Conditioner
Controls—If Equipped:
NOTE: Blower speed knob; defroster, heater, and air
conditioner switch; and temperature control knob
must be adjusted as a group to obtain proper
operation of the defroster, heater, or air conditioner.
The defroster, heater, and air conditioner switch has three
positions:
• Push the rocker switch fully to the left to activate the
air conditioner.
• Push the rocker switch fully to the right to activate
•
the defrost mode. In this position, the air conditioner
compressor is powered and a vent is opened to provide
air flow to the front windshield.
For maximum heater performance, set the rocker
switch to the middle position. In this position, the air
conditioner compressor is not powered.
NOTE: Use the air conditioner with the temperature
control knob in a middle-to-cool position to
dehumidify air without over cooling.
Push upper half of switch to turn rear windshield wiper on.
Push lower half of switch to turn rear windshield wiper off.
17—Display Monitor: Monitor has six active displays,
two constant and four selectable. See Standard Display
Monitor (SDM) in this section.
TX18203,00004B6 -19-15MAY09-2/2
2-1-13
020113
PN=40
Controls—Steering Console
1
2
4
3
5
9
6
TX1054141 —UN—08JAN09
H 2O
TX1054141
9— Water In Fuel (WIF)
1—Work Lights Switch: Push switch to operate tail
lights and front work lights, if equipped. The switch has
three positions:
3—Loader Coupler Switch—If Equipped: Push in and
lift switch to the UNLOCK position to retract coupler pins.
Coupler pin indicator will illuminate and chime will sound.
Push switch down to return to the LOCK position to engage
coupler pins. Indicator will turn off and chimes will stop.
• Push upper half to first position to turn all front work
lights and tail lights on.
• Push to middle position to turn tail lights and 2 of 4 front
•
TX1002634A —UN—13JAN06
6— Front Windshield Wiper
Switch—If Equipped
7— Turn Signal Switch
8— Transmission Control Lever
(TCL)
4— Loader Coupler Pin
5— Front Windshield Washer
Switch—If Equipped
TX1002635A —UN—13JAN06
1— Work Lights Switch
2— Warning Lights Switch
3— Loader Coupler Switch—If
Equipped
work lights, if equipped, on.
Push lower half to turn tail lights and front work lights,
if equipped, off.
2—Warning Lights Switch: Push upper half of switch
to turn amber warning lights at front and rear of cab on.
When warning lights switch is on, warning lights indicator,
left turn indicator, and right turn indicator will flash. Push
lower half of switch to turn amber warning lights off.
If the warning lights switch is on when the key switch is
turned to the OFF position, the warning HAZARD LAMPS
ON will display on the Standard Display Monitor (SDM).
The audible alarm will sound two times and the warning
will remain displayed for 5 seconds, after which the SDM
will power down.
4—Loader Coupler Pin Indicator—If Equipped:
Indicator will light and chimes will sound when the loader
coupler switch is in UNLCOK position and the coupler pins
are retracted. Indicator will turn off when quick coupler
switch is in LOCK position.
5—Front Windshield Washer Switch—If Equipped:
Push upper half of switch to turn front windshield washer
on. Push lower half of switch to turn front windshield
washer off.
6—Front Windshield Wiper Switch—If Equipped:
NOTE: To avoid damage to wiper blades, DO NOT
operate wipers if blades are frozen to windshield.
Push switch to operate front windshield wiper. The switch
has three positions:
2-1-14
MD04263,00000BE -19-12MAY09-1/2
020113
PN=41
• Push upper half to first position to turn front windshield
is pushed. Amber turn signal lights flash together when
warning lights switch (2) is pushed.
• Push to middle position to turn front windshield wiper
8—Transmission Control Lever (TCL):
•
NOTE: When TCL is in the Reverse position, only travel
speeds 1 and 2 are operational.
wiper on at FAST speed.
on at SLOW speed.
Push lower half to turn front windshield wiper off.
7—Turn Signal Switch: Push switch to signal turning
direction. The switch has three positions:
• Push left half to signal left turn.
•
•
Left turn indicator will
flash.
Middle position is OFF. Indicators will not flash unless
warning lights switch is ON.
Push right half to signal right turn. Right turn indicator
will flash.
Place TCL in middle (detented) position for neutral. Move
TCL to F (forward travel) or R (reverse travel). Rotate
TCL to select gear (travel speed) range.
9—Water In Fuel (WIF) Indicator—If Equipped: WIF
indicator light turns ON when excess water is in auxiliary
water separator fuel filter.
Amber turn signal lights flash individually to signal
direction of turn when left or right half of turn signal switch
MD04263,00000BE -19-12MAY09-2/2
CAUTION: Prevent injury from unexpected
machine movement. Always lock hydraulics
when not operating backhoe.
Push upper half of switch (1) to “Unlock” position to enable
pilot controls. Push lower half of switch to “Lock” position
to disable pilot controls.
If the seat changes operating position or the engine is
shut off, the pilot controls are automatically disabled. To
enable pilot controls, cycle switch to “Lock” position and
back to “Unlocked” position.
TX1014469A —UN—01NOV06
Pilot Control Enable/Disable Switch—If
Equipped
VD76477,00011FB -19-01NOV06-1/1
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from
unexpected machine movement. Always verify
control response before operating backhoe.
Push backhoe symbol on switch (1) to select backhoe
hydraulic pattern. Push excavator symbol on switch to
select excavator hydraulic pattern.
1— Pattern Select Switch
TX1013900A —UN—20OCT06
Pattern Select Switch—If Equipped
VD76477,0001126 -19-19OCT06-1/1
2-1-15
020113
PN=42
Engine Speed Control Knob
Rotate knob (1) clockwise to increase engine speed.
Rotate counterclockwise to decrease engine speed.
TX1020480A —UN—13MAR07
The engine speed control knob is operating normally when:
• Engine speed changes when turning the dial while seat
is in loader position*.
• Engine speed changes when turning the dial while seat
is in the backhoe position*.
• Engine speed does change when turning the dial while
seat is not in backhoe or loader position.
• Engine speed does not change when turning the dial
•
while service brake pedal is pressed in either backhoe
or loader position.
Engine speed is dialed up to something other than idle
and seat position changes cause the engine speed
control knob to drop out.
*Engine speed control knob must be dialed to low speed
stop position before engine speed will respond to changes
in the dial position.
VD76477,00014B1 -19-09JUL09-1/1
Horn Button
Press the horn button (1) to sound the horn.
TX1013813A —UN—20OCT06
1— Horn Button
VD76477,0001125 -19-19OCT06-1/1
2-1-16
020113
PN=43
Defroster, Heater, and Air Conditioner
Controls—If Equipped
Blower speed knob (2); defroster, heater, and air
conditioner switch (1); and temperature control knob (3)
must be adjusted as a group to obtain proper operation of
the defroster, heater, or air conditioner.
Push the defroster, heater, and air conditioner switch to
the appropriate setting. The defroster, heater, and air
conditioner switch has three positions:
•
•
conditioner. Adjust the blower knob and temperature
control knob as appropriate.
Push the rocker switch fully to the right to activate
the defrost mode. In this position, the air conditioner
compressor is powered and a vent is opened to provide
air flow to the front windshield. Adjust the blower knob
and temperature control knob as appropriate.
For maximum heater performance, set the rocker
switch to the middle position. In this position, the air
conditioner compressor is not powered.
TX1013895A —UN—20OCT06
• Push the rocker switch fully to the left to activate the air
Heater and Air Conditioner Controls—Earlier Machines
Turn blower speed knob clockwise to increase blower
speed or counterclockwise to reduce blower speed. The
blower knob has four speed settings and an off position.
Turn temperature control knob to adjust air temperature.
Turn clockwise towards HOT (red) for warmer air (best for
heating and defrosting). Turn counterclockwise towards
COLD (blue) for cooler air (best for venting and air
conditioning).
NOTE: Use the air conditioner with the temperature
control knob in a middle-to-cool position to
dehumidify air without over cooling.
3— Temperature Control Knob
TX1059519A —UN—15MAY09
1— Defroster, Heater, and Air
Conditioner Switch
2— Blower Speed Knob
Heater and Air Conditioner Controls—Later Machines
TX18203,00004B5 -19-15MAY09-1/1
2-1-17
020113
PN=44
Side Windows—Secondary Exits
The side windows and door windows can open 180°. The
door windows can be used as secondary exits.
T135173 —UN—07NOV00
To open, pull handle (A) in and away from cab post latch.
Retain in open position against fixed window on same
side by fastening knob (B) into socket (C). Turn knob until
tension is felt to prevent window from swinging during
operation.
A—Handle (8 used)
B—Fastening Knob (2 used)
C—Socket (2 used)
T102093 —UN—16AUG96
Right Side Shown
CED,OUO1079,381 -19-14JUN00-1/1
Rear Windows
when opening or closing window.
Squeeze upper rear window latches (A) and slide upper
rear window up or down.
Squeeze middle rear window latches (B) and slide middle
rear window up or down.
Ensure all rear window latches lock into detent positions
on window frame.
B—Middle Rear Window Latch
(2 used)
TX1002528A —UN—10JAN06
A—Upper Rear Window Latch
(2 used)
VD76477,0001127 -19-19OCT06-1/1
2-1-18
020113
PN=45
Adjusting Seat
NOTE: Grease seat base guide rails as needed.
Air Suspension Seat
TX1014891A —UN—10NOV06
Lift forward and aft lever (1) up and slide seat to desired
position. Release forward and aft lever to lock seat in
position.
Lift pivot lever (2) up and pivot seat. Release pivot lever
to lock seat in position.
Lift back tilt lever (3) up and adjust backrest to desired tilt
angle. Release back tilt lever to lock backrest in position.
Turn lumbar support adjustment lever (4) to position
lumbar support for operator's preference.
1— Forward and Aft Lever
2— Pivot Lever
3— Back Tilt Lever
4— Lumbar Support
Adjustment Lever
VD76477,0001276 -19-20NOV06-1/2
Mechanical Suspension Seat
TX1015302A —UN—17NOV06
NOTE: With weight adjustment knob turned
counterclockwise (—) as far as it can go and with
no weight on seat, the distance to the floor from
top of seat is 48 cm (19 in). With knob turned
clockwise (+) as far as it can go, the distance
to floor from top of seat is 53 cm (21 in). The
distances will decrease by 5 cm (2 in.) when an
86 kg (190 lb) person sits on seat.
Lift forward and aft lever (1) up and slide seat to desired
position. Release forward and aft lever to lock seat in
position.
Lift pivot lever (2) up and pivot seat. Release pivot lever
to lock seat in position.
Lift back tilt lever (3) up and adjust backrest to desired tilt
angle. Release back tilt lever to lock backrest in position.
Turn lumbar support adjustment lever (4) to position
lumbar support for operator’s preference.
1— Forward and Aft Lever
2— Pivot Lever
3— Back Tilt Lever
4— Lumbar Support
Adjustment Lever
5— Weight Adjustment Knob
While NOT sitting on seat, turn weight adjustment knob
(5) to change seat height and ride stiffness.
VD76477,0001276 -19-20NOV06-2/2
2-1-19
020113
PN=46
Steering Wheel Tilt Lever—If Equipped
Lift lever (A) and tilt steering wheel (B) to operator's
preference. Release lever to lock steering wheel in
position.
For Joystick-to-wheel clearance, tilt steering wheel full-up
before unlocking and pivoting seat.
B—Steering Wheel
TX1002483A —UN—10JAN06
A—Steering Wheel Tilt Lever
VD76477,00010F6 -19-23OCT06-1/1
2-1-20
020113
PN=47
12-Volt Accessory Outlets
Accessory outlets (A) are positioned for operator's
convenience.
TX1014667A —UN—04NOV06
A—12-Volt Accessory Outlet
T134837B —UN—25OCT00
Optional Cab Shown
Optional Cab Shown
VD76477,00011B2 -19-03NOV06-1/1
2-1-21
020113
PN=48
Inspect Machine Daily Before Starting
LUBRICATION: Check lubrication points.
Perform periodic service checks.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM: Check for worn or frayed wires
and loose or corroded connections.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM: Check for leaks, missing or loose
clamps, kinked hoses, and lines or hoses in areas that rub
against each other or other parts.
BACKHOE AND LOADER: Check for loose, bent, broken
or missing parts and hardware.
PROTECTIVE DEVICES: Check ROPS, guards, shields,
covers, seat belt, and reverse warning alarm.
FIRE PREVENTION: Clean machine of debris.
PARK BRAKE: Check for correct operation.
SAFETY: Walk around machine to be sure all persons
are clear from machine area.
CED,OUO1079,468 -19-01SEP10-1/1
2-2-1
020113
PN=49
Check Instruments Before Starting
3
2
4
1
7
17
16
5
15
6
14
13
11
12
10
9
TX1002567 —UN—30JAN06
8
TX1002567
Turn key switch clockwise to ON/RUN position. (Do not
start engine.) The following must occur:
•
•
followed by the machine model number and the last
screen displayed at shutdown.
All gauges (2—4) must be backlit, and all gauge
needles must cycle from minimum (left) to maximum
(right) in approximately 1 second.
All indicators must light for 5 seconds including those in
the Sealed Switch Module (SSM). With the engine cold,
the engine oil pressure indicator and STOP indicator
will remain lit, after other indicators go out. Park brake
indicator will also stay ON, as will switch indicators for
previously activated functions.
NOTE: When the key is turned ON, but before starting,
a diagnostic sequence is initiated. If a fault is
detected, the corresponding diagnostic trouble
code (DTC) will activate.
See Operation—Operator’s Station for descriptions of
indicators.
If any indicator fails to light, see your authorized dealer.
TX1002776 —UN—18JAN06
• The audible alarm must sound.
• All LCD segments in the display window (5) must light,
1— STOP Indicator
2— Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
3— Converter Oil Temperature
Gauge
4— Fuel Level Gauge
5— Display Window
6— Park Brake Indicator
7— Hydraulic Oil Filter
Restriction Indicator
8— Diagnostic Code Indicator
9— Joysticks Enabled Indicator
10— Hydraulic Oil Temperature
Indicator
12— Fasten Seat Belt Indicator
14— MFWD Indicator
15— Engine Alternator Voltage
Indicator
16— Engine Air Filter
Restriction Indicator
17— Engine Oil Pressure
Indicator
18— Accessory Position—Key
Switch
19— STOP Position—Key
Switch
20— On/Run Position—Key
Switch
21— Start Position—Key
Switch
VD76477,00011AC -19-22JAN09-1/1
2-2-2
020113
PN=50
Engine Break-In Period
dipstick. John Deere Break-In™ Engine Oil
should be used to make up any oil consumed
during the break-in period.
IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage it is critical
to observe the engine break-in period. Extra
care during the first 250 hours of operation will
result in more satisfactory long-term engine
performance and life. DO NOT exceed 250
hours of operation with break-in oil.
3. Change oil and oil filter after first 250 hours (maximum).
Fill crankcase with the normal seasonal viscosity
grade oil. See Maintenance—Machine. (Section 3-1.)
1. Operate the machine at heavy or normal loads with
minimal idling during the break-in period. During the
first 20 hours, avoid prolonged periods of engine idling
or sustained maximum load operation. If engine will
idle longer than 5 minutes, stop engine.
4. Watch coolant temperature gauge closely. If coolant
temperature rises above specified limits on the gauge,
reduce load on engine. Unless temperature drops
quickly, stop the engine and determine the cause
before resuming operation. See Troubleshooting.
(Section 4-3.)
2. Check engine oil level more frequently during the
engine break-in period.
5. Watch oil pressure gauge for pressure within
specification.
IMPORTANT: DO NOT add make-up oil until the
oil level is BELOW the ADD mark on the
6. Check serpentine belt for proper alignment and
seating in pulley grooves.
Break-In is a trademark of Deere & Company.
VD76477,00016F2 -19-22DEC10-1/1
Starting the Engine
NOTE: The engine will start with the TCL in gear, but the
transmission will automatically be shifted to neutral
and the display will show “N” as the actual gear. You
will not be able to put the tractor into gear without
first cycling TCL through the neutral range.
TS177 —UN—11JAN89
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury or death from
a runaway machine. DO NOT start engine by
shorting across starter terminals. Machine will
start in gear if normal circuitry is bypassed.
NEVER start engine while standing on ground.
Start engine only from operator’s seat, with
transmission control lever (TCL) in N “neutral”
and park brake engaged.
2. Sound horn.
1. Sit in seat and fasten seat belt.
VD76477,00010F7 -19-14JUL09-1/3
NOTE: Controls and switches must be in the positions
described before starting engine.
TX1002777A —UN—18JAN06
3. Move TCL lever (A) to N.
A—TCL
2-2-3
VD76477,00010F7 -19-14JUL09-2/3
020113
PN=51
4. Push the left half of the park brake switch (B) to
engage the park brake.
TX1013913A —UN—20DEC06
5. Push the lower half of the ride control switch (C), if
equipped, to deactivate ride control.
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the turbocharger
and other engine components, let the
engine run at low idle for 30 seconds
before operating machine.
6. Turn engine speed control knob (D) to 1/3 speed.
IMPORTANT: Do not operate starter motor for
more than 30 seconds at a time, or it may be
damaged. If engine does not start, wait at
least 2 minutes before trying again.
B—Park Brake Switch
C—Ride Control Switch—If
Equipped
7. Turn key switch (E) clockwise to “Start” and hold
in position until engine starts. Release key switch
when engine starts. If engine does not start after 30
seconds, turn key switch to “Off” and wait 2 minutes
before trying again.
D—Engine Speed Control Knob
E—Key Switch
VD76477,00010F7 -19-14JUL09-3/3
Starting Fluid—Cold Weather Start Aid—If
Equipped
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from exploding
container. Starting fluid is highly flammable.
Keep container away from heat, sparks, and open
flame. Contents are pressurized. Do not puncture
or incinerate container. Remove can from
machine if engine does not need starting fluid.
IMPORTANT: Remove container and install plug in
base to protect start aid components from dust.
IMPORTANT: Prevent damage to engine. Use starting
aid when temperatures are below 0°C (32°F)
and only when engine is COLD.
TX1013917A —UN—20OCT06
USING START AID
IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage, push and hold
start aid button only when engine is cold and
cranking. Starting fluid is being injected into
engine as long as the start aid button is held.
NOTE: Crank engine for 30 seconds maximum, allowing
2 minutes between cranking periods.
While cranking engine, push start aid button (1).
1— Start Aid Button
Replacing Starting Aid Container
2-2-4
MD04263,0000139 -19-20FEB09-1/2
020113
PN=52
1. Close engine hood. Raise front loader boom and
install loader boom service lock. See Loader Boom
Service Lock. (Section 3-2.)
TX1035810A —UN—20MAR08
2. Open engine hood. See Opening and Closing Engine
Hood. (Section 3-2.)
3. Loosen clamp (2).
4. Turn start aid container (3) counterclockwise to
remove.
IMPORTANT: Remove can from machine if engine
does not need starting fluid. Remove can from
container and install plug (4) in base to protect
start aid components from dust.
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
5. Remove safety cap from new container.
TX1035809A —UN—01FEB08
6. Remove plug and turn container clockwise in starting
aid base to install.
7. Tighten clamp.
8. Close engine hood.
2— Clamp
3— Start Aid Container
4— Plug
Tier 2/Stage II Engine
MD04263,0000139 -19-20FEB09-2/2
Using Coolant Heater—If Equipped
Plug coolant heater into a 115-volt outlet 10 hours before
starting the engine.
CAUTION: Prevent possible personal injury from
an electrical shock. Use a heavy-duty, grounded
cord to connect heater to electrical power.
TX,25,BD2080 -19-07MAR07-1/1
Warm-Up
IMPORTANT: To avoid carbon build-up in engine
and to use fuel in most efficient manner, do
not allow machine to idle at low rpm.
IMPORTANT: To ensure proper lubrication, idle
engine at 1/3 speed for 5 minutes. Extend
period as necessary when operating at
temperatures below freezing.
• Before moving machine, run at 1/3 speed for at least 5
minutes.
• Do not run engine at fast or slow idle.
• Operate machine under light loads for first 5 minutes
once engine is warm.
• Check instruments regularly.
TX,25,BD2082 -19-15OCT08-1/1
2-2-5
020113
PN=53
Cold Weather Warm-Up
CAUTION: Prevent injury from moving backhoe.
Backhoe may overshoot in extreme cold
conditions. Allow backhoe to warm up.
IMPORTANT: If hydraulic oil is cold, hydraulic
functions move slowly. Do not attempt machine
operations until hydraulic functions move
at close-to-normal cycle times.
In extremely cold conditions, an extended warming up
period will be necessary.
1. Run engine at 1/2 speed for 15 minutes.
IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to bucket
leveling tube due to cold oil, cycle bucket
three times at hood height before using
under normal operation.
2. Raise loader lift arms to hood height. Cycle bucket
from stop to stop three times.
3. Cycle all remaining hydraulic functions to distribute
warmed oil until all functions operate freely.
Avoid sudden operation of hydraulic functions until engine
is thoroughly warmed up. Remove ice, snow, and mud
from machine before operation.
VD76477,0001386 -19-08JAN07-1/1
Ride Control Operation—If Equipped
TX1013918A —UN—20DEC06
unexpected boom or bucket movement when
equipped with ride control. Ride control
accumulator energy must be discharged when
working on hydraulic components. Turn ignition
switch “On”. Push ride control switch “On” and
move loader control lever to “Float” position.
Do not have the ride control switch “On”
when starting the machine; the machine
may move if the ride control switch is “On”
and the machine is started.
TX1013990A —UN—26OCT06
Do not have ride control engaged when
operating the loader; the ride control system
may cause unexpected movement.
The ride control system has an accumulator and valve
in the loader circuit.
Operating Ride Control
Push upper half of ride control switch (1) to improve
machine ride and reduce tire flexing when traveling over
rough terrain at a high speed with loaded bucket, or
when transporting with an empty bucket. The ride control
indicator (2) will remain lit while ride control is engaged.
If engine is stopped with ride control engaged, ride control
switch will remain in the “On” position and ride control will
be engaged when the machine is restarted. Always push
lower half of ride control switch to disengage ride control
before starting the machine.
NOTE: With ride control engaged, the front end of the
machine will not remain raised if lifted off the ground
with the front loader. The front end of the machine
will drift back to the ground. To hold front end up
while using the backhoe, disengage ride control.
1— Ride Control Switch
2— Ride Control Indicator
Discharging the Ride Control Circuit for Service
Discharge hydraulic pressure from the ride control
system before performing maintenance. See Discharge
Ride Control System Hydraulic Pressure—If Equipped.
(Section 4-1.)
VD76477,0001129 -19-18DEC07-1/1
2-2-6
020113
PN=54
Pilot Control Operation—If Equipped
1. Rotate seat to backhoe operation position.
T162834B —UN—02JAN03
2. Use pilot control wrist rests (1) to pull right and left
pilot control towers towards operator.
3. Push pilot control enable/disable switch (2) to “Unlock”
position to enable pilot controls.
unexpected machine movement. Always lock
hydraulics when not operating backhoe.
4. Push pilot control enable/disable switch to “Lock”
position to disable pilot controls.
1— Pilot Control Wrist Rests
NOTE: Alarm will sound and monitor will display “Hoe”
and “On” when pilot controls are enabled and
seat is not in backhoe position.
2— Pilot Control Enable/Disable Switch
Pilot Control System Hydraulic Pressure—If Equipped.
(Section 4-1.)
If pilot controls are automatically disabled, cycle
switch to “Lock” position and back to “Unlock”
Discharge hydraulic pressure from the pilot control
system before performing maintenance. See Discharge
HG31779,00001BB -19-15OCT08-1/1
Driving the Machine
1.
T132020B —UN—05JUL00
unexpected machine movement. Machine will
turn in direction of brake pedal if only one
brake pedal is applied. Connect brake pedals
together before traveling at high speed.
Engage brake pedal locking bar (A) to lock left and
right brake pedals (B and C) together. Keep brake
pedal locking bar engaged unless brakes are to be
used to aid in turning.
CAUTION: Use a seat belt to minimize chance of
injury from an accident such as an overturn.
A—Brake Pedal Locking Bar
B—Left Brake Pedal
C—Right Brake Pedal
2. Fasten seat belt.
2-2-7
MD04263,00000BF -19-14JUL09-1/3
020113
PN=55
3. Move engine speed control knob (H) to 1/3 speed and
start engine.
TX1013925A —UN—23OCT06
NOTE: Park brake indicator will light, alarm will sound,
and STOP indicator will light if transmission control
lever (TCL) is moved out of NEUTRAL while park
brake is engaged. Disengage the park brake
before moving the TCL out of neutral.
If park brake is disengaged when engine is
stopped, it automatically engages. If engine is
then started with right half of the park brake switch
pushed, operator must push left half of park brake
switch, then push right half of park brake switch to
disengage park brake before driving machine.
TX1013923A —UN—20DEC06
4. Push right half of park brake switch (F) to disengage
the park brake.
unexpected machine movement. Never
rely on TCL and gearshift lever to keep
machine from moving. Always engage park
brake to hold machine.
5. Use TCL (D) to change direction of travel.
• Reduce speed when changing direction of travel.
• Move TCL to F to travel forward and to R to travel
•
in reverse.
Move TCL to N when machine is not moving. TCL
will drop to a detented position when in neutral.
6. TCL/range lever also selects forward gear ranges 1, 2,
3, and 4 and reverse ranges 1 and 2.
•
Rotate handle on TCL (D) to select gear position.
D—Transmission Control Lever
(TCL)
E—Gear Range Pointer
F— Park Brake Switch
G—Ride Control Switch—If
Equipped
H—Engine Speed Control Knob
J— Key Switch
• Gear position is indicated by the gear range pointer
(E).
MD04263,00000BF -19-14JUL09-2/3
Vary travel speed when driving using engine speed
control pedal (K).
K—Engine Speed Control
Pedal
TX1013924A —UN—23OCT06
7.
MD04263,00000BF -19-14JUL09-3/3
2-2-8
020113
PN=56
Cruise Control
TX1020480A —UN—13MAR07
When operating the machine with the seat facing the
steering wheel, cruise control can be activated by the
operator. This feature is useful for road travel, or when
traversing rough ground on a job site, where it is difficult
to maintain a steady speed with the accelerator pedal.
To set cruise control, use the engine speed control knob
(1) to set engine speed to desired level. Engine speed will
remain at that setting until brake pedals are depressed,
at which time engine speed will automatically return to
idle. In order to reengage cruise control, the engine speed
control knob must be returned to idle position and then
reset to desired speed.
If the cruise control is set to a speed lower than high idle,
the accelerator pedal can be used to accelerate from the
selected speed setting up to high idle. If operator then
removes foot from accelerator pedal, speed will return to
the prior selected setting.
VD76477,00014B8 -19-16MAR07-1/1
unexpected machine movement. Stabilizers
must be set on a firm surface. Do not
dig under stabilizers. Be alert to possible
machine movement when raising stabilizers
and loader bucket.
Before operating the backhoe, use stabilizers to lift and
level the machine. Use the levers to move stabilizers from
raised position (A and C) to lowered position (B and D).
TX1014050A —UN—25OCT06
Operating Stabilizers
Stabilizer feet on 310J, 310SJ are reversible for use on
paved and unpaved surfaces. See Reversing Stabilizer
Feet—310J, 310SJ. (Section 4-1.)
C—Right Stabilizer Up
D—Right Stabilizer Down
T102200 —UN—24AUG96
A—Left Stabilizer Up
B—Left Stabilizer Down
VD76477,000113B -19-24OCT06-1/1
2-2-9
020113
PN=57
Operating Boom Lock
IMPORTANT: To prevent possible machine damage,
unlock boom before operating backhoe.
Disengaging the Boom Lock
1. Raise boom against stops to release tension on boom
lock (A).
2. Pull boom lock control lever (B) toward operator to
disengage boom lock from boom hooks (unlocked
position).
T131772B —UN—19JUN00
3. Lower boom so boom hooks are clear of boom lock.
Release boom lock control lever.
Engaging the Boom Lock
1. Pull boom lock control lever toward operator to raise
boom lock.
2. Raise boom against stops.
3. Release boom lock control lever to engage boom lock
with boom hooks (locked position).
B—Boom Lock Control Lever
Optional Two-Lever, Six-Function Configuration Shown
T162770B —UN—12DEC02
A—Boom Lock
T131758C —UN—15JUN00
4. After machine shutdown, move boom control lever to
release hydraulic pressure and put tension on boom
lock.
Optional Pilot Controls Shown
VD76477,00010CE -19-16OCT06-1/1
2-2-10
020113
PN=58
Operating Swing Lock
remove swing lock pin before operating backhoe.
Remove swing lock pin (A) from swing lock mounting hole
(B) and install pin in storage position in operator’s station.
Engaging the Swing Lock
Remove swing lock pin from storage position in operator's
station and install pin in swing lock mounting hole.
B—Swing Lock Mounting Hole
T131772C —UN—19JUN00
A—Swing Lock Pin
T132293B —UN—11JUL00
Disengaging the Swing Lock
VD76477,00011F0 -19-31OCT06-1/1
Operating Swing Lock Pin
remove swing lock pin before operating backhoe.
CED,OUO1079,418 -19-07JUL00-1/1
2-2-11
020113
PN=59
Operating Backhoe—John Deere Two-Lever Controls
Prevent possible personal injury from unexpected
machine movement. DO NOT operate backhoe
from outside the operator station. Only operate
when in the operator's seat in backhoe operation
position with stabilizers down.
IMPORTANT: To avoid machine damage, do not
swing boom into stabilizers.
T132032B —UN—11JUL00
CAUTION: Several control patterns are available
for this backhoe. Always verify control
response before operating.
NOTE: When seat is turned to backhoe operation
position, seat position sensor will sound an audible
alarm and light the STOP indicator if transmission
control lever (TCL) is moved to F or R.
A conversion kit for changing controls is available from
your authorized dealer. Labels corresponding to other
controls MUST be installed.
Operate backhoe with control levers. Move levers as
shown to maneuver backhoe components in desired
directions.
A—Boom Lower
B—Boom Raise
C—Boom Swing Left
D—Boom Swing Right
T132029C —UN—11JUL00
For faster cycle times, fully extend levers when moving
and operate more than one component at a time.
E—Dipperstick Raise
F— Dipperstick Lower
G—Bucket Load
H—Bucket Dump
VD76477,00011A0 -19-14JUL09-1/1
2-2-12
020113
PN=60
Operating Backhoe—Excavator Two-Lever Controls
Prevent possible personal injury from unexpected
machine movement. DO NOT operate backhoe
from outside the operator station. Only operate
when in the operator's seat in backhoe operation
position with stabilizers down.
IMPORTANT: To avoid machine damage, do not
swing boom into stabilizers.
T132033B —UN—11JUL00
CAUTION: Several control patterns are available
for this backhoe. Always verify control
response before operating.
NOTE: When seat is turned to backhoe operation
position, seat position sensor will sound an audible
alarm and light the STOP indicator if transmission
control lever is moved to F or R.
A conversion kit for changing John Deere two-lever
controls to excavator two-lever controls is available from
your authorized dealer. Labels corresponding to the
controls MUST be installed.
For faster cycle times, fully extend levers when moving
and operate more than one component at a time.
A—Boom Lower
B—Boom Raise
C—Boom Swing Left
G—Bucket Load
H—Bucket Dump
T132029C —UN—11JUL00
Operate backhoe with control levers. Move levers as
shown to maneuver backhoe components in desired
directions.
VD76477,00011A1 -19-14JUL09-1/1
2-2-13
020113
PN=61
unexpected machine movement. Always lock
hydraulics when not operating backhoe. Never
place any part of body beyond window frame. It
could be crushed by the boom if boom control
lever is accidently bumped or otherwise engaged.
Make sure you know the location and function
of each control before operating.
T162842B —UN—12DEC02
Operating Backhoe—John Deere Pilot
Controls
Never place any part of the body beyond the window
frame. Replace missing or broken windows immediately.
The machine is factory equipped with the control pattern
shown.
NOTE: With this control pattern, functions must correspond
to the black-on-yellow labels located on the cab post.
When a lever is released, it will return to neutral. The
machine will remain positioned.
G—Bucket Load
H—Bucket Dump
T132029C —UN—11JUL00
A—Boom Lower
B—Boom Raise
C—Boom Swing Left
VD76477,000134A -19-20DEC06-1/1
2-2-14
020113
PN=62
when not operating backhoe. Never place any
part of body beyond window frame. It could
be crushed by the boom if boom control lever
is accidentally bumped or otherwise engaged.
Make sure you know the location and function
of each control before operating.
T163835B —UN—13JAN03
Operating Backhoe—Excavator Pilot
Controls
Never place any part of the body beyond the window
frame. Replace missing or broken windows immediately.
NOTE: With this control pattern, functions must correspond
to the black-on-white labels located on the cab post.
When a lever is released, it will return to neutral. The
machine will remain positioned.
G—Bucket Load
H—Bucket Dump
T132029C —UN—11JUL00
A—Boom Lower
B—Boom Raise
C—Boom Swing Left
VD76477,000134B -19-20DEC06-1/1
2-2-15
020113
PN=63
Operating Extendible Dipperstick—If
Equipped
J— Extendible Dipperstick
Retract
T162845B —UN—12DEC02
T132029D —UN—11JUL00
I— Extendible Dipperstick
Extend
T132032C —UN—11JUL00
Push extendible dipperstick control pedal with toe or heel
to extend (I) or retract (J) the extendible dipperstick.
CED,OUO1079,419 -19-23JAN03-1/1
2-2-16
020113
PN=64
Operating Extendible Dipperstick With
Attachments
T103835 —UN—11OCT96
When using attachments, it is recommended to retract
extendible dipperstick and lock in place. Operating
hydraulic hammers, compactors, etc., with dipperstick
extended may cause abnormal wear and stress on
dipperstick components and ultimately shorten their life.
AM40430,0000072 -19-15OCT08-1/1
Operating Extendible Dipperstick Lock—If
Equipped
CAUTION: To prevent serious injury, always
install locking pin from ground.
Always lower backhoe to ground and stop engine before
removing or installing extendible dipperstick locking pin.
Disengaging Extendible Dipperstick Lock
1. Remove quick-lock pin from extendible dipperstick
locking pin (A).
T131775B —UN—19JUN00
2. Remove extendible dipperstick locking pin from
locking position (C) and install extendible dipperstick
locking pin in storage position (B).
3. Install quick-lock pin on extendible dipperstick locking
pin.
Engaging Extendible Dipperstick Lock
1. Remove quick-lock pin from extendible dipperstick
locking pin.
2. Remove extendible dipperstick locking pin from
storage position and install extendible dipperstick
locking pin in locking position.
A—Extendible Dipperstick
Locking Pin
B—Storage Position
C—Locking Position
3. Install quick-lock pin on extendible dipperstick locking
pin.
CED,OUO1079,412 -19-07JUL00-1/1
2-2-17
020113
PN=65
TX1047839A —UN—29AUG08
TX1047838A —UN—26AUG08
Operating Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic Selective Flow Functions—If Equipped
TX1048098A —UN—29AUG08
TX1047844A —UN—28AUG08
A—Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic
Selective Flow Switch
B—Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic
Selective Flow Foot Switch
C—Flow Selector Knob
Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic Selective Flow Switches
The backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow switch (A)
has three positions:
• Push upper half to activate the backhoe auxiliary
•
•
hydraulic selective flow.
Toggle to middle position to transfer control to the
backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow foot switch.
Push lower half to deactivate the backhoe auxiliary
hydraulic selective flow.
When the backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow
switch is in the middle position, push the backhoe auxiliary
hydraulic selective flow foot switch (B) to activate and
deactivate backhoe auxiliary hydraulic attachments.
Deactivate backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow when
no attachment is installed, when changing attachments,
or when installed attachments are not in use.
1. Deactivate backhoe auxiliary hydraulic selective flow
by pressing lower half of backhoe auxiliary hydraulic
selective flow switch (A).
IMPORTANT: To avoid potential machine damage,
machine must be “OFF” when adjusting
selective flow solenoid control valve.
2. To adjust flow, rotate flow selector knob (C) until the
desired flow setting is observed. The six flow settings
are:
• 34 L/min (9 gpm)
• 49 L/min (13 gpm)
• 60 L/min (16 gpm)
• 68 L/min (18 gpm)
• 83 L/min (22 gpm)
• 94 L/min (25 gpm)
Selective Flow Valve Adjustment
ER93822,0000262 -19-02SEP08-1/1
2-2-18
020113
PN=66
Manual Controls Shown
1— Fifth-Function Pedal
TX1048365A —UN—10SEP08
TX1048366A —UN—10SEP08
Operating Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulic Functions—If Equipped
2— Sixth-Function Pedal
Fifth-Function Pedal
Sixth-Function Pedal
Operate fifth-function pedal (1) to control the attachment.
See your backhoe auxiliary hydraulic attachment
operator's manual for more information.
Operate sixth-function pedal (2) to control the attachment.
See your backhoe auxiliary hydraulic attachment
operator's manual for more information.
NOTE: Fifth-function pedal will operate extendible
dipperstick if equipped.
ER93822,0000263 -19-15OCT08-1/1
2-2-19
020113
PN=67
Manual Controls Shown
TX1048220A —UN—04SEP08
TX1048226A —UN—04SEP08
Operating Hydraulic Thumb—If Equipped
NOTE: Hydraulic thumb control pedal may change
location based on if machine is equipped with
extendible dipperstick. If equipped with extendible
dipperstick the left auxiliary hydraulic function
control pedal will operate thumb. If equipped with
standard dipperstick the right auxiliary hydraulic
control pedal will operate thumb.
Push appropriate auxiliary hydraulic function control pedal
(1 or 2) with heal or toe to close (3) or open (4) hydraulic
thumb.
3— Close Thumb
4— Open Thumb
TX1047774A —UN—04SEP08
1— Left Auxiliary Hydraulic
Function Control Pedal
2— Right Auxiliary Hydraulic
Function Control Pedal (or
Extendible Dipperstick—If
Equipped)
Hydraulic Thumb Movement
JH91824,000029C -19-22APR09-1/1
2-2-20
020113
PN=68
Operating Backhoe Coupler—If Equipped
CAUTION:
TX1021632A —UN—09APR07
Prevent serious injury or death from unexpected
machine movement. Ensure coupler is attached
properly to attachment.
1. Locking Coupler:
Position machine and coupler to pick up desired
attachment.
2. Move the adjustable coupler hook (3) by turning the
hex head (5) clockwise into the fully retracted position.
3. Lower front coupler hook (4) to pin (2).
TX1021636A —UN—09APR07
4. Rotate, curl, and lift the attachment slightly off the
ground.
5. Lower adjustable coupler hook to pin (1).
NOTE: Do not torque hex head to greater than
270 N·m (200 lb-ft).
6. Rotate the hex head of the screw mechanism
counterclockwise until the adjustable coupler hook
contacts the back pin.
CAUTION: Ensure the supplement hex lock is
engaged. If this is not locked over the hex head,
the screw can turn and the attachment can fall off.
7. Visually check the coupler to verify that both hooks are
firmly in contact with the attachment pins. Ensure the
supplemental lock (6) is engaged.
8. Verify the attachment is properly locked by performing
a ground test before using.
9. Place the bucket on the ground and uncurl to ensure
the attachment is secured to the coupler.
Unlocking Coupler:
1. Position machine and coupler to disconnect from the
attachment.
2. Rotate the coupler so that the center of the attachment
pin (2) and center of the adjustable coupler hook are
in line.
1— Pin
2— Pin
3— Adjustable Coupler Hook
4— Front Coupler Hook
5— Hex Head
6— Supplemental Lock
3. Rotate, curl, and lift the attachment slightly off the
ground.
4. Rotate the hex head of the screw mechanism
clockwise until the adjustable coupler hook is clear
from the back pin. Loosen the screw mechanism with
the hand rachet to fully release the attachment pin
from the coupler.
5. Keeping the attachment close to the ground, slowly
retract the bucket cylinder.
6. With the attachment flat on the ground, uncurl the
coupler from the attachment. Assure the attachment
is on a flat, stable surface and will not move when
released from the coupler.
VD76477,00014EB -19-21JUL09-1/1
2-2-21
020113
PN=69
Operating Loader Coupler—If Equipped
TX1002790A —UN—18JAN06
unexpected machine motion. The attachment
could fall if not properly installed to loader
coupler. Operator must be aware of all
bystanders at the worksite.
1. Position machine on firm, level ground.
2. Lower boom. Stop machine.
3. Push in and lift loader coupler switch (1) to the “unlock”
position to retract coupler pins. Loader coupler pin
indicator (2) will illuminate and chime will sound.
4. Operate bucket control to move coupler frame forward.
Drive forward. Guide top of coupler frame into
attachment mounting hooks.
TX1014133A —UN—26OCT06
5.
6. Raise boom. Tilt mounting frame rearward until
attachment is against coupler.
7. Push coupler switch down to the “lock” position to
engage coupler pins. Indicator light will turn off and
chime will stop sounding.
NOTE: If attachment is not properly latched,
disconnect and attach again.
8.
Left Side Shown
Raise boom. Visually inspect attachment to verify
that loader coupler pin plate (3) is pressed against
the loader coupler structure (4) and that the pins are
engaged in attachment mounting holes.
1— Loader Coupler Switch—If
Equipped
2— Loader Coupler Pin
3— Loader Coupler Pin Plate (1
on each side)
4— Loader Coupler Structure
(1 on each side)
VD76477,0001142 -19-06JUL09-1/1
2-2-22
020113
PN=70
Operating Loader
IMPORTANT: Operate loader facing forward in
the operator’s seat only.
NOTE: Loader control lever will return to neutral if
released during normal loader operation.
T131727D —UN—21JUL00
IMPORTANT: Do not raise or lower the front loader
boom while the engine hood is open. Always
close the engine hood fully before moving
the front loader boom, or severe damage to
the engine hood will occur. See Opening and
Closing Engine Hood. (Section 3-2.)
Optional Three-Function Controls Shown
Push lever in following directions for corresponding loader
movements:
NOTE: Loader control lever will detent in “Float” when
moved fully forward (A). Loader control lever will
stay in “Float” until it is manually moved.
NOTE: Loader control lever will detent in “Return-to-Dig”
when bucket is dumped and lever is moved
fully left (C). Lever will return to neutral when
bucket is in dig position.
T132341B —UN—11JUL00
Loader control lever will give resistance when
boom is raised and lever is held in “Bucket
Roll-Back” (C). Lever will return to neutral
when bucket is self-leveled.
Use the “Float” and “Return-to-Dig” detents at the same
time to quickly position the front loader bucket for loading,
as when driving into a pile of material. When front loader
boom and bucket are in correct position, the loader control
lever will automatically release from “Return-to-Dig”
detent, but will remain in “Float” detent.
For faster cycle times, fully extend lever in desired
direction, run engine at fast idle, and move boom and
bucket at same time.
A—Boom Lower and Float
B—Boom Raise
C—Bucket Roll-Back and
Return-to-Dig
D—Bucket Dump
VD76477,000138B -19-08JAN07-1/1
2-2-23
020113
PN=71
Operating Differential Lock
TX1060003A —UN—29MAY09
CAUTION: Prevent injury from loss of machine
control. DO NOT engage differential lock when
driving at high speed or steering will be limited.
Avoid machine damage and prevent injury
from loss of machine control. DO NOT engage
differential lock when turning.
Prevent injury from unexpected machine
movement. When poor traction results in
one rear tire spinning, slow the tire's rotation
before engaging differential lock. Internal axle
damage can occur if lock is applied with one
rear wheel spinning at high speed.
IMPORTANT: Avoid axle damage. Engage differential
lock only while machine is at idle.
The differential lock function has a setting in the Standard
Display Monitor (SDM) called DIFF LOCK SPEED LIMIT,
OFF or On. When enabled (ON) the system automatically
disables the differential lock system when engine speed is
over 1000 RPM even though the floor switch is engaged.
When the function is disable (OFF) the operator has full
control of the differential locking system with the floor
switch.
1— Differential Lock Switch
To engage rear differential lock, first, reduce engine speed
to idle, then, press down and hold differential lock switch
(1). When rear differential is locked, both rear wheels turn
at the same speed.
Unequal traction will keep the rear differential locked. If
the differential lock foot switch is released, the differential
lock disengages automatically when traction evens out.
Hold differential lock switch continuously to keep rear
differential locked when traction is even.
JH91824,00009AD -19-10FEB10-1/1
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible gear damage.
Mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) can
be engaged and disengaged while driving,
except in cases of unequal traction. Machine
must be stopped before engaging MFWD
during unequal traction.
NOTE: For best performance, fuel economy, and tire
wear, operate MFWD only when needed.
TX1013937A —UN—23OCT06
Operating Mechanical Front Wheel Drive
(MFWD)—If Equipped
NOTE: Whenever the TCL is in the 4F position, MFWD
will be automatically disengaged. However, in
effort to increase braking performance, MFWD
will automatically engage in 4F whenever the
service brakes are applied.
Push MFWD switch (1) up to engage MFWD drive shaft.
MFWD indicator (2) will remain lit while MFWD is engaged.
Push MFWD switch down to disengage MFWD.
1— MFWD Switch
TX1013996A —UN—26OCT06
To achieve best MFWD performance, be sure
front tires are inflated to proper air pressure. See
Tire Inflation Pressures. (Section 3-3.)
2— MFWD Indicator
ER93822,0000077 -19-18DEC07-1/1
2-2-24
020113
PN=72
Lifting
TX1014618A —UN—03NOV06
CAUTION: Never move the load suddenly. Never
move load over person’s head. DO NOT allow
any persons near the load. Keep all persons
away from raised load until blocks are supporting
it or load is sitting on the ground.
Ensure chain/sling is in good condition and
is rated for load being lifted.
1. For maximum lifting capability, attach chain/sling to
buckets at positions shown. For capacities of backhoe
see Miscellaneous—Specifications. (Section 4-6.)
Lifting With Front Loader
2. Attach a hand line to load for stability. Use long
enough line to ensure that person holding it is a safe
distance from load.
TX1014625A —UN—03NOV06
3. Before lifting, perform following test of load stability:
NOTE: If using backhoe to lift, raise rear tires off ground
50 mm (2 in.) and ensure machine is level. If
ground is soft, place boards or other wide support
under stabilizer feet to increase stability.
a. Park machine close to load.
b. Attach load to chain/sling.
Lifting With Backhoe
c. Raise load 50 mm (2 in.) above ground.
d. If using backhoe, swing load all the way to one side.
so machine can successfully perform test. Do not lift load
until machine can perform test at acceptable level.
e. While keeping load close to the ground, extend it
away from machine.
If there is any indication of reduced stability of the machine,
lower load to the ground and make necessary adjustments
VD76477,0001207 -19-07MAR07-1/1
Parking the Machine
TX1081803A —UN—13SEP10
IMPORTANT: Before stopping engine that has been
operating at working load, idle at 1/3 speed
for 1—2 minutes to cool hot parts. If engine
stalls while operating under load, restart
immediately and idle at 1/3 speed for 1—2
minutes before stopping to allow coolant to
continue circulating through engine.
IMPORTANT: Turbocharger, if equipped, may be
damaged if engine is not properly shut down.
1. Park machine on a level surface.
Transmission Control Lever
2. Lower all equipment to ground.
1— Transmission Control Lever
(TCL)
3. Move transmission control lever (TCL) (1) to N.
2-2-25
VD76477,000112D -19-20SEP10-1/2
020113
PN=73
unexpected machine movement. Never rely on
transmission control lever (TCL) and gearshift
lever to keep machine from moving. Always
engage park brake to hold machine.
4. Push left half of park brake switch (2) to engage park
brake.
5. Move engine speed control lever (3) to 1/3 speed and
run engine with no load for 1—2 minutes.
6. Move engine speed control lever to slow idle.
4
2
3
TX1081616 —UN—13SEP10
7. Turn key switch (4) to “Off” to stop engine. Remove
key from key switch.
8. Release hydraulic pressure by moving control levers
until equipment does not move.
3— Engine Speed Control
Lever
4— Key Switch
VD76477,000112D -19-20SEP10-2/2
Loading Machine on a Trailer
1. Keep trailer bed clean. Put wheel chocks against
trailer wheels.
TX1070084 —UN—26JAN10
2. Use a ramp or loading dock. Ramps must be strong
enough, have a low angle, and correct height. Load
and unload machine on a level surface.
3. Fasten seat belt before starting engine. Allow engine
to run for several minutes.
4. Install the extendible dipperstick locking pin, if
equipped, and engage the backhoe swing lock.
5. Drive the machine up ramps slowly with centerline of
machine over centerline of trailer.
Machine Tie Down Locations
6. Lower loader bucket onto blocks or trailer bed.
7. Lower backhoe boom until bucket rests on trailer bed.
8. Stop engine.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible hydraulic system
damage. Fasten chains or cables to machine
at proper locations.
10. Fasten backhoe bucket to trailer with chains or cables
to prevent movement during transport.
11. Cover engine exhaust pipe opening with tape to keep
dust and rain out of pipe.
9. Fasten chains or cables from trailer to frame tie-downs.
Do not route chains or cables over or against hydraulic
lines or hoses.
HG31779,000007C -19-26JAN10-1/1
2-2-26
020113
PN=74
Towing
TX1013758A —UN—18OCT06
IMPORTANT: Engine cannot be started by towing.
Damage to transmission may result. DO
NOT tow machine faster than 10 km/hr (6
mph) or any longer than 1 hour.
Towing IS NOT recommended. If you MUST tow machine,
use the following procedure:
1. Stop engine.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury or death
from unexpected machine movement. Block
wheels to prevent machine movement before
disengaging park brake.
A—Cap Screw (4 used)
B—Cab Floor Access Plate
2. Block tires securely.
3. Attach towing machine and towed machine as closely
together as possible with chains.
4. If your machine is equipped with mechanical front
wheel drive (MFWD), remove the front axle drive shaft.
5. Move gearshift lever and transmission control lever
(TCL) to N.
6.
Remove front half of rubber mat from floor of
operator's station. Remove cap screws (A) and cab
floor access plate (B).
2-2-27
VD76477,00010F8 -19-09JUL09-1/2
020113
PN=75
7. Release park brake manually for towing. Loosen hex
nuts (B) and turn both park brake adjustment cap
screws (A) completely in.
8. Remove blocks from tires and tow machine.
9. When towing is completed, block tires and engage
park brake to hold machine. Turn both park brake
adjustment cap screws out to specification (C) as
illustrated.
T132351B —UN—13JUL00
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to park brake
assembly from heat build-up, park brake
must be manually disengaged.
10. Tighten hex nuts to lock cap screws in position.
11. Install central floor access plate and rubber floor mat.
12. Install front axle drive shaft, if removed.
A—Park Brake Adjustment Cap
Screw (2 used)
B—Hex Nut (2 used)
C—Specification
T102655 —UN—10SEP96
Specification
Park Brake Adjustment
Cap Screw-to-Park Brake
Housing—Distance.................................................................. 27 + 1 mm
1.06 + 0.04 in.
VD76477,00010F8 -19-09JUL09-2/2
2-2-28
020113
PN=76
Diesel Fuel
Consult your local fuel distributor for properties of the
diesel fuel available in your area.
In general, diesel fuels are blended to satisfy the low
temperature requirements of the geographical area in
which they are marketed.
Diesel fuels specified to EN 590 or ASTM D975 are
recommended. Renewable diesel fuel produced by
hydrotreating animal fats and vegetable oils is basically
identical to petroleum diesel fuel. Renewable diesel that
meets EN 590 or ASTM D975 is acceptable for use at all
percentage mixture levels.
Sulfur Content for Tier 3 and Stage III A Engines
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 1000
mg/kg (1000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 1000–5000 mg/kg
(1000–5000 ppm) REDUCES oil and filter change
intervals.
• BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater
than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm), contact your John Deere
dealer
Sulfur Content for Tier 2 and Stage II Engines
Required Fuel Properties
In all cases, the fuel shall meet the following properties:
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 500–5000 mg/kg
Cetane number of 43 minimum. Cetane number greater
than 47 is preferred, especially for temperatures below
–20°C (–4°F) or elevations above 1500 m (5000 ft.).
Cold Filter Plugging Point (CFPP) should be at least 5°C
(9°F) below the expected lowest temperature or Cloud
Point below the expected lowest ambient temperature.
Fuel lubricity should pass a maximum scar diameter of
0.45 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1.
Diesel fuel quality and sulfur content must comply with
all existing emissions regulations for the area in which
the engine operates. DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur
content greater than 10 000 mg/kg (10 000 ppm).
Sulfur content for Interim Tier 4 and Stage III B engines
• Use ONLY ultra low sulfur diesel (ULSD) fuel with a
maximum of 15 mg/kg (15 ppm) sulfur content.
mg/kg (500 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.
•
(500–5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change
interval
BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater
than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm), contact your John Deere
dealer
Sulfur Content for Other Engines
mg/kg (5000 ppm) is recommended.
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than 5000
mg/kg (5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change
intervals.
IMPORTANT: Do not mix used diesel engine oil or any
other type of lubricating oil with diesel fuel.
IMPORTANT: Improper fuel additive usage may
cause damage on fuel injection equipment
of diesel engines.
DX,FUEL1 -19-11APR11-1/1
Lubricity of Diesel Fuel
Most diesel fuels manufactured in the United States,
Canada, and the European Union have adequate lubricity
to ensure proper operation and durability of fuel injection
system components. However, diesel fuels manufactured
in some areas of the world may lack the necessary lubricity.
If fuel of low or unknown lubricity is used, add John Deere
Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (or equivalent) at
the specified concentration.
IMPORTANT: Make sure the diesel fuel used
in your machine demonstrates good
lubricity characteristics.
Fuel lubricity can improve significantly with biodiesel
blends up to B20 (20% biodiesel). Further increase in
lubricity is limited for biodiesel blends greater than B20.
Lubricity of Biodiesel Fuel
Fuel lubricity should pass a maximum scar diameter of
0.45 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1.
DX,FUEL5 -19-14APR11-1/1
3-1-1
020113
PN=77
Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel
CAUTION: Reduce the risk of fire. Handle fuel
carefully. DO NOT fill the fuel tank when engine
is running. DO NOT smoke while you fill the
fuel tank or service the fuel system.
Fill the fuel tank at the end of each day's operation to
prevent water condensation and freezing during cold
weather.
Keep all storage tanks as full as practicable to minimize
condensation.
Ensure that all fuel tank caps and covers are installed
properly to prevent moisture from entering. Monitor water
content of the fuel regularly.
When using biodiesel fuel, the fuel filter may require more
frequent replacement due to premature plugging.
Check engine oil level daily prior to starting engine. A
rising oil level may indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil.
IMPORTANT: The fuel tank is vented through the
filler cap. If a new filler cap is required, always
replace it with an original vented cap.
When fuel is stored for an extended period or if there is a
slow turnover of fuel, add a fuel conditioner to stabilize the
fuel and prevent water condensation. Contact your fuel
supplier for recommendations.
DX,FUEL4 -19-14APR11-1/1
3-1-2
020113
PN=78
Biodiesel Fuel
Biodiesel fuel is comprised of mono-alkyl esters of long
chain fatty acids derived from vegetable oils or animal
fats. Biodiesel blends are biodiesel mixed with petroleum
diesel fuel on a volume basis.
The petroleum diesel portion of all biodiesel blends must
meet the requirements of ASTM D975 (US) or EN 590
(EU) commercial standards.
Biodiesel users in the U.S. are strongly encouraged to
purchase biodiesel blends from a BQ-9000 Certified
Marketer and sourced from a BQ-9000 Accredited
Producer (as certified by the National Biodiesel Board).
Certified Marketers and Accredited Producers can be
found at the following website: http://www.bq9000.org.
Before using fuel containing biodiesel, review the
Biodiesel Use Requirements and Recommendations in
this Operator’s Manual.
Environmental laws and regulations can encourage or
prohibit the use of biofuels. Operators should consult
with appropriate governmental authorities prior to using
biofuels.
All John Deere Engines with Exhaust Filter (Released
2011 and After)
While 5% blends (B5) are preferred, biodiesel
concentrations up to a 20% blend (B20) in petroleum
diesel fuel can be used. Biodiesel blends up to B20
can be used ONLY if the biodiesel (100% biodiesel or
B100) meets ASTM D6751, EN 14214, or equivalent
specification. Expect a 2% reduction in power and a 3%
reduction in fuel economy when using B20.
Biodiesel concentrations above B20 can harm the
engine’s emission control systems and should not be
used. Risks include, but are not limited to, more frequent
stationary regeneration, soot accumulation, and increased
intervals for ash removal.
Biodiesel contains residual ash. Ash levels exceeding the
maximums allowed in either ASTM D6751 or EN14214
can result in more rapid ash loading and require more
frequent cleaning of the Exhaust Filter (if present).
The fuel filter can require more frequent replacement,
when using biodiesel fuel, particularly if switching from
diesel. Check engine oil level daily prior to starting engine.
A rising oil level can indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil.
Biodiesel blends up to B20 must be used within 90 days
of the date of biodiesel manufacture. If used, biodiesel
blends above B20 must be used within 45 days from the
date of biodiesel manufacture.
When using biodiesel blends up to B20, the following
must be considered:
• Cold weather flow degradation
• Stability and storage issues (moisture absorption,
microbial growth)
John Deere approved fuel conditioners, which contain
detergent and dispersant additives, are required when
using B20, and are recommended when using lower
biodiesel blends.
• Possible filter restriction and plugging (usually a problem
when first switching to biodiesel on used engines.)
• Possible fuel leakage through seals and hoses
(primarily an issue with older engines)
All John Deere Engines Excluding Exhaust Filter
(Primarily Released Prior to 2012)
• Possible reduction of service life of engine components
Request a certificate of analysis from your fuel distributor
to ensure that the fuel is compliant with the specifications
provided in this Operator’s Manual.
While 5% blends (B5) are preferred, biodiesel
concentrations up to a 20% blend (B20) in petroleum
diesel fuel can be used. Biodiesel blends up to B20
can be used ONLY if the biodiesel (100% biodiesel or
B100) meets ASTM D6751, EN 14214, or equivalent
specification. Expect a 2% reduction in power and a 3%
reduction in fuel economy when using B20.
Consult your John Deere dealer for approved fuel
conditioners to improve storage and performance with
biodiesel fuels.
These John Deere engines can operate on biodiesel
blends above B20 (up to 100% biodiesel). Operate at
levels above B20 ONLY if the biodiesel is permitted by law
and meets the EN 14214 specification (primarily available
in Europe). Engines operating on biodiesel blends above
B20 might not fully comply with or be permitted by all
applicable emissions regulations. Expect up to a 12%
reduction in power and an 18% reduction in fuel economy
when using 100% biodiesel.
John Deere approved fuel conditioners, which contain
detergent and dispersant additives, are required when
using B20, and are recommended when using lower
biodiesel blends.
The following must also be considered if using biodiesel
blends above B20:
• Possible coking or blocked injector nozzles, resulting in
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Biodiesel Use Requirements and Recommendations
power loss and engine misfire if John Deere approved
fuel conditioners are not used
Possible crankcase oil dilution (requiring more frequent
oil changes)
Possible lacquering or seizure of internal components
Possible formation of sludge and sediments
Possible thermal oxidation of fuel at elevated
temperatures
Possible compatibility issues with other materials
(including copper, lead, zinc, tin, brass, and bronze)
used in fuel handling equipment
Possible reduction in water separator efficiency
Possible damage to paint if exposed to biodiesel
3-1-3
DX,FUEL7 -19-29AUG12-1/2
020113
PN=79
• Possible corrosion of fuel injection equipment
• Possible elastomeric seal and gasket material
degradation (primarily an issue with older engines)
• Possible high acid levels within fuel system
• Because biodiesel blends above B20 contain more
IMPORTANT: Raw pressed vegetable oils are
NOT acceptable for use as fuel in any
concentration in John Deere engines. Their
use could cause engine failure.
ash, using blends above B20 can result in more rapid
ash loading and require more frequent cleaning of the
Exhaust Filter (if present)
DX,FUEL7 -19-29AUG12-2/2
Testing Diesel Fuel
A fuel analysis program can help to monitor the quality
of diesel fuel. The fuel analysis can provide critical
data such as cetane number, fuel type, sulfur content,
water content, appearance, suitability for cold weather
operations, bacteria, cloud point, acid number, particulate
contamination, and whether the fuel meets specification.
Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on
diesel fuel analysis.
DX,FUEL6 -19-14APR11-1/1
3-1-4
020113
PN=80
Minimizing the Effect of Cold Weather on Diesel Engines
John Deere diesel engines are designed to operate
effectively in cold weather.
Diesel Fuel Flow Additive
However, for effective starting and cold weather operation,
a little extra care is necessary. The information below
outlines steps that can minimize the effect that cold
weather may have on starting and operation of your
engine. See your John Deere dealer for additional
information and local availability of cold weather aids.
Use John Deere Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner
(winter formula), which contains anti-gel chemistry, or
equivalent fuel conditioner to treat non-winter grade fuel
(No. 2-D in North America) during the cold weather
season. This generally extends operability to about 10°C
(18°F) below the fuel cloud point. For operability at even
lower temperatures, use winter grade fuel.
Use Winter Grade Fuel
When temperatures fall below 0°C (32°F), winter grade
fuel (No. 1-D in North America) is best suited for cold
weather operation. Winter grade fuel has a lower cloud
point and a lower pour point.
Cloud point is the temperature at which wax will begin to
form in the fuel and this wax causes fuel filters to plug.
Pour point is the lowest temperature at which movement
of the fuel is observed.
NOTE: On average, winter grade diesel fuel has a lower
Btu (heat content) rating. Using winter grade fuel
may reduce power and fuel efficiency, but should not
cause any other engine performance effects. Check
the grade of fuel being used before troubleshooting
for low power complaints in cold weather operation.
Air Intake Heater
An air intake heater is an available option for some
engines to aid cold weather starting.
Ether
An ether port on the intake is available to aid cold weather
starting.
CAUTION: Ether is highly flammable. Do not
use ether when starting an engine equipped
with glow plugs or an air intake heater.
IMPORTANT: Treat fuel when outside temperature
drops below 0°C (32°F). For best results, use
with untreated fuel. Follow all recommended
instructions on label.
BioDiesel
When operating with biodiesel blends, wax formation can
occur at warmer temperatures. Begin using John Deere
Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (winter formula) at
5°C (41°F) to treat biodiesel fuels during the cold weather
season. Use B5 or lower blends at temperatures below
0°C (32°F). Use only winter grade petroleum diesel fuel
at temperatures below -10°C (14°F).
Winterfronts
Use of fabric, cardboard, or solid winterfronts is not
recommended with any John Deere engine. Their use
can result in excessive engine coolant, oil, and charge
air temperatures. This can lead to reduced engine life,
loss of power and poor fuel economy. Winterfronts may
also put abnormal stress on fan and fan drive components
potentially causing premature failures.
If winterfronts are used, they should never totally close
off the grill frontal area. Approximately 25% area in the
center of the grill should remain open at all times. At no
time should the air blockage device be applied directly
to the radiator core.
Radiator Shutters
Coolant Heater
An engine block heater (coolant heater) is an available
option to aid cold weather starting.
Seasonal Viscosity Oil and Proper Coolant
Concentration
Use seasonal grade viscosity engine oil based on the
expected air temperature range between oil changes
and a proper concentration of low silicate antifreeze as
recommended. (See DIESEL ENGINE OIL and ENGINE
COOLANT requirements in this section.)
If equipped with a thermostatically controlled radiator
shutter system, this system should be regulated in such a
way that the shutters are completely open by the time the
coolant reaches 93°C (200°F) to prevent excessive intake
manifold temperatures. Manually controlled systems are
not recommended.
If air-to-air aftercooling is used, the shutters must be
completely open by the time the intake manifold air
temperature reaches the maximum allowable temperature
out of the charge air cooler.
For more information, see your John Deere dealer.
DX,FUEL10 -19-20APR11-1/1
3-1-5
020113
PN=81
Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants
Conditions in certain geographical areas may require
lubricant recommendations different from those printed
in this manual. Some John Deere brand coolants and
lubricants may not be available in your location.
Synthetic lubricants may be used if they meet the
performance requirements as shown in this manual.
Avoid mixing different brands or types of oils. Oil
manufacturers blend base stock and additives to
create their oils and to meet certain specifications and
performance requirements. Mixing different oils can
interfere with proper functioning of these formulations and
degrade lubricant performance.
The temperature limits and service intervals shown in this
manual apply to both conventional and synthetic oils.
Consult your authorized John Deere dealer to obtain
specific information and recommendations.
Re-refined base stock products may be used if the
finished lubricant meets the performance requirements.
AM40430,00000AA -19-03NOV08-1/1
Diesel Engine Break-In™ Oil
New engines are filled at the factory with either John
Deere Break-In™ or Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil. During
the break-in period, add John Deere Break-In or Break-In
Plus Engine Oil, respectively, as needed to maintain the
specified oil level.
Operate the engine under various conditions, particularly
heavy loads with minimal idling, to help seat engine
components properly.
Change the oil and filter at 250 hours maximum for
Break-In Oil or 500 hours maximum for Break-In Plus Oil
during the initial operation of a new or rebuilt engine.
IMPORTANT: Do not use Plus-50™ II, Plus-50, or
engine oils meeting any of the following for the
initial break-in of a new or rebuilt engine:
API CJ-4
ACEA E9
API CI-4 PLUS
ACEA E7
API CI-4
ACEA E6
API CH-4
ACEA E5
API CG-4
ACEA E4
API CF-4
ACEA E3
API CF-2
API CF
After engine overhaul, fill the engine with either John
Deere Break-In or Break-In Plus Engine Oil.
If John Deere Break-In or Break-In Plus Engine Oil is not
available, use a 10W-30 diesel engine oil meeting one of
the following during the first 250 hours of operation:
• API Service Classification CE
• API Service Classification CD
• API Service Classification CC
• ACEA Oil Sequence E2
These oils will not allow the engine to
break in properly.
John Deere Break-In Plus Engine Oil can be used for all
John Deere diesel engines at all emission certification
levels.
After the break-in period, use John Deere Plus-50 II, John
Deere Plus-50, or other diesel engine oil as recommended
in this manual.
Break-In is a trademark of Deere & Company.
Break-In Plus is a trademark of Deere & Company
Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company.
VD76477,0001322 -19-31MAR11-1/1
3-1-6
020113
PN=82
104˚F
30˚C
86˚F
20˚C
68˚F
10˚C
50˚F
0˚C
32˚F
-10˚C
14˚F
-20˚C
-4˚F
-30˚C
-22˚F
-40˚C
-40˚F
Other oils may be used if they meet one or more of the
following:
• John Deere Torq-Gard™
• API Service Category CJ-4
• API Service Category CI-4 PLUS
• API Service Category CI-4
• API Service Category CH-4
TX1114353 —UN—22MAY12
40˚C
John Deere Plus-50 is also recommended.
SAE 5W-30
John Deere Plus-50™ II oil is preferred.
SAE 10W-30
122˚F
SAE 10W-40
50˚C
SAE 15W-40
Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature
range during the period between oil changes.
SAE 0W-40
Diesel Engine Oil—Tier 2 and Stage II Engines
Multi-viscosity diesel engine oils are preferred.
Diesel fuel quality and fuel sulfur content must comply
with all existing emissions regulations for the area in
which the engine operates.
Oil Viscosities for Air Temperature Ranges
DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than
10 000 mg/kg (10 000 ppm).
Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company
Torq-Gard is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,00004E2 -19-23MAY12-1/1
3-1-7
020113
PN=83
Diesel Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals—Tier 2/Stage II Engine
The oil and filter service intervals in the following table
should be used as guidelines. Actual service intervals
also depend on operation and maintenance practices. It
is suggested to use oil analysis to determine the actual
useful life of the oil and to aid in selection of the proper
oil and filter service interval.
Oil and filter service intervals are based on a combination
of oil pan capacity, type of engine oil and filter used, and
sulfur content of the diesel fuel.
Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals
Standard Drain Oil Pan
Fuel Sulfur
Extended Drain
Oil Pan
250 hours
250 hours
Premium Oil
375 hours
500 hours
Fuel Sulfur
150 hours
150 hours
Premium Oil
275 hours
400 hours
Fuel Sulfur
125 hours
125 hours
Premium Oil
187 hours
250 hours
Oil types (premium or standard) in the table include:
• “Premium Oils” include John Deere PLUS-50™, ACEA
SUPREME™, API CJ-4, API CI-4 PLUS, API CI-4, API
CH-4, or ACEA E3 oils.
0.50% to 1.00% (5000 ppm to 10 000 ppm)
Standard Oil
IMPORTANT: When using biodiesel blends greater
than B20, reduce the oil and filter service
interval by 50% or monitor engine oil based
on test results from OILSCAN.
• “Standard Oils” include John DeereTORQ-GARD
0.05 to 0.50% (500 to 5000 ppm)
Standard Oil
•
to 0.50% (5000 ppm) may result in REDUCED oil and
filter change intervals as shown in the table.
than 0.50% (5000 ppm), contact your John Deere dealer.
E7, ACEA E6, ACEA E5, or ACEA E4 oils.
Less than 0.05% (500 ppm)
Standard Oil
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 0.05% (500 ppm)
NOTE: The 500 hour extended oil and filter change
interval is only allowed if all of the following
conditions are met:
• Engine equipped with an extended drain
interval oil pan
Engine oil analysis is required to determine the actual extended service
life of premium oils ACEA E7, ACEA E6, ACEA E5, and ACEA E4.
Diesel fuel sulfur level will affect engine oil and filter
service intervals. Higher fuel sulfur levels reduce oil and
filter service intervals as shown in the table.
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 0.05%
(500 ppm) is strongly recommended.
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less
than 0.05% (500 ppm)
• Use of premium oil: John Deere PLUS-50, ACEA
E7, ACEA E6, ACEA E5, or ACEA E4
• Perform engine oil analysis to determine the
•
actual extended service life of ACEA E7, ACEA
E6, ACEA E5, and ACEA E4 oils
Use of an approved John Deere oil filter
PLUS-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company
TORQ-GARD SUPREME is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,00004E3 -19-16JUL10-1/1
3-1-8
020113
PN=84
104˚F
30˚C
86˚F
20˚C
68˚F
10˚C
50˚F
0˚C
32˚F
-10˚C
14˚F
-20˚C
-4˚F
-30˚C
-22˚F
-40˚C
-40˚F
John Deere Plus-50™ II oil is preferred.
John Deere Plus-50 is also recommended.
following:
• John Deere Torq-Gard™
• API Service Category CJ-4
• API Service Category CI-4 PLUS
• API Service Category CI-4
Multi-viscosity diesel engine oils are preferred.
TX1114353 —UN—22MAY12
40˚C
SAE 5W-30
SAE 10W-30
122˚F
SAE 10W-40
50˚C
SAE 15W-40
Diesel Engine Oil—Tier 3 and Stage III A
Engines
SAE 0W-40
Oil Viscosities for Air Temperature Ranges
Diesel fuel quality and fuel sulfur content must comply
with all existing emissions regulations for the area in
which the engine operates.
10 000 mg/kg (10 000 ppm).
Torq-Gard is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,00004E4 -19-23MAY12-1/1
3-1-9
020113
PN=85
Diesel Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals—Tier 3/Stage III A Engine
The oil and filter service intervals in the following table
should be used as guidelines. Actual service intervals
also depend on operation and maintenance practices. It
is suggested to use oil analysis to determine the actual
useful life of the oil and to aid in selection of the proper
oil and filter service interval.
IMPORTANT: When using biodiesel blends greater
than B20, reduce the oil and filter service
interval by 50% or monitor engine oil based
on test results from Oilscan.
Oil and filter service intervals are based on a combination
of oil pan capacity, type of engine oil and filter used, and
sulfur content of the diesel fuel.
• John Deere Plus-50™ II and John Deere Plus-50
• “Other Oils” include John Deere Torq-Gard Supreme™,
Diesel fuel sulfur level will affect engine oil and filter
service intervals. Higher fuel sulfur levels reduce oil and
filter service intervals as shown in the table.
Use of lower specification oils in Tier 3 engines may result
in premature engine failure.
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 0.10%
•
•
•
(1000 mg/kg) is strongly recommended.
Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 0.10% (1000
mg/kg) to 0.50% (5000 mg/kg) may result in REDUCED
oil and filter change intervals as shown in the table.
than 0.50% (5000 mg/kg), contact your John Deere
dealer.
1.00% (10 000 mg/kg).
Oil types in the table include:
API CJ-4, API CI-4 PLUS, API CI-4, ACEA E9, ACEA
E7, ACEA E6, ACEA E5, or ACEA E4 oils.
NOTE: The 500 hour extended oil and filter change interval
is only allowed if all the following conditions are met:
• Engine equipped with an extended drain
interval oil pan
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less
than 0.50% (5000 mg/kg)
• Use of John Deere Plus-50™ II or John
Deere Plus-50 oil
• Use of an approved John Deere oil filter
U.S. Tier 3 and EU Stage III A - PowerTech Plus™
U.S. Tier 3 and EU Stage III A - PowerTech™
Oil Pan Size (L/kW)
Oil pan capacity
Greater than or
equal to 0.10
Fuel Sulfur
Greater than or
equal to 0.12
Greater than or
equal to 0.14
Oil Pan Size (L/kW)
Greater than or
equal to 0.22
Greater than or
equal to 0.10
Less than 0.10% (1000 mg/kg)
Greater than or
equal to 0.12
Greater than or
equal to 0.14
Less than 0.10% (1000 mg/kg)
Plus-50
375 hours
500 hours
500 hours
500 hours
375 hours
500 hours
500 hours
Other Oils
250 hours
250 hours
250 hours
250 hours
250 hours
250 hours
250 hours
Fuel Sulfur
0.10 - 0.20% (1000 - 2000 mg/kg)
0.10 - 0.20% (1000 - 2000 mg/kg)
Plus-50
300 hours
300 hours
500 hours
500 hours
300 hours
400 hours
500 hours
Other Oils
200 hours
200 hours
250 hours
250 hours
200 hours
200 hours
250 hours
Fuel Sulfur
0.20 - 0.50% (2000 - 5000 mg/kg)
0.20 - 0.50% (2000 - 5000 mg/kg)
Plus-50
250 hours
250 hours
300 hours
500 hours
275 hours
350 hours
500 hours
Other Oils
150 hours
150 hours
200 hours
250 hours
150 hours
175 hours
250 hours
Fuel Sulfur
0.50 - 1.00% (5000 - 10 000 mg/kg)
Plus-50
Contact John Deere Dealer (dealer refers to DTAC solutions)
187 hours
0.50 - 1.00% (5000 - 10 000 mg/kg)
250 hours
250 hours
Other Oils
Contact John Deere Dealer (dealer refers to DTAC solutions)
125 hours
125 hours
125 hours
The service interval of “Other Oils” may be extended only if oil analysis is performed to determine the actual service life, to a maximum not to
exceed that of Plus-50.
Torq-Gard Supreme is a trademark of Deere & Company
PowerTech Plus is a trademark of Deere & Company
PowerTech is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,00004E5 -19-16JUL10-1/1
3-1-10
020113
PN=86
Transmission, Axles, and Mechanical Front
Wheel Drive (MFWD) Oil
The following oils are preferred:
• John Deere HY-GARD™
• John Deere Low Viscosity HY-GARD™
Other oils may be used if they meet one of the following:
• John Deere Standard JDM J20C
• John Deere Standard JDM J20D
TS1660 —UN—10OCT97
Use the following oil when a biodegradable fluid is
required:
• John Deere BIO-HY-GARD™
HY-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
BIO-HY-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,00010CF -19-17JUL07-1/1
Hydraulic Oil
The following oil is preferred:
• John Deere PLUS-50™
The following oil is also recommended:
• John Deere TORQ-GARD SUPREME™
following:
TX1017022 —UN—21DEC06
• API Service Classification CH-4
• API Service Classification CG-4
• API Service Classification CF-4
• ACEA Specification E3
• ACEA Specification E2
TORQ-GARD SUPREME is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,00010D0 -19-04APR07-1/1
3-1-11
020113
PN=87
Grease
Use grease based on NLGI consistency numbers and the
expected air temperature range during the service interval.
John Deere Moly High Temperature/EP Grease is
preferred.
The following greases are also recommended:
• SAE Multipurpose EP Grease containing 3-5%
molybdenum disulfide
• SAE Multipurpose EP Grease
TX1075818 —UN—06APR10
IMPORTANT: Some types of grease thickeners are not
compatible with others. Consult your grease
supplier before mixing different types of grease.
VD76477,00012D0 -19-19MAY10-1/1
Heavy Duty Diesel Engine Coolant
The engine cooling system is filled to provide year-round
protection against corrosion and cylinder liner pitting, and
winter freeze protection to -37°C (-34°F). If protection at
lower temperatures is required, consult your John Deere
dealer for recommendations.
The following engine coolants are preferred:
heavy duty diesel engines and with a minimum of the
following chemical and physical properties:
• Is formulated with a quality nitrite-free additive package.
• Provides cylinder liner cavitation protection according to
•
• John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix
• John Deere COOL-GARD II PG Premix
Use John Deere COOL-GARD II PG Premix when a
non-toxic coolant formulation is required.
Additional Recommended Coolants
either the John Deere Cavitation Test Method or a fleet
study run at or above 60% load capacity
Protects the cooling system metals (cast iron, aluminum
alloys, and copper alloys such as brass) from corrosion
The additive package must be part of one of the following
coolant mixtures:
• ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base prediluted
(40—60%) heavy duty coolant
• ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base heavy
The following engine coolant is also recommended:
• John Deere COOL-GARD II Concentrate in a 40–60%
mixture of concentrate with quality water.
duty coolant concentrate in a 40—60% mixture of
concentrate with quality water
Water Quality
John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix, COOL-GARD II PG
Premix, and COOL-GARD II Concentrate coolants do not
require use of supplemental coolant additives.
Other Coolants
Water quality is important to the performance of the
cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized
water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and
propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.
John Deere COOL-GARD II and COOL-GARD II PG
coolants might not be available in the geographical area
where service is performed.
IMPORTANT: Do not use cooling system sealing
additives or antifreeze that contains
sealing additives.
If these coolants are unavailable, use a coolant
concentrate or prediluted coolant intended for use with
Do not mix ethylene glycol and propylene
glycol base coolants.
Do not use coolants that contain nitrites.
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL3 -19-14APR11-1/1
3-1-12
020113
PN=88
Drain Intervals for Diesel Engine Coolant
Drain and flush the cooling system and refill with fresh
coolant at the indicated interval, which varies with the
coolant used.
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix, COOL-GARD
II PG Premix and COOL-GARD II Concentrate are
maintenance free coolants for up to six years or 6000
hours of operation, provided that the cooling system is
topped off using only John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix
or COOL-GARD II PG Premix.
Test the coolant condition annually with Coolant Test
Strips designed for use with John Deere COOL-GARD
II coolants. If the test strip chart indicates that additive
is required, add John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant
Extender as directed.
If John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix, COOL-GARD II
PG Premix, or COOL-GARD II Concentrate is used, but
the coolant is not tested OR additives are not replenished
by adding John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender,
the drain interval is four years or 4000 hours of operation.
This drain interval only applies to COOL-GARD II coolants
that have been maintained within a 40—60% mixture of
concentrate with quality water.
If a coolant other than COOL-GARD II, or COOL-GARD
II PG is used, reduce the drain interval to two years or
2000 hours of operation.
DX,COOL11 -19-14APR11-1/1
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Coolant Extender
Some coolant additives will gradually deplete during
engine operation. For John Deere COOL-GARD™ II
Premix, COOL-GARD II PG Premix, and COOL-GARD II
Concentrate, replenish coolant additives between drain
intervals by adding John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant
Extender.
IMPORTANT: Do not add a supplemental coolant
additive when the cooling system is drained
and refilled with any of the following:
John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender should not
be added unless indicated by coolant testing.
The use of non-recommended supplemental coolant
additives may result in additive drop-out, gelation of the
coolant, or corrosion of cooling system components.
John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is a
chemically matched additive system for use with all
John Deere COOL-GARD II coolants. John Deere
COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is not intended for use
with nitrite-containing coolants.
• John Deere COOL-GARD II
• John Deere COOL-GARD II PG
Add the recommended concentration of John Deere
COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender. DO NOT add more
than the recommended amount.
DX,COOL16 -19-20APR11-1/1
3-1-13
020113
PN=89
Supplemental Coolant Additives
engine operation. For nitrite-containing coolants,
replenish coolant additives between drain intervals by
adding a supplemental coolant additive as determined
necessary by coolant testing.
John Deere Liquid Coolant Conditioner is recommended
as a supplemental coolant additive for nitrite-containing
coolants.
John Deere Liquid Coolant Conditioner is not designed
for use with John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix,
COOL-GARD II PG Premix, or COOL-GARD II
Concentrate.
• John Deere COOL-GARD II
• John Deere COOL-GARD II PG
If other coolants are used, consult the coolant supplier
and follow the manufacturer's recommendation for use of
supplemental coolant additives.
The use of non-recommended supplemental coolant
additives may result in additive drop-out and gelation of
the coolant.
Add the manufacturer's recommended concentration of
supplemental coolant additive. DO NOT add more than
the recommended amount.
IMPORTANT: Do not add a supplemental coolant
additive when the cooling system is drained
and refilled with any of the following:
DX,COOL4 -19-14APR11-1/1
Operating in Warm Temperature Climates
John Deere engines are designed to operate using glycol
base engine coolants.
Always use a recommended glycol base engine coolant,
even when operating in geographical areas where freeze
protection is not required.
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix is available in a
concentration of 50% ethylene glycol. However, there
are situations in warm temperature climates where a
coolant with lower glycol concentration (approximately
20% ethylene glycol) has been approved. In these cases,
the low glycol formulation has been modified to provide
the same level of corrosion inhibitor as John Deere
COOL-GARD II Premix (50/50).
IMPORTANT: Water may be used as coolant in
emergency situations only.
Foaming, hot surface aluminum and iron
corrosion, scaling, and cavitation will occur
when water is used as the coolant, even when
coolant conditioners are added.
Drain cooling system and refill with
recommended glycol base engine coolant
as soon as possible.
DX,COOL6 -19-03NOV08-1/1
3-1-14
020113
PN=90
Additional Information About Diesel Engine Coolants and John Deere COOL-GARD™
II Coolant Extender
Engine coolants are a combination of three chemical
components: ethylene glycol (EG) or propylene glycol
(PG) antifreeze, inhibiting coolant additives, and quality
water.
Coolant Specifications
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Premix either EG or
PG, are fully formulated coolants that contain all three
components in their correct concentrations. DO NOT
add an initial charge of John Deere COOL-GARD II
Coolant Extender to COOL-GARD II Premix. DO NOT
add any other supplemental coolant additive or water to
COOL-GARD II Premix.
John Deere COOL-GARD II Concentrate contains both
ethylene glycol and inhibiting coolant additives. Mix this
product with quality water, but DO NOT add an initial
charge of John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender
or any other supplemental coolant additive.
Replenish Coolant Additives
engine operation. Periodic replenishment of inhibitors
is required, even when John Deere COOL-GARD II
Premix or COOL-GARD II Concentrate is used. Follow
the recommendations in this manual for the use of John
Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender.
Why use John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant
Extender?
Operating without proper coolant additives will result in
increased corrosion, cylinder liner erosion and pitting, and
other damage to the engine and cooling system. A simple
mixture of ethylene glycol or propylene glycol and water
will not give adequate protection.
John Deere COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is a
chemically matched additive system designed to fortify the
proprietary additives used in John Deere COOL-GARD II
Premix and COOL-GARD II Concentrate and to provide
optimum protection for up to six years or 6000 hours of
operation.
Avoid Automotive-type Coolants
Never use automotive-type coolants (such as those
meeting ASTM D3306). These coolants do not contain the
correct additives to protect heavy-duty diesel engines. Do
not treat an automotive engine coolant with supplemental
coolant additives because the high concentration of
additives can result in additive fallout.
Water Quality
Water quality is important to the performance of the
cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized
water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol
and propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.All
water used in the cooling system should meet the
following minimum specifications for quality:
Chlorides
<40 mg/L
Sulfates
<100 mg/L
Total dissolved solids
<340 mg/L
Total hardness
<170 mg/L
pH
5.5 to 9.0
Freeze Protection
The relative concentrations of glycol and water in the
engine coolant determine its freeze protection limit.
Ethylene Glycol
Freeze Protection Limit
40%
-24°C (-12°F)
50%
-37°C (-34°F)
60%
-52°C (-62°F)
Propylene Glycol
Freeze Protection Limit
40%
-21°C (-6°F)
50%
-33°C (-27°F)
60%
-49°C (-56°F)
DO NOT use a coolant-water mixture greater than 60%
ethylene glycol or 60% propylene glycol.
DX,COOL17 -19-20APR11-1/1
3-1-15
020113
PN=91
Testing Diesel Engine Coolant
Maintaining adequate concentrations of glycol and
inhibiting additives in the coolant is critical to protect the
engine and cooling system against freezing, corrosion,
and cylinder liner erosion and pitting.
Test the coolant solution at intervals of 12 months or less
and whenever excessive coolant is lost through leaks or
overheating.
Coolant Test Strips
Add only the recommended concentration of John Deere
COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender. DO NOT add more
than the recommended amount.
When Using Nitrite-Containing Coolants
Compare the test strip results to the supplemental coolant
additive (SCA) chart to determine the amount of inhibiting
additives in your coolant and whether more John Deere
Liquid Coolant Conditioner should be added.
Coolant test strips are available from your John Deere
dealer. These test strips provide a simple, effective
method to check the freeze point and additive levels of
your engine coolant.
Add only the recommended concentration of John Deere
Liquid Coolant Conditioner. DO NOT add more than the
recommended amount.
When Using John Deere COOL-GARD II
Coolant Analysis
John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix™ , COOL-GARD
II PG Premix and COOL-GARD II Concentrate are
maintenance free coolants for up to six years or 6000
hours of operation, provided that the cooling system is
topped off using only John Deere COOL-GARD II Premix
or COOL-GARD II PG premix. Test the coolant condition
annually with coolant test strips designed for use with
John Deere COOL-GARD II coolants. If the test strip
chart indicates that additive is required, add John Deere
COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender as directed.
For a more thorough evaluation of your coolant, perform a
coolant analysis. The coolant analysis can provide critical
data such as freezing point, antifreeze level, pH, alkalinity,
nitrite content (cavitation control additive), molybdate
content (rust inhibitor additive), silicate content, corrosion
metals, and visual assessment.
Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on
coolant analysis.
DX,COOL9 -19-11APR11-1/1
3-1-16
020113
PN=92
Service Machine at Specified Intervals
T132353B —UN—13JUL00
Lubricate and make service checks and adjustments at
intervals shown on the periodic maintenance chart (A),
greasing maintenance chart (B), and in the maintenance
sections.
Perform service on items at multiples of the original
requirement. For example, at 500 hours also service
those items (if applicable) listed under 250 hours, 100
hours, and 10 hours or daily.
Intervals shown on charts and in this manual are for
normal conditions. If operating in difficult conditions,
service at shorter intervals.
A—Periodic Maintenance Chart
B—Greasing Maintenance
Chart
CED,OUO1079,418 -19-14DEC06-1/1
Check Hour Meter Regularly
Check the hour meter (1) in the display window to
determine when the machine needs periodic maintenance.
TX1013759A —UN—26OCT06
To check the hour meter, turn the key switch on and press
the SELECT button until the hour meter is displayed.
To check the hour meter with the key switch off, press
and hold the SELECT button.
1— Hour Meter
VD76477,00010F9 -19-10JUL09-1/1
Prepare Machine for Maintenance
IMPORTANT: Improperly disposing of waste can
threaten the environment and ecology.
Potentially harmful waste used with John
Deere equipment includes such items as oil,
fuel, coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries.
Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a
drain, or into any water source.
Before performing procedures in the maintenance
chapters and before leaving the operator’s seat, park the
machine, and release hydraulic pressure.
CAUTION: Prevent serious injury or death from
unexpected machine movement. Always install
the loader boom service lock, or lower the front
loader boom fully to the ground, and move
control levers to release hydraulic pressure
before working near the front of the machine.
See Loader Boom Service Lock in this section
for installation instructions.
Raise the front loader boom and install the loader boom
service lock before performing maintenance in the engine
compartment. See Loader Boom Service Lock in this
section.
If the machine is equipped with ride control, discharge
hydraulic pressure from the ride control system before
performing maintenance. See Discharge Ride Control
System Hydraulic Pressure—If Equipped. (Section 4-1.)
CED,OUO1079,419 -19-18JAN02-1/1
3-2-1
020113
PN=93
Engine Identification
Use the following information to identify the engine as
either a Tier 3/Stage IIIA or Tier 2/Stage II engine.
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine Component Identification
Machines equipped with Tier 3/Stage IIIA engines have
surge tank (1) mounted at rear of engine compartment
and charge air cooler (2) on top right side of engine.
3— Muffler
4— Air Cleaner
TX1035274A —UN—23JAN08
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine (left side view)
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine (right side view)
TX1035278A —UN—23JAN08
1— Surge Tank
2— Charge Air Cooler
TX1035275A —UN—23JAN08
Tier 3/Stage IIIA engine machines have a different
placement of muffler (3) and air cleaner (4) than Tier
2/Stage II engines.
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine (detail)
3-2-2
MD04263,000013E -19-20FEB09-1/3
020113
PN=94
Tier 2/Stage II Engine Component Identification
Machines equipped with Tier 2/Stage II engines have
surge tank (1) mounted at front of engine compartment,
and do not use a charge air cooler.
4— Air Cleaner
TX1035277A —UN—23JAN08
Tier 2/Stage II Engine (left side view)
Tier 2/Stage II Engine (right side view)
TX1035279A —UN—23JAN08
1— Surge Tank
3— Muffler
TX1035276A —UN—23JAN08
Tier 3/Stage IIIA engine machines have a different
placement of muffler (3) and air cleaner (4) than Tier
2/Stage II engines.
Tier 2/Stage II Engine (detail)
3-2-3
MD04263,000013E -19-20FEB09-2/3
020113
PN=95
Engine Serial and Model Number Identification
The engine serial number plate (7) is located on the right
rear of the engine block.
TX1035401A —UN—23JAN08
The fifth digit of the engine model number can be used to
identify an engine as either Tier 3/Stage IIIA or Tier 2/Stage
II based on aspiration method for this machine application.
Engine Model Number
4045HT054
H ........................................
Turbocharger and air-to-water
aftercooled (Tier 3/Stage IIIA
engine)
4045TT095
T .........................................
Turbocharged, no aftercooling
(Tier 2/Stage II engine)
TX1035303 —UN—29JAN08
7— Engine Serial Number Plate
Engine Serial Number Plate—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
TX1035305 —UN—29JAN08
5— Engine Serial Number
6— Engine Model Number
Engine Serial Number Plate Location
Engine Serial Number Plate—Tier 2/Stage II Engine
MD04263,000013E -19-20FEB09-3/3
3-2-4
020113
PN=96
Loader Boom Service Lock
Install loader boom service lock when front loader must
be raised for service procedures.
5. Remove cotter pin and retaining pin, and lower loader
boom service lock onto cylinder rod.
IMPORTANT: Do not raise or lower the front loader
boom while the engine hood is open. Always
close the engine hood fully before moving
the front loader boom, or severe damage to
the engine hood will occur.
6. Install retaining pin and cotter pin to attach loader
boom service lock on cylinder rod.
Installing the Loader Boom Service Lock
Removing the Loader Boom Service Lock
2. Empty loader bucket and move bucket to dump
position.
2. Start engine and raise boom slightly to allow clearance
between loader boom service lock and cylinder.
3. Raise boom until loader boom service lock can fit over
cylinder rod.
3. Remove cotter pin and retaining pin.
4. Stop engine.
7. Slowly lower boom until its weight settles onto the
loader boom service lock.
4. Lift loader boom service lock to storage position, and
install retaining pin and cotter pin to retain.
HG31779,000007D -19-14MAY02-1/1
Opening and Closing Engine Hood
TX1013942A —UN—23OCT06
IMPORTANT: Do not raise or lower front loader boom
while the engine hood is open. Always close
engine hood fully before moving front loader
boom, or severe damage to hood will occur.
TX1013950A —UN—23OCT06
NOTE: The engine hood can be partially opened when
the front loader boom is lowered fully to the
ground. To fully open the engine hood, the front
loader boom must be fully raised and the loader
boom service lock must be installed.
Push hood tilt latch (1) and lift hood to open.
Pull hood support (2) and slowly lower hood to close.
1— Hood Tilt Latch
2— Hood Support
VD76477,0001132 -19-20OCT06-1/1
Fuel Tank
CAUTION: Handle fuel carefully. If the engine
is hot or running, DO NOT fill the fuel tank.
DO NOT smoke while filling fuel tank or
working on fuel system.
To avoid condensation, fill the fuel tank at the end of each
day’s operation. Shut off engine before filling.
Specification
Fuel Tank—Capacity....................................................................... 155 L
41 gal
VD76477,00011F7 -19-07MAR07-1/1
3-2-5
020113
PN=97
Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and 3-Way
Coolant Test Kit
Engine, hydraulic, power train, and coolant samples
should be taken from each system on a periodic basis,
usually prior to a filter and/or fluid change interval. Certain
systems require more frequent sampling. Consult your
authorized John Deere dealer on a maintenance program
for your specific application. Your authorized John Deere
dealer has the sampling products and expertise to assist
you in lowering your overall operating costs through fluid
sampling.
TX1003513A —UN—20FEB06
Fluid Analysis Program Test Kits and the 3-Way Coolant
Test Kit are John Deere fluid sampling products to help you
monitor machine maintenance and system condition. The
objective of a fluid sampling program is to ensure machine
availability when you need it and to reduce repair costs by
identifying potential problems before they become critical.
Fluid Analysis Kits
AM40430,00002FE -19-19OCT11-1/1
3-2-6
020113
PN=98
Service Intervals
Model: 310J and 310SJ
PIN/Serial Number:
Hour Meter Reading:
SERVICE INTERVALS
Service your machine at intervals shown on this chart. Also, perform service on items at multiples of the original requirement. For example, at 500
hours also service those items listed under 250 hours, 100 hours, 50 hours, and 10 hours or daily.
FLUID SAMPLING
Take fluid samples from each system as indicated on this form. The manufacturer of the fluid analysis kits will provide maintenance
recommendations based upon the results of the fluid analysis and the operating information you supply. Regular fluid sampling extends the
operational life of your machine.
As Required
□ Inspect tires and check pressure
□ Clean or replace engine air cleaner elements
□ Check wheel fasteners
□ Grease MFWD drive shaft spline (if equipped)
□ Clean or replace cab fresh air and recirculation filters (if equipped)
□ Grease non-powered front wheel bearings (if equipped)
□ Drain water and sediment from water separators
□ Add coolant extender as indicated by COOL-GARD™ II test strips
□ Drain water and sediment from auxiliary water separator fuel filter (if equipped)
Every 10 Hours or Daily
□ Check hydraulic reservoir oil level
□ Grease backhoe boom, crowd cylinders and pivots
□ Check engine oil level
□ Grease backhoe bucket cylinder and pivots
□ Check coolant level
□ Grease backhoe swing cylinder and pivots
□ Inspect fuel water sediment bowls
□ Grease MFWD front axle and U-joints (if equipped)
□ Grease loader pivot points
□ Grease non-powered front axle steering pivots (if equipped)
□ Grease loader quick coupler (if equipped)
□ Grease multipurpose bucket pivots (if equipped)
□ Grease front axle pivot pin
□ Grease backhoe coupler (if equipped)
□ Grease stabilizer pivots and cylinder pins
Every 50 Hours
□ Check transmission oil level
□ Grease backhoe coupler fittings (if equipped)
Initial Service—250 Hours1
□ Change engine break-in oil and replace filter
1
Perform initial service once after the first 250 hours of operation.
Every 250 Hours
□ Check MFWD planetary housing oil level (if equipped)
□ Check rear axle oil level
□ Check MFWD front axle housing oil level (if equipped)
□ Take engine oil sample
□ Check battery electrolyte level and tighten terminals
Every 500 Hours
□ Check air intake hose
□ Clean engine crankcase vent tube
□ Check boom-to-dipperstick pin bolt torque
□ Take rear axle oil sample
□ Drain water and sediment from fuel tank
□ Take diesel fuel sample
□ Change engine oil and replace filter
□ Take transmission oil sample
□ Replace fuel filters
□ Take hydraulic oil sample
□ Replace auxiliary water separator fuel filter (if equipped)
□ Take engine coolant sample
Every 1000 Hours
□ Replace hydraulic reservoir breather
□ Replace hydraulic oil filter
□ Replace engine air cleaner elements
□ Replace fuel breather
□ Replace cab, fresh air and recirculation filters (if equipped)
□ Change transmission oil and replace filter
□ Inspect serpentine belt
□ Check coolant
3-2-7
CS58540,0000049 -19-17MAY10-1/2
020113
PN=99
□ Clean, pack, and adjust non-powered front wheel bearings (if equipped)
Every 2000 Hours
□ Adjust engine valve lash
□ Drain and refill hydraulic reservoir oil
□ Drain and refill MFWD front axle housing oil (if equipped)
□ Drain and refill rear axle and planetary oil
□ Drain and refill MFWD planetary housing oil (if equipped)
□ Inspect and clean hydraulic reservoir fill screen
Every 6000 Hours
□ Drain and refill cooling system
CS58540,0000049 -19-17MAY10-2/2
3-2-8
020113
PN=100
Required Parts
REQUIRED PARTS
Ensure machine performance and availability; use only genuine John Deere parts. Verify part numbers are current and that any associated
parts are also on hand, i.e., filter O-rings.
Description
Part
Number
Initial
Service1 250
Hours
Every
250
Hours
1
Every
500
Hours
Every
1000
Hours
Every
2000
Hours
Every
6000
Hours
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Engine Oil Filter
RE504836
Auxiliary Water Separator Fuel Filter (if
equipped)
AT365870
Hydraulic Oil Filter
AT308274
1
1
1
Hydraulic Reservoir Breather
AT101565
1
1
1
Fuel Breather
AM107314
1
1
1
Transmission Oil Filter
AT179323
1
1
1
Cab Fresh Air Filter
AT191102
1
1
1
Cab Recirculation Filter
AT184590
1
1
1
Engine 4045DT054
• Primary Fuel Filter
• Final Fuel Filter
• Engine Rocker Arm Cover Gasket
• Air Filter Element―Primary
• Air Filter Element―Secondary
• Engine Air Cleaner Dust Unloader Valve
RE529643
1
1
1
1
RE522878
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
R524468
AT332908
As Required
AT332909
As Required
T179504
As Required
Engine 4045DT060
RE509031
1
1
R123542
KV16429
As Required
AT171854
As Required
R48568
As Required
Engine 4045TT094
RE509031
1
1
R524480
KV16429
As Required
AT171854
As Required
R48568
As Required
COOL-GARD™ II Pre-Mix:
TY26575
21.0 L
(5.5 gal.)
TY26575
25.0 L
(6.6 gal.)
Coolant Extender
TY26603
John Deere PLUS-50™ II Engine Oil
TY266742
John Deere PLUS-50™ Hydraulic Oil
TY63892
As Required
13.0 L
(3.5 gal.)
13.0 L
(3.5 gal.)
13.0 L
(3.5 gal.)
13.0 L
(3.5 gal.)
13.0 L
(3.5 gal.)
39.0 L
(10.3 gal.)
39.0 L
(10.3 gal.)
15.0 L
(4.0 gal.)
15.0 L
(4.0 gal.)
HY-GARD™ Transmission Oil:
Transmission Oil
TY63542
MFWD Front Axle Housing and Planetary Oil
(if equipped)
TY63542
8.5 L
(2.25 gal.)
8.5 L
(2.25 gal.)
Rear Axle Housing and Planetary Oil
TY63542
18.0 L
(4.8 gal.)
18.0 L
(4.8 gal.)
1
1
15.0 L
(4.0 gal.)
Fluid Analysis Kits3
Diesel Engine Oil
AT346594
1
3-2-9
1
1
CS58540,000004A -19-06JUN12-1/2
020113
PN=101
Description
Part
Number
Initial
Service1 250
Hours
Every
250
Hours
Every
500
Hours
Every
1000
Hours
Every
2000
Hours
Every
6000
Hours
Hydraulic Oil
AT346594
1
1
1
1
Transmission and Rear Axle Oil
AT346594
2
2
2
2
Diesel Fuel
AT180344
1
1
1
1
Engine Coolant
TY26873
1
1
1
1
COOL-GARD™ II Test Strips
TY26605
1
1
1
1
Perform initial service once after the first 250 hours of operation.
2
For recommended oil type and oil viscosities based on operating temperatures see Maintenance—Machine. (Section 3-1.)
3
Based on fluid analysis results, intervals may need to be adjusted for your operating conditions. Consult your local John Deere dealer.
CS58540,000004A -19-06JUN12-2/2
3-2-10
020113
PN=102
Check Tire Pressure
CAUTION: Explosive separation of a tire and rim
parts can cause serious injury or death.
Only attempt to mount a tire if you have the
proper equipment and experience to perform
the job. Have it done by your John Deere
dealer or a qualified repair service.
Always maintain the correct tire pressure. DO
NOT inflate the tires above the recommended
pressure. NEVER cut or weld on an inflated tire
or rim assembly, rim, or rim parts. Heat from
welding could cause an increase in pressure
and may result in a tire explosion.
Inspect tires and wheels daily. DO NOT operate
with low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged
rims, or missing lug bolts and nuts.
Check tire pressure with an accurate gauge having 6.9
kPa (0.07 bar) (1 psi) graduations. If tires contain liquid
ballast, use a special air-water gauge and measure with
valve stem at bottom.
When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and
extension hose long enough to allow you to stand
to one side and NOT in front of or over the tire
assembly. Use a safety cage if available.
When inflating tires be sure to lock air chuck to valve stem
and stand to front or rear of tire.
TX,55,BD2138 -19-07OCT96-1/1
3-3-1
020113
PN=103
Front Axle
Tire Inflation Pressures
Shipping pressure may not be the same as operating
pressure. You may change tire pressures to suit
working condition according to tire manufacturer’s
recommendations.
IMPORTANT: The tire pressure stamped on the
sidewall of a tire is the manufacturers
recommended pressure for that specific tire.
If there is a pressure difference between the
sidewall stamp and the chart below use the
pressure listed below. The pressures below
have been approved by the tire manufacturer.
The pressure difference on these tires may be
to alleviate tire squat, improve stability, and
or prevent premature tire failure.
NOTE: Some or of these tires options may not be
available on specific backhoe models.
Tire Size
Pressure
10.5/80-18
372 kPa
3.7 bar
54 psi
11L-15
303 kPa
3.0 bar
44 psi
11L-16
441 kPa
4.4 bar
64 psi
12.5/80-18 12PR
414 kPa
4.1 bar
60 psi
12.5/80-18 10PR
414 kPa
4.1 bar
60 psi
12-16.5 8PR
345 kPa
3.4 bar
50 psi
12-16.5 10PR R-3
276 kPa
2.8 bar
40 psi
12-16.5 10PR SS
12-16.5 10PR NHS
448 kPa
4.5 bar
65 psi
14.5/75-16.1
276 kPa
2.8 bar
40 psi
15-19.5
276 kPa
2.8 bar
40 psi
16.5L-16.1
276 kPa
2.8 bar
40 psi
340/80R18 IT530
(310SJ and 310SJ TMC only)
276 kPa
2.8 bar
40 psi
340/80R18 IT530
317 kPa
3.2 bar
46 psi
340/80R18 XMCL
400 kPa
4.0 bar
58 psi
LT245/75R16
448 kPa
4.5 bar
65 psi
3-3-2
TX18203,00004C1 -19-27JUL12-1/2
020113
PN=104
Rear Axle
Tire Size
Pressure
16.9-28
(310J, 310SJ and 310SJ TMC
only)
193 kPa
1.9 bar
28 psi
16.9-28
221 kPa
2.2 bar
32 psi
19.5L-24 10PR R-3
165 kPa
1.7 bar
24 psi
19.5L-24 10PR R-4
193 kPa
1.9 bar
28 psi
19.5L-24 12PR
234 kPa
2.3 bar
34 psi
19.5L-244 10PR
179 kPa
1.8 bar
26 psi
19.5L-244 16PR
276 kPa
2.8 bar
40 psi
19.5L-249
248 kPa
2.5 bar
36 psi
20.5-25 12PR L-2
241 kPa
2.4 bar
35 psi
20.5-25 12PR L-3
248 kPa
2.5 bar
36 psi
20.5-25 XTLA
427 kPa
4.3 bar
62 psi
21L-24 10PR
179 kPa
1.8 bar
26 psi
21L-24 12PR
234 kPa
2.3 bar
34 psi
21L-28
248 kPa
2.5 bar
36 psi
500/70R24 IT530
317 kPa
3.2 bar
46 psi
500/70R24 XMCL
317 kPa
3.2 bar
46 psi
540/70R24
317 kPa
3.2 bar
46 psi
TX18203,00004C1 -19-27JUL12-2/2
3-3-3
020113
PN=105
Check Wheel Fasteners
TX1044696A —UN—25JUN08
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage.
Fasteners should be clean and dry. Do not
lubricate fasteners. Start fasteners by hand
to prevent cross threading.
Continue to check torque at 50—100 hour
intervals until torque is maintained.
Check front and rear wheel fasteners (1 and 2) according
to specification.
1. Inspect all parts for damage. Replace parts as
necessary.
315SJ Shown
2. When replacing clean lug nuts and tapped studs. Use
compressed air to dry all parts.
1— Front Wheel Fastener (8
used per tire)
2— Rear Wheel Fastener (10
used per tire)
3. Tighten fasteners in a star pattern until wheel is drawn
up to hub.
4. Tighten fasteners in a star pattern to full torque.
5. Continue to check torque at 50—100 hour intervals
until torque is maintained.
Specification
Rear Wheel
Nuts—Torque............................................................................. 725 N•m
535 lb.-ft
MFWD Front Wheel-toHub Nuts—Torque...................................................................... 725 N•m
535 lb.-ft
Non-Powered Front
Wheel-to-Hub Cap
Screws
(11L x 16 Tire Size)
—Torque..................................................................................... 126 N•m
170 lb.-ft
Non-Powered Front
Wheel-to-Hub Cap
Screws
(14.5/75 -16.1 Tire
Size)—Torque............................................................................. 290 N•m
214 lb.-ft
KR46761,0000796 -19-31OCT12-1/1
Clean Cab Air Filters—If Equipped
1. Open latch (A) on inside of right-side window frame.
T132588B —UN—18JUL00
2. Remove fresh air filter cover (B) and fresh air filter.
3. Inspect filter. Clean as necessary. Replace if
damaged.
4. Install filter and filter cover.
5. Close latch.
A—Latch
B—Fresh Air Filter Cover
3-3-4
VD76477,000119F -19-09JUL09-1/2
020113
PN=106
Cab Recirculating Air Filter
1. Remove cab recirculating air filter cover (C) and cab
recirculating air filter.
T132838B —UN—24JUL00
2. Inspect filter. Clean as necessary. Replace if
damaged.
3. Install filter and filter cover.
Cleaning Cab Air Filters
CAUTION: Reduce compressed air to less than
210 kPa (2.10 bar) (30 psi) when using for
cleaning purposes. Clear area of bystanders,
guard against flying debris, and wear personal
protection equipment, including eye protection.
C—Cab Recirculating Air Filter
Cover
NOTE: Always replace damaged air filters.
Clean filter(s) using one of the following methods:
• Direct compressed air through filter(s), opposite normal
• Tap filter(s) on a flat surface with dirty side down.
• Wash in warm, soapy water and flush. Let filter(s) dry
before reinstalling.
air flow.
VD76477,000119F -19-09JUL09-2/2
3-3-5
020113
PN=107
Drain Water and Sediment from Water
Separator
1— Primary Fuel Filter Drain
Valve
TX1036491A —UN—08FEB08
1. Place container under primary fuel filter drain valve
(1) to collect waste.
2. Loosen valve and allow water and sediment to drain
from fuel filter assembly.
3. Tighten valve. Dispose of waste properly.
4. Place container under final fuel filter drain valve (2) to
collect waste. (Tier 3/Stage IIIA engine only).
5. Loosen valve and allow water and sediment to drain
from fuel filter assembly.
6. Tighten valve. Dispose of waste properly.
2— Final Fuel Filter Drain Valve
TX1002482A —UN—10JAN06
MD04263,000013F -19-20FEB09-1/1
Drain Auxiliary Water Separator Fuel
Filter—If Equipped
1
1— Fuel Priming Pump Button
(hand operated)
2— Air Vent
3— Drain Valve
4— Drain Hose
3
4
TX1054638 —UN—19JAN09
1. Place container under drain hose (4).
2. Loosen air vent (2) and drain valve (3). Drain water,
fuel, and sediment into container. Dispose of waste
properly.
3. Tighten drain valve.
4. Bleed fuel system with fuel priming pump button (1)
until air is vented.
5. Tighten air vent.
6. Operate engine and check for leaks.
2
MD04263,0000140 -19-20FEB09-1/1
3-3-6
020113
PN=108
Clean or Replace Air Cleaner Elements—Tier
3/Stage IIIA Engine
1. Open engine hood.
TX1035630A —UN—01FEB08
2. Remove air cleaner cover by releasing clips (1).
3. Remove primary element (2).
IMPORTANT: A damaged or dirty element may
cause engine damage.
Install a new primary element:
1. If the element shows damage.
2. If element will not clean.
3. After 1000 hours service or annually.
DO NOT clean a secondary element. Install a
new element carefully centering it in the canister.
4. Inspect element and gasket for damage. If air filter
restriction indicator is lit, see Inspecting and Cleaning
Dusty Secondary and Primary Element. (Section 4-1.)
NOTE: Air restriction indicator will not signal correctly if
an element has a break or is not correctly sealed
in air cleaner housing. Throw away element that
has the slightest damage. If gasket is broken
or missing, install a new element.
1— Clip (3 used)
2— Primary Element
3— Secondary Element
TX1035632A —UN—01FEB08
1. If the primary element is damaged and
needs to be replaced.
2. If the element is visibly dirty.
TX1035631A —UN—01FEB08
Install a new secondary element (3):
MD04263,000011E -19-07JUL09-1/1
3-3-7
020113
PN=109
Clean or Replace Air Cleaner Elements—Tier
2/Stage II Engine
T159080B —UN—04SEP02
2. Remove air cleaner cover by releasing clips (1).
3. Remove primary element (2).
Install a new primary element:
1. If the element shows damage.
2. If element will not clean.
4. Inspect element and gasket for damage. If air filter
restriction indicator is lit, See Inspecting and Cleaning
Dusty Secondary and Primary Element. (Section 4-1.)
1— Clip (3 used)
T159082B —UN—04SEP02
1. If the primary element is damaged and
2. If the element is visibly dirty.
T159081B —UN—04SEP02
Install a new secondary element (3):
MD04263,000011F -19-07JUL09-1/1
Grease MFWD Drive Shaft Splines—If
Equipped
Apply grease to lubrication fitting (1) until it escapes from
joint. See Grease. (Section 3-1.)
1— Lubrication Fitting
T125640B —UN—08NOV99
IMPORTANT: Lubricate daily when machine is used
in mud to minimize wear and corrosion.
CED,TX03768,2667 -19-09JUL09-1/1
3-3-8
020113
PN=110
Grease Non-Powered Front Wheel
Bearings—If Equipped
1. Remove plug and install lubrication fitting.
2. Grease with approximately five low pressure strokes
of grease. See Grease. (Section 3-1.)
3. Remove lubrication fitting and install plug.
T164479B —UN—27JAN03
IMPORTANT: Lubricate daily when machine is used
in mud to minimize wear and corrosion.
VD76477,00010F1 -19-09JUL09-1/1
3-3-9
020113
PN=111
Check Coolant
CAUTION: Explosive release of fluids from
pressurized cooling system can cause
serious burns.
Remove surge tank cap only when engine is
cold or when cool enough to touch with bare
hands. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
IMPORTANT: John Deere COOL-GARD™ II
Coolant Extender does not protect against
freezing. Coolant extender prevents rust,
scale, and liner cavitation.
TX1035875A —UN—01FEB08
NOTE: Check coolant every 1000 hours or 1 year,
or when replacing 1/3 or more of coolant. Add
coolant extender as necessary.
1. Remove surge tank cap (1) and test coolant solution.
Use one of the following kits to check coolant.
• 3-Way Heavy Duty Coolant Test Kit
TX1014056A —UN—25OCT06
•
Coolant test strips provide an effective method to
check freeze point and additive levels of engine
coolant. See your authorized dealer for 3-Way Heavy
Duty Coolant Test Kit and follow instructions on kit.
COOLSCAN PLUS™
For a more thorough evaluation of coolant, perform
COOLSCAN PLUS analysis, where available.
See your authorized dealer for information about
COOLSCAN PLUS.
2. Add John Deere COOL-GARD Coolant Extender
as necessary. Follow instructions on container for
amount.
Specification
Tier 3/Stage IIIA
Engine—Capacity.............................................................................. 25 L
6.6 gal
Tier 2/Stage II
5.5 gal
1— Surge Tank Cap
3. Install surge tank cap.
COOLSCAN PLUS is a trademark of Deere & Company
MD04263,0000350 -19-07MAY09-1/1
3-3-10
020113
PN=112
Check Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level
T163385B —UN—02JAN03
NOTE: Check hydraulic oil level with machine parked
on a level surface. Check before starting engine,
with backhoe and stabilizers in transport position,
and front loader bucket lowered to ground.
Check when oil is cool.
Sight glass decal has a scale for proper level of oil.
1. Stop engine. Allow time for hydraulic oil to cool.
2. Check oil level in sight glass (1). Oil level should be in
mid-range of decal.
1— Sight Glass
MD04263,0000142 -19-20FEB09-1/2
Adding Oil to the Hydraulic Reservoir
1. If oil is below operating range in ADD range, remove
fill cap (B) and add oil.
TX1035639A —UN—05FEB08
2. Install fill cap.
B—Fill Cap
T131716D —UN—13JUL00
MD04263,0000142 -19-20FEB09-2/2
3-4-1
020113
PN=113
Check Engine Oil Level
TX1035641A —UN—01FEB08
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible engine damage.
DO NOT run engine when oil level is
below the ADD mark.
The most accurate oil level reading is obtained when
engine is cold before operation.
1. Park machine on a level surface. Engage park brake.
TX1035651A —UN—01FEB08
2. Raise front loader boom and install loader boom
service lock.
3. Stop engine.
4. Fully open engine hood.
5. Remove engine oil dipstick (1) and check oil level.
AFTER THE ENGINE HAS BEEN RUN: Allow oil to
drain into oil pan for 10 minutes before checking the
oil level. Ten minutes after shutdown, oil level must
be above the ADD mark.
6. Remove engine oil fill cap (2) and add oil as necessary.
See Diesel Engine Oil. (Section 3-1.)
7. Check oil level and add oil as necessary.
1— Engine Oil Dipstick
2— Engine Oil Fill Cap
3
ADD
FULL
TX1035644 —UN—29JAN08
BEFORE THE ENGINE IS STARTED: Engine is full
when oil level is within cross-hatched area (3). It is
acceptable to run engine as long as oil level is above
the ADD mark.
3— Cross-Hatched Area
MD04263,0000143 -19-20FEB09-1/1
3-4-2
020113
PN=114
Check Coolant Level
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from hot
spraying coolant. Remove surge tank cap only
when cool enough to touch with bare hands.
Then loosen cap slowly to stop so pressure is
released from system before removing cap.
1. With engine cold, coolant level must be between MAX
COLD and MIN COLD marks on coolant surge tank (1).
2. If coolant is below MIN COLD mark, add coolant to
surge tank.
3. If surge tank is empty, check for leaks and repair as
necessary. Add coolant at surge tank cap. See Diesel
Engine Coolant. (Section 3-1.)
TX1035648A —UN—01FEB08
1— Coolant Surge Tank
TX1014056A —UN—25OCT06
MD04263,0000144 -19-20FEB09-1/1
3-4-3
020113
PN=115
Inspect Fuel Water Sediment Bowls
Inspect bowls for contaminants.
For draining procedure see Drain Water and Sediment
from Water Separators. (Section 3-3.)
TX1058014A —UN—03APR09
3— Primary Fuel Filter
Sediment Bowl
TX1058015A —UN—03APR09
1— Final Fuel Filter Sediment
Bowl
2— Auxiliary Fuel Filter
Sediment Bowl—If
Equipped
MB60223,00000ED -19-23APR09-1/1
3-4-4
020113
PN=116
Grease Loader Pivots
NOTE: Machines equipped with synthetic bushings
do not require lubrication.
TX1002222A —UN—06JAN06
Apply grease to lubrication fittings until it escapes from
joints. See Grease. (Section 3-1.)
TX1007733A —UN—16MAY06
6 Points—Left Side Shown
T132372B —UN—12SEP00
5 Points
VD76477,00010EC -19-10JUL09-1/1
3-4-5
020113
PN=117
Grease Multipurpose Bucket Pivots—If
Equipped
T132372C —UN—12SEP00
CED,OUO1079,581 -19-03JUN09-1/1
Grease Stabilizer Pivots and Cylinder Pins
T132374B —UN—13JUL00
4 points—Left Side Shown
OUO1079,000025C -19-16APR02-1/1
3-4-6
020113
PN=118
T131781C —UN—07NOV00
TX1057266A —UN—18MAR09
Grease Backhoe Boom, Crowd Cylinders and Pivots
3 Points—Optional Cab Shown
2 Points
TX1057269A —UN—18MAR09
3 Points—Right Side Shown
MD04263,00002F9 -19-18MAR09-1/1
3-4-7
020113
PN=119
Grease Backhoe Bucket Cylinder and Pivots
TX1081740A —UN—09SEP10
TX1082253A —UN—27SEP10
1 Point
6 Points - Right Side Shown
MD04263,00002FA -19-27SEP10-1/1
Grease Backhoe Swing Cylinder and Pivots
TX1059262A —UN—07MAY09
8 Points—Right Side Shown
MD04263,00003E3 -19-13MAY09-1/1
3-4-8
020113
PN=120
Grease Loader Quick Coupler—If Equipped
T206365A —UN—20DEC04
HG31779,000005F -19-20DEC06-1/1
Grease Non-Powered Front Axle Steering
Pivots—If Equipped
Apply grease to lubrication fittings on steering pivots until
it escapes from joints.
T163182B —UN—20DEC02
See Grease. (Section 3-1.)
MD04263,0000351 -19-16APR09-1/1
Grease MFWD Front Axle and Universal
Joints—If Equipped
T132373C —UN—17SEP02
joint.
HG31779,00001DA -19-24JAN03-1/1
3-4-9
020113
PN=121
Grease Backhoe Coupler Mechanical
Jack—If Equipped
TX1022469A —UN—23APR07
Apply grease to each lubrication fitting until it escapes
from the joint.
2 Points
MD04263,0000352 -19-03APR09-1/1
Grease Front Axle Pivot Pin
Apply two pumps of grease to lubrication fitting on right
side of frame to lubricate axle oscillating pivot.
TX1013841A —UN—19OCT06
1 Point
VD76477,0001116 -19-22JUL09-1/1
3-4-10
020113
PN=122
Check Transmission Oil Level
TX1035656A —UN—01FEB08
1. Run engine for 3 minutes to warm transmission oil.
Park machine on a level surface. Move transmission
control lever (TCL) to NEUTRAL. Engage park brake.
2. With engine running at slow idle, turn handle of
transmission dipstick (1) counterclockwise and
remove.
NOTE: Normal hot oil can be above full mark.
TX1035657A —UN—01FEB08
3. Check oil level on dipstick. If oil is not within
operating range, add oil through dipstick tube. See
Transmission, Axles, and Mechanical Front Wheel
Drive (MFWD) Oil. (Section 3-1.)
4. Install transmission dipstick and turn handle clockwise
to tighten.
1— Transmission Dipstick
MD04263,0000145 -19-07JUL09-1/1
Grease Backhoe Coupler Fittings—If
Equipped
TX1022471A —UN—23APR07
Apply grease to each lubrication fitting until it escapes
from the joint.
1 Point Each Side—Left Side Shown
MD04263,00003A9 -19-22APR09-1/1
3-5-1
020113
PN=123
Maintenance—Initial Service—250 Hours
Change Engine Break-In Oil and Replace
Filter
TX1035717A —UN—04FEB08
1. Run engine to warm oil. Park machine on a level
surface. Engage park brake. Stop engine.
2. Remove engine oil drain plug (1). Allow oil to drain
into a container.
TX1035718A —UN—01FEB08
3. Using a suitable filter wrench, turn engine oil filter
(2) counterclockwise and remove from base. Clean
mounting surfaces of base as necessary. Dispose of
waste oil properly.
4. Apply a thin film of oil to sealing ring on new engine
oil filter, and install by turning new filter clockwise by
hand until gasket touches mounting surface. Torque
an additional 1/2—3/4 turn with filter wrench.
5. Install engine oil drain plug.
6. Remove engine oil fill cap (3) and fill engine with oil to
specification. See Diesel Engine Oil. (Section 3-1.)
Specification
Engine Oil—Capacity........................................................................ 13 L
3.5 gal
TX1035731A —UN—01FEB08
IMPORTANT: Before starting engine after a filter
change, crank engine for 10 seconds without
starting to fill new engine oil filter and
pre-lubricate the turbocharger, if equipped.
7. Run engine for 2 minutes and then stop engine. Check
for leaks around drain plug and filter, and tighten as
necessary. Check oil level. See Check Engine Oil
Level. (Section 3-4.)
TX1035729A —UN—01FEB08
1— Engine Oil Drain Plug
2— Engine Oil Filter
MD04263,0000146 -19-07JUL09-1/1
3-6-1
020113
PN=124
Check MFWD Planetary Housing Oil—If
Equipped
1. Rotate housing until OIL LEVEL line (B) is horizontal
and fill plug (A) is above line as shown.
T105325 —UN—21NOV96
NOTE: If oil level is low, use HY-GARD™ oil to
fill to proper level.
2. Remove plug and check that oil is filled to bottom of
plug hole.
3. Add oil to plug hole if necessary. See Transmission,
Axles, and Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)
Oil. (Section 3-1.)
A—MFWD Planetary Housing
Oil Fill Plug
4. Install plug.
B—Oil Level Line
5. Repeat procedure for opposite side wheel.
VD76477,000127B -19-09JUL09-1/1
Check MFWD Axle Oil Level—If Equipped
NOTE: If oil level is low, use HY-GARD™ oil to
fill to proper level.
2. Add oil, as necessary, through plug hole. See
3. Install plug.
TX1002262A —UN—06JAN06
1. Remove plug (1) to check oil level. Oil should be filled
to bottom of plug.
1— Plug
VD76477,000127C -19-09JUL09-1/1
3-7-1
020113
PN=125
Check Battery Electrolyte Level and
Terminals
CAUTION: Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks
and flames away from batteries. Use a flashlight
to check battery electrolyte level.
NEVER check battery charge by placing
a metal object across the posts. Use a
voltmeter or hydrometer.
ALWAYS remove grounded (-) battery clamp
first and replace it last.
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is
poisonous. It is strong enough to burn skin,
eat holes in clothing, and cause blindness
if splashed into eyes.
Avoid the hazard by:
1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.
2. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves.
3. Avoiding breathing fumes when
electrolyte is added.
4. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte.
5. Use proper jump start procedure.
If you spill acid on yourself:
1. Flush your skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help
neutralize the acid.
3. Flush your eyes with water for 15—30 minutes.
Get medical attention immediately.
2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but
do not exceed 1.9 L (2 quarts).
3. Get medical attention immediately.
If acid is swallowed:
1. Remove battery box cover.
1. Do not induce vomiting.
3-7-2
TX,75,DH1574 -19-28APR93-1/3
020113
PN=126
2. Fill each cell to within specified range with distilled
water. DO NOT overfill.
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury. ALWAYS
remove grounded (—) battery clamp first
and replace it last.
T6996DB —UN—10FEB89
IMPORTANT: If water is added to batteries during
freezing weather, batteries must be charged
after water is added to prevent batteries from
freezing. Charge battery using a battery
charger or by running the engine.
3. Disconnect battery clamps, grounded clamp first.
C—Electrolyte Level Range
T6996DA —UN—10FEB89
A—Battery Post
B—Fill Tube
TX,75,DH1574 -19-28APR93-2/3
4. Clean battery terminals (A) and clamps with a stiff
brush.
5. Apply lubricating grease (B) around battery terminal
base only.
T6758AA —UN—21OCT88
6. Install and tighten clamps, grounded clamp last.
TX,75,DH1574 -19-28APR93-3/3
3-7-3
020113
PN=127
Check Rear Axle Oil Level
TX1021377A —UN—30MAR07
NOTE: If the backhoe has been run in high-speed
transport, wait 30 minutes for the axle oil level
to stabilize before checking oil.
1. Move machine onto level ground.
2. Remove rear axle oil level plug (1). Oil should run out
of plug hole if the oil level is correct.
3. If oil level is not correct, add oil as necessary. See
4. Install plug.
1— Rear Axle Oil Level Plug
VD76477,00014E9 -19-11APR07-1/1
Take Engine Oil Sample
MB60223,00000E5 -19-11MAR09-1/1
3-7-4
020113
PN=128
Check Air Intake Hose
1. Check engine air intake hose (A) for cracks and
replace as necessary.
TX1035788A —UN—01FEB08
2. Check for loose connections and tighten hose clamps
as necessary.
A—Engine Air Intake Hose
T132459B —UN—13JUL00
MD04263,0000147 -19-20FEB09-1/1
Check Boom-to-Dipperstick Pin Bolt Torque
Specification
Backhoe Boom-toDipperstick Pivot Pin
Bolt—Torque................................................................................620 N·m
460 lb-ft
A—Backhoe Boom-toDipperstick Pivot Pin Bolt
T133574B —UN—30AUG00
Check torque on the backhoe boom-to-dipperstick pivot
pin bolt (A). Torque the cap screw to specification.
CED,OUO1079,443 -19-14DEC06-1/1
3-8-1
020113
PN=129
Drain Fuel Tank Water and Sediment
TX1014055A —UN—25OCT06
CAUTION: Handle fuel carefully. If the engine
is hot or running, DO NOT drain fuel tank.
DO NOT smoke while draining fuel tank or
working on fuel system.
NOTE: To ensure that all of the water drains properly,
use the right stabilizer to lift the right rear
wheel off of the ground.
NOTE: Dispose of waste properly.
1. Loosen sediment drain plug (1) on front of fuel tank
and allow fuel to flow for several seconds.
1— Sediment Drain Plug
2. Tighten plug securely to stop fuel flow.
MD04263,000011D -19-18FEB09-1/1
3-8-2
020113
PN=130
Change Engine Oil and Replace Filter
IMPORTANT: If fuel sulfur content exceeds 0.5 percent,
change engine oil at 1/2 the normal interval.
TX1035717A —UN—04FEB08
1. Run engine to warm oil. Park machine on a level
surface. Engage park brake. Stop engine.
2. Remove engine oil drain plug (1). Allow oil to drain
into a container. Dispose of waste oil properly.
3. Using a suitable filter wrench, turn engine oil filter
(2) counterclockwise and remove from base. Clean
mounting surfaces of base as necessary.
4. Apply a thin film of oil to sealing ring on new filter, and
turn new filter clockwise by hand until gasket touches
mounting surface. Torque an additional 1/2—3/4 turn
with filter wrench.
TX1035718A —UN—01FEB08
5. Install engine oil drain plug.
6. Remove engine oil fill cap (3) and fill engine with oil to
specification. See Diesel Engine Oil. (Section 3-1.)
Install cap.
Specification
Engine Oil—Capacity........................................................................ 13 L
3.5 gal
IMPORTANT: Before starting engine after a filter
change, crank engine for 10 seconds without
starting to fill new engine oil filter and
pre-lubricate the turbocharger, if equipped.
TX1035729A —UN—01FEB08
1— Engine Oil Drain Plug
2— Engine Oil Filter
TX1035731A —UN—01FEB08
7. Run engine for 2 minutes and then stop engine. Check
for leaks around drain plug and filter, and tighten as
necessary. Check oil level. See Check Engine Oil
MD04263,0000148 -19-23FEB09-1/1
3-8-3
020113
PN=131
Replace Primary and Final Fuel Filters—Tier
3/Stage IIIA Engine
1. Thoroughly clean primary and final fuel filters, water
separator assembly, and surrounding area.
2. Turn retaining ring (1) counterclockwise and remove
primary fuel filter element (2).
3. Disconnect water-in-fuel sensor (9).
TX1036474A —UN—08FEB08
final fuel filter element (8).
5. Remove water separator bowl (3) from primary fuel
filter. Drain and clean separator bowl.
6. Install water separator bowl onto new primary fuel filter
element. Tighten securely.
NOTE: The fuel filter must be indexed properly and
the key on canister must be oriented in slot of
mounting base for correct installation.
7. Clean filter base (4) and thoroughly inspect filter base
seal ring. Replace as needed.
TX10022310A —UN—06JAN06
NOTE: Do not attempt to turn filter element into base.
8. Install new primary and final fuel elements by aligning
vertical locators (6) into slots (5) on filter base. Push
filter elements up firmly until filter snaps against base.
9. Turn retaining ring clockwise onto filter base until
retaining ring clicks tightly into place.
10. Connect water-in-fuel sensor.
11. To prime the fuel system turn the key switch to the ON
position and wait 60 seconds.
1— Retaining Ring
2— Primary Fuel Filter Element
3— Water Separator Bowl
4— Filter Base
5— Slots
6— Vertical Locators
7— Retaining Ring
8— Final Fuel Filter Element
9— Water-in-Fuel Sensor
10— Bleed Screw
MD04263,0000123 -19-18FEB09-1/1
3-8-4
020113
PN=132
Replace Fuel Filter—Tier 2/Stage II Engine
TX1002309A —UN—06JAN06
filter element (2). Allow sediment to drain into a
container.
2. Remove water separator assembly (3) from old filter
element. Drain and clean separator assembly. Install
assembly on new filter element.
3. Clean filter base (4).
NOTE: Do not attempt to turn filter element into base.
TX10022310A —UN—06JAN06
4. Install new fuel element by aligning vertical locators
(5) into slots (6) on filter base. Push filter element up
firmly until filter snaps against base.
5. Turn retaining ring clockwise into filter base until
retaining ring clicks tightly into place.
6. Loosen bleed screw (7) by turning knob
counterclockwise.
7. Operate primer lever (8) until fuel flow from bleed
screw is free of air bubbles.
NOTE: If there is no fuel flow, push primer lever toward
engine and turn crankshaft using starter motor to
reposition camshaft. Repeat step 7.
8. Tighten bleed screw.
1— Retaining Ring
2— Filter Element
3— Water Separator Assembly
4— Filter Base
5— Slots
6— Vertical Locators
7— Bleed Screw
8— Primer Lever
9. Push primer lever toward engine as far as possible.
MD04263,0000124 -19-20FEB09-1/1
Replace Auxiliary Water Separator Fuel
Filter—If Equipped
1
1— Priming Hand Pump
2— Air Vent
3— Filter Element
4— Glass Bowl
3
4
5
6
7
TX1054639 —UN—19JAN09
1. Place container under drain hose (6).
2. Loosen air vent (2) and drain valve (5). Drain water,
fuel, and sediment into container. Dispose of waste
properly.
3. Tighten drain valve.
4. Disconnect water-in-fuel (WIF) sensor (7).
5. Remove glass bowl (4).
6. Remove and replace filter element (3).
7. Install glass bowl.
8. Remove trapped air from fuel filter by using air vent
and priming hand pump (1).
9. Connect WIF sensor.
10. Start engine and let it run for 1 minute. Check for leaks.
11. If needed, tighten filter element and glass bowl only
enough to stop leaks.
2
5— Drain Valve
6— Drain Hose
7— Water-In-Fuel (WIF) Sensor
OU90V02,0000160 -19-07JUL09-1/1
3-8-5
020113
PN=133
Tube—Tier 2/Stage II Engine
Remove vent tube (A) and clean interior using diesel fuel.
T105323 —UN—21NOV96
A—Vent Tube
MD04263,0000127 -19-20FEB09-1/1
Tube—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
TX1035877A —UN—01FEB08
Remove vent tube (A) and clean interior using diesel fuel.
A—Vent Tube
MD04263,0000125 -19-20FEB09-1/1
Take Fluid Samples
See your authorized dealer for taking the following fluid
samples:
• Transmission Oil
• Rear Axle Oil
• Engine Coolant
• Diesel Fuel
• Hydraulic Oil
MD04263,000035C -19-15APR09-1/1
3-8-6
020113
PN=134
Clean, Pack, and Adjust Non-Powered Front Wheel Bearings—If Equipped
3
5
1
6
7
8
9
T158732 —UN—23AUG02
2
10
4
T158732
1— Seal Ring
2— Bearing Cone
3— Wheel Hub
4— O-Ring
5— Stud
6— Bearing Cone
7— Thrust Washer
8— Cap Screw (3 used)
9— Wheel Hub Cover
1. Raise machine and install jack stands so front wheels
are off ground.
CAUTION: Prevent injury from falling components.
Secure wheel hub (3) with a lift strap before
removing any components.
2. Remove wheel.
3. Remove wheel hub cover plug (10) and remove wheel
hub cover (9) using wedges. Remove and inspect
O-ring (4), replace if necessary.
10— Wheel Hub Cover Plug
8. Clean all dirt and grease from bearings, spindle and
hub assembly.
9. Inspect grease seals for damage or hardened lips and
10. Pack bearings and coat seal lips with John Deere
Multi-Purpose Grease or equivalent.
11. Install bearing cone (2) on spindle using a hammer
and driver.
12. Install wheel hub (3) on spindle.
4. Remove three cap screws (8) and thrust washer (7).
13. Install bearing cone (6) to hub and spindle.
5. Remove wheel bearing (6).
14. Apply TY9371 LOCTITE® to cap screws (8). Position
thrust washer (7) on spindle in hub and install cap
screws (8). Torque cap screws to specification.
6. Remove and inspect wheel hub (3) with bearing cups.
To replace bearing cups, place wheel hub on flat
surface and drive bearing cups out with a hammer and
driver.
IMPORTANT: Removing seal ring (1) will destroy it. Do
not remove seal ring unless damage is noted.
Specification
Thrust Plate Cap
Screws—Torque..........................................................................120 N·m
89 lb-ft
15. Grease and install O-ring (4) on wheel hub cover (9).
Drive wheel hub cover into wheel hub.
7. Remove bearing cone (2) using wedges.
3-9-1
MD04263,0000353 -19-03APR09-1/2
020113
PN=135
16. Install hub cover plug (10) and tighten to specification.
17. Install wheel and repeat process for other side.
Specification
Wheel Hub Cover
Plug—Torque.................................................................................15 N·m
133 lb-in
LOCTITE is a trademark of Loctite Corp.
MD04263,0000353 -19-03APR09-2/2
1. Open engine hood. Remove cap screws (A) and move
loader mast cover (B) aside. Take care not to damage
hose attached to bottom of windshield washer nozzle
(C).
2. Remove hydraulic reservoir breather (D).
NOTE: Avoid dripping hydraulic oil. Do not reroute
hydraulic reservoir breather hoses.
3. Install new hydraulic reservoir breather with arrow
pointing toward reservoir.
T132464B —UN—13JUL00
Replace Hydraulic Reservoir Breather
B—Loader Mast Cover
C—Windshield Washer Nozzle
D—Hydraulic Reservoir
Breather
T132462B —UN—13JUL00
4. Install loader mast cover and cap screws. Close
engine hood.
CED,OUO1079,582 -19-25AUG00-1/1
3-9-2
020113
PN=136
Replace Engine Air Cleaner Elements—Tier
3/Stage IIIA Engine
2. Unfasten clips (1) and remove air cleaner cover.
3. Slide primary element (2) and secondary element (3)
out to remove.
4. Clean inside of air cleaner and outlet tube.
5. Install new secondary element and primary element.
Ensure that each element is properly centered and
seated.
6. Install air cleaner cover. Fasten clips.
TX1035632A —UN—01FEB08
1— Clip (3 used)
TX1035631A —UN—01FEB08
1. Open hood.
TX1035630A —UN—01FEB08
Inspect elements when air filter restriction indicator lights.
MD04263,0000128 -19-09JUL09-1/1
3-9-3
020113
PN=137
Replace Engine Air Cleaner Elements—Tier
2/Stage II Engine
1. Open hood.
2. Unfasten clips (A) and remove air cleaner cover.
3. Slide primary element (B) and secondary element (C)
out to remove.
4. Clean inside of air cleaner and outlet tube.
5. Install new secondary element and primary element.
Ensure that each element is properly centered and
seated.
T133590B —UN—30AUG00
6. Install air cleaner cover with dust unloader valve
pointed down. Fasten clips.
C—Secondary Element
T133591B —UN—30AUG00
A—Clip (3 used)
B—Primary Element
T133589B —UN—30AUG00
Inspect elements when air filter restriction indicator lights.
MD04263,0000129 -19-09JUL09-1/1
Replace Cab Air Filters
1. Open latch (A) on inside of right-side window frame.
T132588B —UN—18JUL00
2. Remove fresh air filter cover (B) and fresh air filter.
3. Install new filter and filter cover.
4. Close latch.
A—Latch
B—Fresh Air Filter Cover
3-9-4
MB60223,00000EB -19-22APR09-1/2
020113
PN=138
Cab Recirculating Air Filter
1. Remove cab recirculating air filter cover (C) and cab
recirculating air filter.
T132838B —UN—24JUL00
2. Install new filter and filter cover.
C—Cab Recirculating Air Filter
Cover
MB60223,00000EB -19-22APR09-2/2
Inspect Belt
TX1035793A —UN—01FEB08
Inspect serpentine belt (A) for wear and damage. See
your authorized dealer for replacement.
T132357B —UN—13JUL00
A—Serpentine Belt
MD04263,0000120 -19-18FEB09-1/1
3-9-5
020113
PN=139
Replace Hydraulic Oil Filter
1. Turn hydraulic oil filter (A) counterclockwise and
remove.
2. Apply film of oil to sealing ring on new hydraulic oil
filter and install. Turn hydraulic oil filter clockwise until
sealing ring touches mounting surface, then tighten an
additional 3/4-to-one turn with a suitable filter wrench.
3. Check hydraulic oil level.
4. Start engine and run for 2 minutes to allow hydraulic oil
filter to fill with oil and to purge air from charge circuit.
T134790B —UN—24OCT00
5. Stop engine and check hydraulic oil level. See Check
Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level. (Section 3-4.)
6. Check for leakage around hydraulic filter. Tighten just
enough to stop leaks, if necessary.
A—Hydraulic Oil Filter
Hydraulic Oil Filter
VD76477,000131A -19-01NOV10-1/1
Replace Fuel Breather
TX1058589A —UN—21APR09
2. Pull fuel breather (1) off hose.
3. Install new fuel breather with arrow on breather
pointing toward hose.
1— Fuel Breather
TX1015463A —UN—29NOV06
MD04263,0000138 -19-21APR09-1/1
3-9-6
020113
PN=140
Change Transmission Oil and Replace Filter
NOTE: Only approximately 8.0—8.5 L of oil will drain.
TX1002312A —UN—09JAN06
It is intended that the remainder of oil will remain
in the cooler and torque converter.
1. Remove transmission drain plug (1) from bottom of
transmission and drain oil into suitable container.
Dispose of waste properly.
Specification
Powershift Transmission
Oil—Capacity.................................................................................... 15 L
4.0 gal
2. Install drain plug.
3. Turn transmission filter (2) counterclockwise and
remove.
TX1002248 —UN—06JAN06
4. Apply film of oil to sealing ring on new transmission oil
filter and install. Turn filter clockwise until sealing ring
touches mounting surface, then tighten an additional
3/4-to-one turn with a suitable filter wrench.
5. Turn handle of transmission dipstick (3)
counterclockwise and remove. Fill transmission with
oil through dipstick tube. See Transmission, Axles,
and Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Oil.
(Section 3-1.)
6. Start engine and run for 3 minutes to purge air from
charge circuit.
With engine running at slow idle, remove transmission
dipstick. Check transmission oil level and add oil
through dipstick tube as necessary. See Transmission,
Axles, and Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)
Oil. (Section 3-1.)
TX1035778A —UN—01FEB08
7.
8. Install transmission dipstick and turn handle clockwise
to tighten.
3— Transmission Dipstick
TX1004024A —UN—21FEB06
1— Transmission Drain Plug
2— Transmission Filter
VD76477,00010F0 -19-29MAY09-1/1
3-9-7
020113
PN=141
Check Coolant
See Check Coolant in Maintenance—As Required.
(Section 3-3.)
MD04263,0000170 -19-14SEP09-1/1
3-9-8
020113
PN=142
Adjust Engine Valve Lash (Clearance)
TX03679,00017DD -19-08MAY01-1/1
Change Hydraulic Reservoir Oil
1. Park machine on a level surface.
TX1035639A —UN—05FEB08
2. Move backhoe and stabilizers to transport position and
lower loader bucket to ground. Stop engine.
3. Remove hydraulic reservoir fill cap (B).
4. Remove cap screw (C) and bracket (D). Route drain
hose (E) into a suitable container.
5. Remove cap (F) from end of drain hose and drain oil.
Allow adequate time for oil to drain. Dispose of waste
oil properly.
Specification
Hydraulic Reservoir
Oil—Capacity.................................................................................... 39 L
10.3 gal
T131716D —UN—13JUL00
6. Replace hydraulic oil filter. See Replace Hydraulic Oil
Filter. (Section 3-9.)
7. Install cap on drain hose.
8. Route drain hose for storage. Install bracket and cap
screw.
9. Refill hydraulic reservoir. See Transmission, Axles,
and Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Oil.
(Section 3-1.)
10. Check oil level.
11. Install hydraulic reservoir fill cap.
E—Drain Hose
F— Cap
T134809B —UN—14FEB12
B—Hydraulic Reservoir Fill Cap
C—Cap Screw
D—Bracket
MB60223,0000010 -19-10MAR09-1/1
3-10-1
020113
PN=143
Change MFWD Planetary Housing Oil—If
Equipped
T7371AP —UN—02OCT90
1. Rotate wheel so drain plug (A) is at its lowest point,
remove plug and drain oil. Dispose of waste oil
properly.
Specification
MFWD Front Wheel
Planetary Housing
Oil—Capacity...................................................................................... 1 L
1 qt
3. Rotate wheel so plug (A) is above OIL LEVEL line (B)
when line is horizontal.
A—Plug
T105325 —UN—21NOV96
4. Add oil to bottom of fill plug hole and install plug. See
B—Oil Level Line
MB60223,00000E3 -19-10MAR09-1/1
Change MFWD Front Axle Housing Oil—If
Equipped
NOTE: Dispose of drain oil properly.
TX1002311A —UN—06JAN06
MFWD axle housing is filled with HY-GARD™
gear oil at the factory. Fill MFWD axle housing
with HY-GARD oil to fill to proper level.
1. Remove drain plug (1) to drain oil. Dispose of waste
oil properly.
Specification
MFWD Front Axle
Housing Oil—Capacity..................................................................... 6.5 L
1.7 gal
1— Drain Plug
2— Fill Plug
3. Remove fill plug (2) and add oil so it is level with
bottom of fill plug hole. See Transmission, Axles, and
Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Oil. (Section
3-1.)
4.
Install fill plug.
VD76477,0001280 -19-09JUL09-1/1
3-10-2
020113
PN=144
Change Rear Axle and Planetary Housing Oil
NOTE: Dispose of waste oil properly.
TX1003130A —UN—21FEB06
1. Drain rear axle and both planetary housings oil into a
container using drain plugs (1 and 2). Install plugs.
Specification
Rear Axle and Planetary
Housing Oil—Capacity...................................................................... 18 L
4.8 gal
2. Rotate wheel so plug (2) is above OIL LEVEL line (3)
when line is horizontal as shown.
3. Remove rear axle check and fill plug (4) and fill with
oil until level with bottom of fill plug hole. See Check
Rear Axle Oil Level. (Section 3-7.)
Rear Axle Drain and Fill Plugs
NOTE: It will take approximately 5 minutes for oil to
settle into outer housing when oil is warm.
TX1002260A —UN—06JAN06
4. Wait 5-10 minutes for oil to settle, then check level
again and add oil as necessary. If oil is cold, settle
time may increase.
5. Install all plugs.
1— Rear Axle Drain Plug
2— Planetary Housing Drain
and Fill Plug
3— Planetary Housing Oil Level
Line
4— Rear Axle Check and Fill
Plug
Planetary Drain and Fill Plug
VD76477,000113F -19-01NOV10-1/1
3-10-3
020113
PN=145
Inspect and Clean Hydraulic Reservoir Fill
Screen
1. Remove hydraulic reservoir fill cap (1) from fill tube.
TX1036006A —UN—04FEB08
2. Remove retaining clip and hydraulic reservoir fill
screen from fill tube.
3. Inspect hydraulic reservoir fill screen and clean as
necessary.
4. Install hydraulic reservoir fill screen and retaining clip
in fill tube.
5. Install hydraulic reservoir fill cap in fill tube.
TX1035714A —UN—01FEB08
1— Hydraulic Reservoir Fill Cap
MD04263,000011C -19-20FEB09-1/1
3-10-4
020113
PN=146
TX1002480A —UN—10JAN06
Draining the Cooling System—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
NOTE: Drain and flush cooling system every 6000 hours
using clean water, and refill with new coolant.
Specification
Cooling System—Tier
3/Stage IIIA
6.6 gal
1. Open air bleed plug (3) on thermal bypass valve
assembly until cross drill in plug is visible.
2. Open valve (4) on bottom of radiator 3 turns.
3. Connect a hose to radiator drain valve (1) on radiator.
4. Turn radiator drain valve counterclockwise to open
valve. Allow coolant to drain into a container. Dispose
of waste properly.
TX1035823A —UN—01FEB08
Shut off engine. Remove filler cap only
Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before
removing completely.
TX1002481A —UN—10JAN06
serious burns.
5. Connect a hose to engine block coolant drain valve (2).
7. Turn both drain valves clockwise to close valves and
remove hoses.
8. Close the air bleed plug and valve on bottom of radiator.
1— Radiator Drain Valve
2— Engine Block Coolant Drain
Valve
3— Air Bleed Plug
4— Valve
TX1035800A —UN—05FEB08
6. Turn engine block coolant drain valve counterclockwise
to open valve. Allow coolant to drain into a container.
MD04263,0000175 -19-22APR09-1/1
3-11-1
020113
PN=147
TX1002480A —UN—10JAN06
Draining the Cooling System—Tier 2/Stage II Engine
NOTE: Drain and flush cooling system every 6000 hours
using clean water, and refill with new coolant.
Specification
2/Stage II
5.5 gal
3. Connect a hose to radiator drain valve (1) on radiator.
4. Turn radiator drain valve counterclockwise to open
valve. Allow coolant to drain into a container. Dispose
of waste properly.
TX1014135A —UN—17NOV06
Shut off engine. Remove filler cap only
Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before
removing completely.
TX1002481A —UN—10JAN06
serious burns.
5. Connect a hose to engine block coolant drain valve (2).
7. Turn both drain valves clockwise to close valves and
remove hoses.
8. Close the air bleed plug and valve on bottom of radiator.
1— Radiator Drain Valve
2— Engine Block Coolant Drain
Valve
3— Air Bleed Plug
4— Valve
5— Surge Tank Cap
TX1014137A —UN—26OCT06
6. Turn engine block coolant drain valve counterclockwise
to open valve. Allow coolant to drain into a container.
MD04263,0000176 -19-22APR09-1/1
3-11-2
020113
PN=148
spraying fluid. DO NOT remove surge tank
cap unless the engine is cool. Release all
pressure before removing cap.
Specification
3/Stage IIIA
6.6 gal
Filling the Cooling System—Tier 3/Stage IIIA
Engine
3. Remove surge tank cap (5). Fill tank until coolant
stays between MIN COLD and MAX COLD marks.
4. Close valve and air bleed plug.
5. Run tractor at 1200 rpm for 2 minutes and top off
coolant.
6. Close surge tank cap.
TX1035823A —UN—01FEB08
NOTE: All machines are shipped from the factory
with a 50-50 mixture for protection to —34°C
(—30°F). Adjust mixture accordingly to provide
freeze protection for your machine.
FREEZING TEMPERATURES: Fill with permanent-type
low silicate, ethylene glycol antifreeze (without stop-leak
additive) and clean, soft water. Add TY26603 coolant
extender as required per COOL-GARD™ II test strips.
5— Surge Tank Cap
TX1035828A —UN—01FEB08
3— Air Bleed Plug
4— Valve
TX1035800A —UN—05FEB08
IMPORTANT: Use only permanent-type low silicate,
ethylene glycol base antifreeze in coolant
solution. Other types of antifreeze may
damage cylinder seals.
MD04263,0000177 -19-07JUL09-1/1
3-11-3
020113
PN=149
Filling the Cooling System—Tier 2/Stage II
Engine
spraying fluid. DO NOT remove surge tank
cap unless the engine is cool. Release all
pressure before removing cap.
Specification
2/Stage II
5.5 gal
TX1014135A —UN—17NOV06
3. Remove surge tank cap (5). Fill tank until coolant
stays between MIN COLD and MAX COLD marks.
4. Close valve and air bleed plug.
5. Run tractor at 1200 rpm for 2 minutes and top off
coolant.
6. Close surge tank cap.
TX1014137A —UN—26OCT06
IMPORTANT: Use only permanent-type low silicate,
ethylene glycol base antifreeze in coolant
solution. Other types of antifreeze may
damage cylinder seals.
NOTE: All machines are shipped from the factory
with a 50-50 mixture for protection to —34°C
(—30°F). Adjust mixture accordingly to provide
freeze protection for your machine.
FREEZING TEMPERATURES: Fill with permanent-type
low silicate, ethylene glycol antifreeze (without stop-leak
additive) and clean, soft water. Add TY26603 coolant
extender as required per COOL-GARD™ II test strips.
3— Air Bleed Plug
4— Valve
5— Surge Tank Cap
MD04263,0000178 -19-09JUL09-1/1
3-11-4
020113
PN=150
External Service Brake Inspection
Do first inspection at 5000 hours followed by 1000 hour
inspection intervals after the first 5000 hour inspection.
TX1002474A —UN—10JAN06
If the service brakes are subjected to severe duty, inspect
more frequently.
1. Inspect brakes for wear through the external inspection
ports (1 and 2).
2. Remove axle housing and replace brake disc if oil
grooves (3) on facing material are no longer visible.
3— Oil Groove
TX1002475A —UN—10JAN06
Right Rear Wheel External Inspection Port
Left Rear Wheel External Inspection Port
3
TX1002476A —UN—10JAN06
1— Right Rear Wheel External
Inspection Port
2— Left Rear Wheel External
Inspection Port
Oil Groove
VD76477,0001222 -19-05NOV10-1/1
4-1-1
020113
PN=151
Check and Adjust Backhoe Boom Lock
Checking Boom Lock Operation
TX1002083 —UN—06JAN06
1. Operate the boom lock lever repeatedly to verify
proper operation.
2. If boom lock is out of adjustment, adjust per procedure.
Adjusting the Boom Lock
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to lock system, adjust
lock so it is able to pass through full range
of motion. Lock must completely clear boom
hook (1) when boom lock lever is pulled, and
go down to stop (2) when lever is released with
boom moved away from latch area.
Perform the following adjustment for both the left and right
boom locks:
Right Side Shown
1— Boom Hook (2 used)
2— Stop (4 used)
3— Pin (2 used)
4— Yoke (2 used)
5— Jam Nut (2 used)
NOTE: Boom lock is not shim adjustable.
1. Start machine and lower stabilizers.
6. Remove pin (3) and spring from boom lock.
2. Move boom in slightly towards machine to relieve
tension on boom lock.
7. Adjust position of yoke (4) so when the boom lock
control lever is at rest, yoke is aligned with pin
mounting hole.
3. Pull in on boom lock lever. While moving boom away
from machine, verify boom locks completely clear
boom hooks (1).
8. Tighten jam nut (5) to hold yoke in adjusted position.
4. Once boom is away from latch area, verify locks
contact stops (2) on both sides of machine when boom
lock lever is released.
10. Repeat yoke adjust procedure on opposite side of
machine.
5. Move boom back into transport position. Stop the
engine.
9. Install pin.
11. Check boom lock operation per procedure to verify
proper operation.
MD04263,000034E -19-03APR09-1/1
4-1-2
020113
PN=152
Inspecting and Cleaning Dusty Secondary
and Primary Element
T90684 —UN—10NOV88
Install new elements:
• If the element shows damage and
• If element is visibly dirty and will not clean.
• After 1000 hours service or annually.
T47764 —UN—09NOV88
1. Tap element with the palm of your hand, NOT ON A
HARD SURFACE.
CAUTION: Reduce compressed air to less than
210 kPa (2.1 bar) (30 psi) when using for cleaning
purposes. Clear area of bystanders, guard
against flying chips, and wear personal protection
equipment including eye protection.
2. If this does not remove dust, use compressed air
under 210 kPa (2.1 bar) (30 psi).
3. Direct air up and down the pleats from inside to
outside. Be careful not to make a break in the element.
TX03679,00017E3 -19-08FEB07-1/1
Check Receiver-Dryer—If Equipped
T158049B —UN—26JUL02
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible compressor damage.
If moisture sight glass color indicates wet
(pink), dryer is saturated and should be changed
within the next 100 machine hours to prevent
further buildup of moisture in refrigerant.
1. Open hood.
2. Check color in moisture sight glass (A). Color should
be blue, indicating that refrigerant is dry.
3. Check air bubble sight glass (B) for air bubbles. No air
bubbles, or few air bubbles, should be visible.
4. If moisture sight glass shows wet (pink), or if excessive
air bubbles are visible, see your authorized dealer
within the next 100 machine hours to service the
receiver-dryer.
A—Moisture Sight Glass
B—Air Bubble Sight Glass
HG31779,00000BF -19-26JUL02-1/1
4-1-3
020113
PN=153
Checking Coolant Hoses and Radiator
TX1035770A —UN—01FEB08
Check upper radiator hose (1) and lower radiator hose (2)
for cracks and leaks. Tighten hose clamps at each end of
hoses as necessary.
Check radiator for dirt, damage, leaks, and loose or
broken mountings. Clean radiator fins.
2— Lower Radiator Hose
TX1002477A —UN—10JAN06
TX1035798A —UN—04FEB08
TX1014134A —UN—26OCT06
1— Upper Radiator Hose
MD04263,0000149 -19-20FEB09-1/1
4-1-4
020113
PN=154
Do Not Service or Adjust Injection Nozzles
or Injection Pump
If injection nozzles are not working correctly or are dirty,
the engine will not run normally. See your authorized
dealer for service.
Changing the injection pump in any way not approved by
the manufacturer will end the warranty. See your copy of
the John Deere warranty on this machine.
Do not service an injection pump that is not operating
correctly. See your authorized injection pump service
center.
TX,90,FF3116 -19-03NOV08-1/1
Precautions for Alternator and Regulator
When batteries are connected, follow these rules:
1. Disconnect negative (—) battery cable when you work
on or near alternator or regulator.
6. Connect batteries or a booster battery in the correct
polarity (positive [+] to positive [+] and negative [—] to
negative [—]).
2. DO NOT TRY TO POLARIZE ALTERNATOR OR
REGULATOR.
7. Do not disconnect the batteries when engine is
running and alternator is charging.
3. Ensure alternator wires are correctly connected
BEFORE you connect batteries.
8. Disconnect battery cables before you connect battery
charger to the batteries.
4. Do not ground alternator output terminal.
5. Do not disconnect or connect any alternator or
regulator wires while batteries are connected or while
alternator is operating.
T82,EXMA,I -19-16JAN08-1/1
4-1-5
020113
PN=155
Using Battery Charger
battery. Do not charge a battery if the battery
is frozen or it may explode. Warm battery to
16°C (60°F) before charging.
Turn off charger before connecting or
disconnecting it.
IMPORTANT: Do not use battery charger as a
booster if a battery has a 1.150 specific
gravity reading or lower.
Prevent Battery Explosions
Disconnect battery ground (-) clamp before
you charge batteries in the machine to prevent
damage to electrical components.
A battery charger may be used as a booster to start engine.
Ventilate the area where batteries are being charged.
N36890 —UN—07OCT88
Stop or cut back charging rate if battery case feels hot,
or is venting electrolyte. Battery temperature must not
exceed 52°C (125°F).
Charger
OUT4001,0000239 -19-03JAN12-1/1
Using Booster Batteries—12-Volt System
Before boost starting, machine must be properly shut
down to prevent unexpected machine movement when
engine starts.
battery. An explosive gas is produced while
batteries are in use or being charged. Keep flames
or sparks away from the battery area. Make sure
the batteries are charged in a well ventilated area.
IMPORTANT: The machine electrical system is
a 12-volt negative (-) ground. Use only
12-volt booster batteries.
1. Connect one end of the positive cable to the positive
terminal of the machine batteries and the other end to
the positive terminal of the booster batteries.
2. Connect one end of the negative cable to the negative
terminal of the booster batteries. Connect other end
of the negative cable to the machine as far away from
the machine batteries as possible.
3. Start engine.
4. Immediately after starting engine disconnect end of
the negative cable from the machine. Then disconnect
the other end of the negative cable from the negative
terminal of the booster batteries.
5. Disconnect positive cable from booster batteries and
machine batteries.
OUT4001,00000E1 -19-02JUL09-1/1
4-1-6
020113
PN=156
Handling, Checking and Servicing Batteries
Carefully
CAUTION: Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks
and flames away from batteries. Use a flashlight
to check battery electrolyte level.
Never check battery charge by placing
a metal object across the posts. Use a
voltmeter or hydrometer.
Always remove grounded (-) battery clamp
first and replace it last.
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is
poisonous. It is strong enough to burn skin,
eat holes in clothing, and cause blindness
if splashed into eyes.
Avoid the hazard by:
1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.
2. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves.
3. Avoiding breathing fumes when
electrolyte is added.
4. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte.
5. Use proper jump start procedure.
If you spill acid on yourself:
1. Flush your skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help
neutralize the acid.
3. Flush your eyes with water for 15—30 minutes.
Get medical attention immediately.
If acid is swallowed:
1. Do not induce vomiting.
2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but
do not exceed 1.9 L (2 qt).
3. Get medical attention immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
If electrolyte spills on the floor, use one of the following
mixtures to neutralize the acid: 0.5 kg (1 lb) baking soda
in 4 L (1 gal) water, or 0.47 L (1 pt) household ammonia in
4 L (1 gal) water.
IMPORTANT: Do not overfill the battery cells.
Check the specific gravity of electrolyte in each battery cell.
4-1-7
TX03679,0001788 -19-29APR11-1/2
020113
PN=157
See your authorized dealer for JT05460
SERVICEGARD™ battery and coolant tester. Follow
directions included with the tester.
T85402 —UN—10NOV88
A fully charged battery will have a corrected specific
gravity reading of 1.260. If the reading is below 1.200,
charge the battery.
Battery And Coolant Tester
SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
TX03679,0001788 -19-29APR11-2/2
Replacing Batteries
Your machine may be equipped with one or two 12-volt
hybrid batteries with (—) negative ground. Use only
batteries meeting following specifications:
Volts
BCI Group
-18°C (0°F)
-29°C
(-20°F)
Reserve
Capacity
(minutes at
25 amps)
12
31
750
600
150
Cold Cranking Amps
TX,90,BG212 -19-07JUL09-1/1
4-1-8
020113
PN=158
Removing Batteries
NOTE: Check for worn or frayed wires and loose
or corroded connections.
T132012C —UN—14JUL00
NOTE: The toolbox must be removed to access the battery
box. Always empty the toolbox before lifting it.
1. Remove cap screws (A) and lift toolbox out of battery
box.
2. Disconnect negative (—) battery cables first, then
positive (+) cables.
3. Remove nuts, washers, and hold-down brackets (B).
4. Lift batteries out of battery box.
B—Hold-Down Bracket (1 or 2
used)
T158046B —UN—26JUL02
Optional Dual-Battery Configuration Shown
HG31779,00000BD -19-07JUL09-1/1
JDLink™ Machine Monitoring System
(MMS)—If Equipped
and forestry equipment is being used, as well as critical
machine health data and service status.
JDLink™ is an equipment monitoring and information
delivery system. JDLink™ automatically collects and
manages information about where and how construction
For more information, see your authorized dealer or visit
www.deere.com (browse to Construction, Services and
Support, JDLink™).
JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company
VD76477,0001541 -19-20JUL12-1/1
Replacing Fuses
TX1013959A —UN—26OCT06
The fuse block is located to the right of the operator's seat
below the loader control lever.
4-1-9
MD04263,000014C -19-10DEC10-1/5
020113
PN=159
A
F44
F12
F40
F13
F41
F10
F42
F11
F45
A
F46
F15
F47
K6
F30
F35
K9
F31
F36
B
K2
A
A
TX1035704 —UN—30JAN08
F48
TX1035704
Fuse Panel—Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine
A—Spare
B—Diagnostic Connector
F10— Key Switch Fuse
F11— Radio—Power Port Fuse
(unswitched)
F12— Horn-Stop Lamp Fuse
F13— Flex Load Controller
(FLC)-Flex Hydraulic
Controller (FHC)-Flasher
Fuse (unswitched)
F15— Monitor-Service
ADVISOR™ Fuse
F30— Monitor-Flex Load
Controller (FLC)-Flex
Hydraulic Controller (FHC)
(Sswitched) Fuse
F31— Air Seat-Start Aid Fuse
F35— Park Brake-Pump-MFWD
Fuse
F36— Transmission Control Fuse
F40— Docking-Front Work Lights
Fuse
F41— Front Drive-Tail-Beacon
Lights Fuse
F42— Rear Work Lights Fuse
F44— Blower Fuse
F45— Dome-Radio-Power Port
Fuse
F46— RTD-ALT-Excitation Fuse
F47— Aux Function Power
Connectors Fuse
F48— Wipers-Washer Fuse
K2—Ignition Relay
K6—Transmission Relay
K9—Fuel Pump Lift Relay
Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company
4-1-10
MD04263,000014C -19-10DEC10-2/5
020113
PN=160
A
F44
F12
F40
F13
F41
F10
F42
F11
F45
A
F46
F15
F47
K6
F30
F35
A
F31
F36
B
K2
A
TX1014514 —UN—28NOV06
A
F48
TX1014514
Fuse Panel—Tier 2/Stage II Engine
A—Spare
B—Diagnostic Connector
F10— Key Switch Fuse
F11— Radio—Power Port Fuse
(Unswitched)
F12— Horn-Stop Lamp Fuse
F13— Flex Load Controller
(FLC)-Flex Hydraulic
Controller (FHC)-Flasher
Fuse (Unswitched)
F15— Monitor-Service
ADVISOR™ Fuse
F30— Monitor-Flex Load
Controller (FLC)-Flex
Hydraulic Controller (FHC)
(Switched) Fuse
F31— Air Seat-Start Aid Fuse
F35— Park Brake-Pump-MFWD
Fuse
F36— Transmission Control Fuse
F40— Docking-Front Work Lights
Fuse
F41— Front Drive-Tail-Beacon
Lights Fuse
F42— Rear Work Lights Fuse
F44— Blower Fuse
F45— Dome-Radio-Power Port
Fuse
F46— RTD-ALT-Excitation Fuse
F47— Aux Function Power
Connectors-Water In Fuel
(WIF) (If Equipped) Fuse
F48— Wipers-Washer Fuse
K2—Ignition Relay
K6—Transmission Relay
Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company
4-1-11
MD04263,000014C -19-10DEC10-3/5
020113
PN=161
F50— JDLink ™ Unswitched
Power 7.5A Fuse
F51— JDLink ™ Switched
Power 3A Fuse
F52— JDLink ™ Ground 7.5A
Fuse
F53— JDLink ™ Alternator Run
Signal 3A Fuse
F50
F53
TX1027209 —UN—02AUG07
F51 F52
JDLink™ Fuse Locations—If Equipped
JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company
4-1-12
MD04263,000014C -19-10DEC10-4/5
020113
PN=162
Engine Control Unit (ECU) Fuse
NOTE: The ECU fuse on Tier 3/Stage IIIA engines is a
20A fuse. On Tier 2/Stage II engines it is a 10A fuse.
TX1035854A —UN—01FEB08
ECU fuse (1) is located on the left-hand side of engine.
1— Engine Control Unit (ECU)
Fuse
TX1002532A —UN—12JAN06
MD04263,000014C -19-10DEC10-5/5
Remove and Install Halogen Bulb
1. Remove screws (1), cover (2), lamp (3), and lamp
housing (5).
TX1002234A —UN—07JAN06
2. Disconnect wiring lead and release retainer clip to
remove bulb (4).
IMPORTANT: Do not touch the halogen bulb with bare
hands. Oil and moisture may cause premature
bulb failure. Clean bulb glass if touched,
using an oil-free cloth with alcohol.
3. Install new bulb, lamp and assemble housing.
Lamp (exploded view)
1— Screw (4 used)
2— Lamp Cover
3— Lamp
4— Bulb
5— Lamp Housing
VD76477,00010D3 -19-05NOV10-1/1
4-1-13
020113
PN=163
Checking Starting System
TX1002514A —UN—10JAN06
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury or death. DO
NOT attempt to start machine unless you are
sitting in operator’s seat. DO NOT bypass or
disable any of the starting system parts.
Set park brake before attempting to start engine.
2. Operator's seat facing forward (loader position) and
locked.
3. Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 1st gear
forward (1F).
1— Transmission control lever
(TCL)
4. Apply service brakes.
5. Start the engine.
6. Display will show Release Park Brake. Display will
not show F, forward, or R, reverse, until TCL is cycled
back to neutral and park brake is released.
NOTE: The engine will start with the TCL in forward, F,
or reverse, R, but the controller will automatically
shift the transmission to neutral (N).
VD76477,0001146 -19-13JUL09-1/1
Fluid Sampling Test Ports—If Equipped
TX1036119A —UN—05FEB08
3— Transmission Oil Sample
Port
4— Coolant Sample Port
Located Under Cab Door
TX1036120A —UN—05FEB08
1— Hydraulic Oil Sample Port
2— Engine Oil Sample Port
Right Side of Engine
4-1-14
MD04263,000014D -19-20FEB09-1/2
020113
PN=164
The fluid sampling ports are located on the right side of
the engine.
3— Transmission Oil Sample
Port
4— Coolant Sample Port
TX1002648A —UN—19JAN06
1— Hydraulic Oil Sample Port
2— Engine Oil Sample Port
MD04263,000014D -19-20FEB09-2/2
Changing Loader Buckets
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury from falling
hardware. Bucket cylinder and links will fall
forward if bucket is in dig position when pins
are removed. Remove pins only when bucket
is on ground in full dump position.
1. Position bucket as shown.
2. Attach a hoist to cylinder (5).
3. Remove pin (1) and rotate pivot links (2) to rear
against cross tube (3).
4. Remove pin (4) and carefully lay cylinder on cross tube.
5. Tie pivot links to the cross tube.
TX1015068A —UN—14NOV06
CAUTION: Bucket is heavy and can cause
injury if not moved properly. Use adequate
lifting device to move bucket.
6. Remove retaining hardware, pins (6) and bucket.
7. Position new bucket in dump position. Install pins (6).
8. Untie pivot links from cross tube. Remove hoist from
cylinder.
9. Connect pivot links and cylinder using previously
removed pins (1 and 4) and retaining hardware.
1— Pin
2— Pivot Link (2 used)
3— Cross Tube
4— Pin
5— Cylinder
6— Pin (2 used)
VD76477,000129C -19-07JUL09-1/1
4-1-15
020113
PN=165
Adding Front Counterweights
TX1003042A —UN—24JAN06
CAUTION: Counterweights are heavy and
can cause serious injury if dropped. Ensure
counterweights are properly supported
with a forklift or other adequate lifting
device before removing.
Install front counterweights for added stability as
necessary.
1. Support counterweights with a forklift before adding or
removing weights. Insert forklift tines in slots (1).
2. Remove cap screws (2).
1— Slot (2 used)
3. Remove or add counterweight (3) as necessary.
3— Counterweight
4. Install cap screws.
VD76477,00012A1 -19-09JUL09-1/1
Reversing Stabilizer Feet
Use rubber pad side (A) of stabilizer foot when operating
on paved surface to prevent damaging work area.
Use cleat side (B) of stabilizer foot when operating in dirt
to prevent slipping.
To change foot surface, remove pin (C), rotate foot 180° to
opposite surface, and install pin to keep foot from turning
back around.
C—Pin
T8214AO —UN—27APR94
A—Rubber Pad Side
B—Cleat Side
VD76477,00010D4 -19-16OCT06-1/1
4-1-16
020113
PN=166
Adding Liquid Ballast to Front Tires
See Tire Inflation Pressures. (Section 3-3.)
Weights given are for front tires 75 percent full of water or
a 1.6 kg (3.5 lb) per liter (gallon) of water calcium chloride
(CaCl2) solution.
NOTE: Approximately 1.6 kg (3.5 lb) CaCl2 per liter
(gallon) of water will stay slush free to —24°C
(—12°F) and will freeze solid at —47°C (—52°F).
Water Only
Water/CaCl2 Solution
Volume
Weight
Volume
Weight
Total Weight Per
Tire
11L-15
53 L
14 gal
53 kg
117 lb
45 L
12 gal
19 kg
42 lb
64 kg
141 lb
11L-16
57 L
15 gal
57 kg
126 lb
49 L
13 gal
21 kg
46 lb
70 kg
154 lb
12-16.5
57 L
15 gal
57 kg
126 lb
49 L
13 gal
21 kg
46 lb
70 kg
154 lb
12.5/80-18
83 L
22 gal
83 kg
183 lb
64 L
17 gal
38 kg
84 lb
102 kg
225 lb
14.5/75-16.1
102 L
27 gal
102 kg
225 lb
87 L
23 gal
37 kg
82 lb
124 kg
273 lb
15-19.5
109 L
29 gal
109 kg
240 lb
95 L
25 gal
39 kg
86 lb
134 kg
295 lb
16.5L-16.1
156 L
41 gal
156 kg
344 lb
133 L
35 gal
55 kg
121 lb
188 kg
414 lb
Tire Size
TX18203,00004BC -19-19JUN09-1/1
Welding On Machine
UPDATE IN PROGRESS-7-23-09. SEE OM LEAD FOR
CORRECT CONTENT.
Keep this story and Welding Near Electronic Control Units
story next to each other when applicable.
VD76477,00004EC -19-23JUL09-1/1
4-1-17
020113
PN=167
Checking Ride Control Accumulator—If
Equipped
X9811 —UN—23AUG88
CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure can
penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before
disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten
all connections before applying pressure. Search
for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands
and body from high pressure fluids.
CAUTION: Clear area of bystanders. The boom
will jump upward during this check. Make
sure area around bucket is clear.
TX1013918A —UN—20DEC06
1. Start engine.
2. Run engine at high idle.
3. Push ride control switch (1) to on position.
4. Raise boom to maximum height.
5. Power boom down half-way to ground.
6. Stop suddenly by releasing loader control lever.
7. If boom is not cushioned when loader valve is
released, see your authorized dealer for servicing the
accumulator.
VD76477,0001137 -19-09JUL09-1/1
4-1-18
020113
PN=168
Discharge Ride Control System Hydraulic
Pressure—If Equipped
Do not have ride control activated when starting
the machine; the machine may move if ride
control is activated when the machine is started.
Do not have ride control activated when
operating the loader; the ride control system
may cause unexpected movement.
The ride control system has an accumulator and valve
in the loader circuit.
Before servicing or performing maintenance on the
machine, discharge hydraulic oil pressure from the ride
control system as follows:
1. Ensure that area around bucket is clear.
2. Push lower half of ride control switch (1) to deactivate
ride control.
3. Start the engine.
TX1013918A —UN—20DEC06
unexpected boom or bucket movement when
equipped with ride control. Ride control
accumulator energy must be discharged when
working on hydraulic components. Turn key
switch to ON. Push upper half of ride control
switch to activate ride control and move
loader control lever to FLOAT.
4. Position front loader boom so that the bucket is
approximately 30 cm (1 ft) off the ground.
5. Stop the engine.
6. Turn key switch to ON without restarting engine. Push
upper half of ride control switch to activate ride control.
7. Move loader control lever to float position. Bucket
should lower to ground.
8. If ride control accumulator has lost gas charge, see
Checking Ride Control Accumulator—If Equipped in
this section.
VD76477,0001138 -19-07JUL09-1/1
Discharge Pilot Control System Hydraulic
Pressure—If Equipped
T163349B —UN—02JAN03
machine movement. Turn engine off. Keep
bystanders clear of machine.
Before servicing or performing maintenance on the
machine, discharge hydraulic oil pressure from the pilot
control system as follows:
1. Ensure that area around bucket is clear.
2. Turn off engine.
3. Turn key switch to “ON” position.
1— Pilot Control Enable/Disable Switch
4. Rotate seat to backhoe operation position.
2— Pilot Controls
5. Pull pilot control towers back to operating position.
6. Push pilot control enable/disable switch (1) to “Unlock”
7. Actuate pilot controls (2) in a circular pattern for five
to ten rotations.
HG31779,00001BD -19-07JUL09-1/1
4-1-19
020113
PN=169
Lowering Boom Without Electrical
Power—For Machines With Pilot Controls
1. Remove rear half of floor mat.
T163972B —UN—15JAN03
2. Remove cap screws (1) and plastic cover (2).
3. Remove cap screws (3) and rear cab access floor
plate (4).
2— Plastic Cover
4— Rear Cab Access Floor
Plate
BT40170,0000043 -19-16JAN08-1/2
4. Disconnect hose (5) from bulkhead fitting (6).
5. Connect remote pressure source to bulkhead fitting.
Pressure source must be within specification.
T164626B —UN—27JAN03
Specification
Remote Pressure
Source—Pressure...................................................... 1379—24 821 kPa
14—248 bar
200—3600 psi
6. Lower boom using pilot controls.
7. Disconnect remote pressure source.
8. Connect hose to bulkhead fitting (6).
9. Install rear access floor plate.
5— Hose
10. Install plastic cover and floor mat.
6— Pilot Pressure Bulkhead
Fitting
BT40170,0000043 -19-16JAN08-2/2
Check Park Brake
TX1013963A —UN—20DEC06
unexpected machine movement. Fasten seat
belt before performing this check.
2. Start machine on dry, hard pavement.
3. Raise loader and backhoe buckets off ground.
4. Push right half of park brake switch (1) to disengage
the park brake.
5. Disengage MFWD, if equipped.
6. Move the transmission control lever (TCL) to F. Move
the gearshift lever to 2nd gear.
7. Depress the speed control pedal to the floor and drive
approximately 7 m (20 ft), then push left half of park
brake switch to engage the park brake. The machine
must stop within 2 m (6 ft) and transmission must shift
to neutral.
VD76477,0001139 -19-07JUL09-1/1
4-1-20
020113
PN=170
Bleeding Fuel System
CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure can
penetrate the skin causing serious injury. Relieve
pressure before disconnecting fuel or other
lines. Tighten all connections before applying
pressure. Keep hands and body away from
pinholes and nozzles that eject fluids under high
pressure. Use a piece of cardboard or paper to
search for leaks. Do not use your hand.
If ANY fluid is injected into the skin, a doctor
familiar with this type of injury must surgically
remove it within a few hours or gangrene
may result. Doctors unfamiliar with this
type of injury may call the Deere & Company
Medical Department in Moline, Illinois, or other
knowledgeable medical source.
TX1002309A —UN—06JAN06
NOTE: Whenever the fuel system has been opened up
for service (lines disconnected or filters removed),
or if machine has run out of fuel, it may be
necessary to bleed air from the system.
Final Fuel Filter on Tier 2/Stage II Engine
1— Retaining Ring
2— Final Fuel Filter
3— Water Separator Assembly
7— Bleed Screw
8— Primer Lever
6. Push primer lever toward engine as far as possible.
7. Start engine.
NOTE: If machine is equipped with auxiliary water
separator fuel filter the fuel tank must be
completely full.
1. Fill fuel tank.
1. Fill fuel tank.
2. Open bleed screw (7) on final fuel filter (2).
2. Turn key switch to the ON position.
3. Pump primer lever (8) on fuel transfer pump until air
free fuel stream is observed out of the bleed screw.
3. Wait 2 minutes.
NOTE: The primer lever may need to be pressed
approximately 65 times.
5. Turn key switch back to the ON position.
The fuel system for Tier 3/Stage IIIA engine is
self-bleeding.
4. Turn key switch to the OFF position.
6. Wait 2 minutes.
4. Close bleed screw on final fuel filter.
7. Start engine.
5. Pump primer lever on fuel transfer pump until
resistance is felt.
NOTE: The primer lever may need to be pressed
approximately 15 times.
TX18203,00004B9 -19-09JUL09-1/1
4-1-21
020113
PN=171
Brake Bleeding Procedure
1
TX1074504 —UN—07APR10
2
4
3
TX1074504
Brake Bleeding Procedure Using Bleed Screw Method
1— Bleed Screw (right side)
2— Clear Plastic Tube
3— Container
4— Bleed Screw (left side)
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury. Do not operate
machine if pedal travel exceeds 133 mm (5.25
in.) while applying 267 N (60 lb-force). Operating
machine with excessive brake travel could cause
brakes not to stop machine on first application.
NOTE: Air will "gravity bleed" from brake system through
brake valve without use of bleed screws but the
procedure may take much longer so bleed screw
method is the recommended procedure. Brake
lines must be inclined toward brake valve for
procedures other than bleed method.
methods are much slower methods but may be used as
alternates.
Bleed Screw Method
NOTE: Two people are required to bleed brake system
oil, one to operate brake valve and other to
open and close bleed screws.
CAUTION: Hot oil can cause serious burn
injury. Secure drain hose on bleed screw and
in container to prevent it from blowing off when
bleed screw is opened while brakes are applied.
Low ambient temperature or aeration of oil
will slow bleed process.
The rear axle is equipped with two brake bleed
screws, one for each wheel. Brake bleeding must be
done whenever the brake system has been opened
to repair or after replacing the brake valve, brake
lines, fitting, O-rings or axle internal brake parts.
Both brake pedals may be depressed at one time
even though bleeding is done one side at a time.
1. Secure a clear plastic tube (2) on bleed screw (4) with
hose clamp and secure other end in a small container
(3).
2. Start engine and run at slow idle with park brake on.
3. Steer from right to left stop-to-stop three times to fill
the brake valve reservoir.
4. Shut off engine.
NOTE: Only two pedal bleeding applications can be done
without refilling the brake valve reservoir.
All fittings must be inspected for leaks and tightened if
leaks occur.
The preferred method for the brake bleeding procedure is
to use the bleed screw method. The vacuum and manual
Bleed screw must be closed before the fully
depressed pedal reaches the floor.
4-1-22
JH38101,0000189 -19-23SEP10-1/3
020113
PN=172
5. Depress and hold the brake pedal, and open one
(side) service brake bleed screw to allow air and oil
mixture into a container. Close bleed screw before
pedal reaches maximum travel or floor.
If the bleeding procedure (applying brake pedal full
distance or travel) is done more than twice, fill the
brake valve reservoir again by starting the machine
and steering from stop-to-stop three times.
Repeat the process until oil from bleed screw runs
clear and without air.
6. Repeat process for opposite side.
7. After bleeding process is completed, pump each pedal
to check if pedal is firm.
JH38101,0000189 -19-23SEP10-2/3
8. Check brake pedal (1) travel distance (A) to
specification by measuring from floor to brake pedal
as shown.
Specification
Dual Brake Pedal
Travel—Max. Distance.................................................................. 95 mm
3.75 in.
Single Brake Pedal
Travel—Max. Distance.................................................................114 mm
4.5 in.
1
9. Recycle old oil.
A
TX1081823 —UN—21SEP10
Vacuum Method
1. Engage park brake. Connect a vacuum to breather
port on hydraulic reservoir. After 10 minutes,
disconnect air pressure.
2. Leave hose from breather port to vacuum device
connected until brake circuit is filled with oil. Both
pedals should become solid.
3.
Check brake pedal (1) travel distance (A) to
as shown.
Brake Pedal Travel
1— Brake Pedal
A—Travel Distance
Manual Method
1. Engage park brake. Run engine at slow idle.
2. Steer from stop-to-stop three or four times to fill the
brake valve reservoir.
3. Pump left-hand brake pedal five times, allowing 2
seconds between each pump for air to escape.
5. Pump right-hand pedal until pedal is solid, then pump
both pedals together until pedals are solid.
6.
Check brake pedal (1) travel distance (A) to
as shown.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the left-hand pedal is solid.
JH38101,0000189 -19-23SEP10-3/3
4-1-23
020113
PN=173
Service Recommendations For Snap-To-Connect (STC®) Fittings
Fittings are easily disconnected using JDG1385 Special
Tool (1) (supplied with machine). The special tool has a
different size slot cut into each end. The narrow slot is
for -06 size fittings. The wide slot is for -08 size fittings.
Use appropriate end of special tool on fitting being
disconnected. To connect fittings, simply push each half
of fitting together.
T161381C —UN—14APR03
Snap-To-Connect (STC®) fittings are used on this
machine. The fittings are designed to allow the hydraulic
hose to rotate as needed when the system is not
pressurized. This prevents the hydraulic hoses from
binding when components are put back to their operating
position.
JDG1385 Special Tool Storage Location In Toolbox
IMPORTANT: DO NOT pry against release sleeve
or damage to fitting may result.
1.
T134792C —UN—24OCT00
DO NOT force release sleeve beyond normal
range of travel, otherwise, release sleeve may
fall off when hose is disconnected. If this
happens and fitting is connected without the
release sleeve installed, fitting will not be
able to be disconnected again.
Disconnect STC type fittings:
a. Clean area around fitting, especially around the
release sleeve (3).
STC Fitting and JDG1385 Special Tool
b. While keeping JDG1385 Special Tool perpendicular
to the fitting, insert tool between release sleeve and
shoulder (2).
1— JDG1385 Special Tool
2— Shoulder
3— Release Sleeve
c. Gently push, DO NOT PRY, release sleeve away
from shoulder to disconnect the fitting.
d. Pull hose to disconnect.
Snap-To-Connect is a trademark of Eaton Corp
4-1-24
MD04263,000032B -19-05NOV10-1/2
020113
PN=174
2. Inspect STC fittings:
a. Check seal mating surfaces for nicks, scratches,
or flat spots.
T133922 —UN—21SEP00
b. Check O-ring (4), backup ring (5), and retaining ring
(2) for wear or damage.
c. Make sure O-ring, backup ring, and retaining ring are
in position before connecting fitting halves together.
3. Connect STC fittings:
a. Make sure fitting halves (3 and 6) are clean and
free of contaminants.
b. Make sure release sleeve (1) is on male half of STC
fitting (6) before connecting fitting halves together.
c. Push fitting halves together until a definite snap and
solid stop is felt.
STC Fitting Cross Section
1— Release Sleeve
2— Retaining Ring
3— Female Half of STC Fitting
4— O-Ring
5— Backup Ring
6— Male Half of STC Fitting
d. Pull back on hose to make sure fitting halves are
locked together.
e. To prevent hoses from binding, move component
into position before pressurizing hydraulic system.
MD04263,000032B -19-05NOV10-2/2
Adjusting Pilot Control Wrist Rest—If
Equipped
1. Turn lever (1) counterclockwise to loosen.
T163361B —UN—02JAN03
2. Adjust wrist rest (2) up or down to desired position.
3. Turn lever clockwise to tighten.
1— Lever
2— Wrist Rest
HG31779,00001BE -19-09JUL09-1/1
4-1-25
020113
PN=175
Toe-In Check and Adjust
3—6 mm
0.13—0.25 in.
Tie Rod Jam Nut Torque
120 N•m
89 lb-ft
T6382JW —UN—02NOV88
SPECIFICATIONS
Non-Powered Axle and
Mechanical Front Wheel Drive
(MFWD) Axle Toe-In Distance
Toe-In Measurement Check
1. Measure distance from ground to center of both hubs
(A). Mark front (B) and rear (C) of each front tire in
center of tread.
Toe-In Measurement
2. Measure distance between front marks (B) and rear
marks (C).
3. Front marks must be closer than rear marks within
specification.
Specification
Non-Powered Axle
and Mechanical Front
Wheel Drive (MFWD)
Axle—Distance...........................................................................3—6 mm
0.13—0.25 in.
A—Center of Hub
B—Front of Tire
C—Rear of Tire
D—Tie Rod Tube
4. If measurements are not within specification, see your
authorized dealer for adjustment.
VD76477,00012C0 -19-07JUL09-1/1
4-1-26
020113
PN=176
Installing Teeth on Backhoe Bucket
1. Position flex pin (C) with grooves (D) toward the tooth
tip. The grooves are the locking mechanism.
T7646AP —UN—16DEC91
NOTE: If "back" is stamped on the pin, this word
must face the shank.
If shank is badly worn, install new shank.
Install special teeth for digging in rock or frost.
2. To remove tooth tip (A), drive out flex pin.
3. To fasten tooth tip to shank (B), drive flex pin in place.
C—Flex Pin
D—Groove
T7646AN —UN—16DEC91
T7646AO —UN—16DEC91
A—Tooth Tip
B—Tooth Shank
TX,90,BD2190 -19-07JUL09-1/1
Do Not Service Control Valves, Cylinders,
Pumps or Motors
If these parts need service, see your authorized dealer.
Special tools and information are needed to service
control valves, cylinders, pumps, or motors.
T82,EXMA,BJ -19-16JAN08-1/1
4-1-27
020113
PN=177
Keep ROPS Installed Properly
CAUTION: Make certain all parts are reinstalled
correctly if the rollover protective structure
(ROPS) is loosened or removed for any reason.
Tighten mounting bolts to proper torque.
The protection offered by ROPS will be
impaired if ROPS is subjected to structural
damage, is involved in an overturn incident,
or is in any way altered. A damaged ROPS
should be replaced, not reused.
When installation of equipment on a machine necessitates
loosening or removing ROPS, mounting bolts must be
tightened to specification.
Specification
ROPS Mounting
Bolts—Torque..............................................................................420 N·m
310 lb-ft
VD76477,0001141 -19-21DEC06-1/1
Hardware Torque Specifications
Check cap screws and nuts to be sure they are tight.
If hardware is loose, tighten to torque shown on the
following charts unless a special torque is specified.
TX,90,FF1225 -19-16JAN08-1/1
4-1-28
020113
PN=178
Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values
TS1671 —UN—01MAY03
Bolt or Screw
Size
1/4
5/16
3/8
7/16
SAE Grade 2a
SAE Grade 1
b
c
Lubricatedb
Dry
Lubricated
SAE Grade 5, 5.1 or 5.2
Dryc
Lubricatedb
Dryc
SAE Grade 8 or 8.2
Lubricatedb
Dryc
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
3.7
33
4.7
42
6
53
7.5
66
9.5
84
12
106
13.5
120
17
150
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
28
20.5
35
26
7.7
13.5
68
120
22
194
N·m
lb.-ft.
9.8
86
12
106
15.5
137
17.5
155
22
194
27
240
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
28
20.5
35
26
44
32.5
lb.-in.
19.5
172
25
221
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
35
26
44
32.5
49
36
63
46
56
41
70
52
80
59
100
74
1/2
34
25
42
31
53
39
67
49
85
63
110
80
120
88
155
115
9/16
48
35.5
60
45
76
56
95
70
125
92
155
115
175
130
220
165
5/8
67
49
85
63
105
77
135
100
170
125
215
160
240
175
305
225
3/4
120
88
150
110
190
140
240
175
300
220
380
280
425
315
540
400
7/8
190
140
240
175
190
140
240
175
490
360
615
455
690
510
870
640
1
285
210
360
265
285
210
360
265
730
540
920
680
1030
760
1300
960
1-1/8
400
300
510
375
400
300
510
375
910
670
1150
850
1450
1075
1850
1350
1-1/4
570
420
725
535
570
420
725
535
1280
945
1630
1200
2050
1500
2600
1920
1-3/8
750
550
950
700
750
550
950
700
1700
1250
2140
1580
2700
2000
3400
2500
1-1/2
990
730
1250
930
990
730
1250
930
2250
1650
2850
2100
3600
2650
4550
3350
Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of the bolt
or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or tightening
procedure is given for a specific application. For plastic insert or crimped steel
type lock nuts, for stainless steel fasteners, or for nuts on U-bolts, see the
tightening instructions for the specific application. Shear bolts are designed to fail
under predetermined loads. Always replace shear bolts with identical grade.
Replace fasteners with the same or higher grade. If higher
grade fasteners are used, tighten these to the strength of the
original. Make sure fastener threads are clean and that you
properly start thread engagement. When possible, lubricate
plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the
specific application.
a
Grade 2 applies for hex cap screws (not hex bolts) up to 6 in. (152 mm) long. Grade 1 applies for hex cap screws over 6
in. (152 mm) long, and for all other types of bolts and screws of any length.
“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or 7/8 in.
and larger fasteners with JDM F13C, F13F or F13J zinc flake coating.
c
“Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or 1/4 to 3/4 in. fasteners with JDM F13B, F13E or F13H zinc flake coating.
b
DX,TORQ1 -19-12JAN11-1/1
4-1-29
020113
PN=179
Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values
TS1670 —UN—01MAY03
Bolt or Screw
Size
M6
M8
M10
4.8
8.8
9.8
10.9
12.9
12.9
4.8
8.8
9.8
10.9
12.9
12.9
Class 4.8
Lubricateda
Class 8.8 or 9.8
Dryb
Lubricateda
Class 10.9
Dryb
Lubricateda
Class 12.9
Dryb
Lubricateda
Dryb
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
lb.-in.
N·m
4.7
42
6
53
8.9
79
11.3
100
13
115
16.5
146
15.5
137
19.5
172
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
32
23.5
40
29.5
37
27.5
47
35
63
46
80
59
75
55
95
70
11.5
102
14.5
128
22
194
27.5
243
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
N·m
lb.-ft.
29
21
43
32
55
40
lb.-in.
23
204
N·m
lb.-ft.
M12
40
29.5
50
37
75
55
95
70
110
80
140
105
130
95
165
120
M14
63
46
80
59
120
88
150
110
175
130
220
165
205
150
260
190
M16
100
74
125
92
190
140
240
175
275
200
350
255
320
235
400
300
M18
135
100
170
125
265
195
330
245
375
275
475
350
440
325
560
410
M20
190
140
245
180
375
275
475
350
530
390
675
500
625
460
790
580
M22
265
195
330
245
510
375
650
480
725
535
920
680
850
625
1080
800
M24
330
245
425
315
650
480
820
600
920
680
1150
850
1080
800
1350
1000
M27
490
360
625
460
950
700
1200
885
1350
1000
1700
1250
1580
1160
2000
1475
M30
660
490
850
625
1290
950
1630
1200
1850
1350
2300
1700
2140
1580
2700
2000
M33
900
665
1150
850
1750
1300
2200
1625
2500
1850
3150
2325
2900
2150
3700
2730
M36
1150
850
1450
1075
2250
1650
2850
2100
3200
2350
4050
3000
3750
2770
4750
3500
Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of
the bolt or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or
tightening procedure is given for a specific application. For stainless steel
fasteners or for nuts on U-bolts, see the tightening instructions for the
specific application. Tighten plastic insert or crimped steel type lock nuts
by turning the nut to the dry torque shown in the chart, unless different
instructions are given for the specific application.
Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined loads. Always
replace shear bolts with identical property class. Replace fasteners with
the same or higher property class. If higher property class fasteners are
used, tighten these to the strength of the original. Make sure fastener
threads are clean and that you properly start thread engagement. When
possible, lubricate plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the
specific application.
a
“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or M20
and larger fasteners with JDM F13C, F13F or F13J zinc flake coating.
b
“Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or M6 to M18 fasteners with JDM F13B, F13E or F13H zinc flake coating.
DX,TORQ2 -19-12JAN11-1/1
Inspect Loader Boom Service Lock
2. Verify that warning decal is in place.
3. See your authorized dealer for replacement parts.
1— Loader Boom Service Lock
TX1002080A —UN—04JAN06
1. Inspect loader boom service lock (1), cotter pin, and
retaining pin to ensure that all are in good condition.
MB60223,00000E8 -19-11MAR09-1/1
4-1-30
020113
PN=180
Operational Checkout Procedure
Use this procedure to check all systems and functions
on the machine. It is designed so you can make a quick
check of machine operation while doing both a walk
around inspection and performing specific checks from
the operator’s seat.
A location will be required which is level and has adequate
space to complete the checks. No tools or equipment are
needed to perform this checkout.
Should you experience a problem with your machine, you
will find helpful diagnostic information in this checkout that
will pinpoint the cause. Use the table of contents to help
find adjustment procedures. This information may allow
you to perform simple repairs yourself, reducing machine
down time.
The information obtained after completing the operational
checkout will allow you or your authorized dealer to
pinpoint a specific test or repair needed to restore the
machine to specifications.
Complete the necessary visual checks (oil levels, oil
condition, external leaks, loose hardware, linkage, wiring,
etc.) prior to doing the checkout. The machine must be at
operating temperature for many of the checks.
Locate the check to be performed at the top of the left
column and read completely down the column before
performing the check. Follow this sequence from left
to right. In the far right column, if no problem is found,
you will be instructed to go to next check. If a problem
is indicated, you will be referred to either a group in this
manual or to your authorized dealer for repair.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-1/46
Diagnostic Trouble Code Check
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-2/46
•
1
Display and Clear
Trouble Codes
Always check for diagnostic trouble codes and correct them before performing the
operational checkout.
Diagnostic trouble codes can be displayed by using two methods:
• Standard Display Monitor (SDM)
YES: Correct all
diagnostics trouble codes
before proceeding. See
your authorized dealer.
• Service Advisor
NO: Proceed with
operational checkout.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-3/46
Key Switch Off, Engine Off Checks
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-4/46
•
1
Battery Check
TX1003151 —19—30JAN06
Key switch OFF.
Press SELECT button, on Standard Display Monitor (SDM), and hold until battery
volts are displayed.
NOTE: Fuel gauge will calibrate against the far left peg before returning to its
normal operating position and engine hours will be displayed.
YES: Go to next check.
LOOK: Does battery volts read a minimum of 12 volts?
NO: Test battery.
4-2-1
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-5/46
020113
PN=181
Key Switch ON, Engine Off Checks
4-2-2
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-6/46
020113
PN=182
•
1
Standard Display
Monitor (SDM) Check
TX1003145 —UN—02FEB06
Model Number
TX1003151 —19—30JAN06
Key switch ON (engine NOT running).
Observe monitor and note changes (bulbs, indicators and gauges).
Press NEXT until the SDM displays gear, engine speed and hour meter.
NOTE: Starting motor must not operate.
LOOK: Do all lights and backlighting come on?
Does the display show the correct model number?
Do all gauge indicators point to approximately 12:00 o’clock position and then move to
their normal operating position?
NO: See your authorized
dealer.
TX1003153 —19—02FEB06
Observe monitor. Press the NEXT button.
LOOK: Does the display show volts, gear and engine speed?
dealer.
TX1003147 —UN—02FEB06
LOOK: Does the display show gear, engine speed and hydraulic oil temperature?
dealer.
4-2-3
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-7/46
020113
PN=183
N
JOB
0
132.4
TX1003154 —19—22JAN07
LOOK: Does the display show gear, engine speed and job timer hours?
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-8/46
•
2
Service Brake Pedal
Stop Check
T134625 —UN—19OCT00
Unlock brake pedals.
Lift left and right brake pedals individually.
LOOK: Does each pedal have a minimal amount of travel before cap screws contact
stop?
NOTE: Gap between pedal stop screws and plate should be 0.127—0.381
mm (0.005—0.015 in.).
dealer.
This travel ensures that brake check valves are opened and brakes are released.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-9/46
•
3
Ride Control Electrical
Check (If Equipped)
TX1002661 —UN—13JAN06
Turn key switch ON (do not start engine).
Turn ride control switch ON.
LOOK: Does the ride control switch on the Sealed Switch Module (SSM) indicator
light turn ON?
dealer.
Turn ride control switch OFF.
LOOK: Does the ride control switch on the Sealed Switch Module (SSM) indicator
light turn off?
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-10/46
Key Switch On, Engine On
4-2-4
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-11/46
020113
PN=184
•
1
Park Brake Indicator
and Switch Check
TX1003182 —UN—30JAN06
Fasten Seat Belt.
Operator's seat facing loader position.
Apply service brakes.
Start the engine.
Engine speed at slow idle.
LOOK: Is the PARK BRAKE indicator on?
TX1016611 —UN—12APR10
Release park brake.
LOOK: Is the Park Brake indicator OFF?
Apply park brake.
Stop the engine.
dealer.
4-2-5
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-12/46
020113
PN=185
•
2
Start Circuit Check
TX1003174 —UN—30JAN06
RELEASE
PA R K B R A K E
TX1003152 —19—22JAN07
Fasten seat belt.
Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 1st gear forward (1F).
Start the engine.
NOTE: The engine will start with transmission control lever (TCL) in
forward (F) or reverse (R) but the controller will automatically shift
the transmission to neutral (N).
LOOK/LISTEN: Does the engine start?
Does display show RELEASE PARK BRAKE?
TX1003148 —UN—02FEB06
Release park brake.
Move transmission control lever (TCL) to neutral.
NOTE: Display will not show “F” forward or “R” reverse until the transmission control
lever (TCL) is cycled to neutral and the park brake has been released.
LOOK: Does display show neutral (N).
TX1003149 —UN—30JAN06
Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 1st gear forward.
LOOK: Does display show 1F?
dealer.
4-2-6
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-13/46
020113
PN=186
•
3
Reverse Warning
Alarm Check
TX1003175 —UN—30JAN06
1R Gearshift Lever
TX1003150 —UN—30JAN06
1R Display
Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 1st gear reverse (1R).
LOOK/LISTEN: Does display show correct gear and direction?
Does the reverse warning alarm sound?
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-14/46
•
4
Transmission Gear
Shift Detent Check
TX1003176 —UN—30JAN06
Fasten seat belt.
Start the engine.
Release park brake.
Move transmission control lever (TCL) into forward (F).
Turn transmission control lever (TCL) to shift into each gear.
LOOK: Does gear number align with pointer in each speed detent position?
Does twist handle remain in detented positions?
Does display indicate correct gear and direction?
NO: Replace transmission
control lever (TCL)/range
switch.
4-2-7
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-15/46
020113
PN=187
•
5
Park Brake Function
Check
TX1016611 —UN—12APR10
Fasten seat belt.
Start the engine.
Release park brake.
Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 3rd gear forward (3F).
Slowly increase engine speed just enough to allow machine to start to move a few feet.
Apply the Park Brake.
NOTE: Transmission will shift to neutral (N) as soon as Park Brake is applied.
LOOK/FEEL: Does Park Brake engage immediately, when Park Brake Switch is
pushed and does the machine stop?
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-16/46
•
6
Pilot Control Tower
Operating/Stored
Position Check (If
Equipped)
Move pilot control towers into operating position.
Release towers.
LOOK/FEEL: Do towers stay in operating position?
Move pilot control towers into stored position.
LOOK/FEEL: Do towers stay in stored position?
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-17/46
•
7
Pilot Control
Run engine at 1500 rpm.
Enable/Disable Switch
Check (If Equipped)
CAUTION: Prevent possible crushing injury from heavy component. Use appropriate lifting device.
Raise machine off ground with stabilizers and loader bucket.
Specification
310J—Weight (approximate).............................................................................. 7321 kg
16 140 lb
Disable pilot controls and move control levers.
NO: Continue with check.
LOOK: Do activated functions move?
YES: See your authorized
dealer.
4-2-8
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-18/46
020113
PN=188
•
8
Pilot Control Pattern
Select Switch Check
(If Equipped)
Enable pilot controls.
Select backhoe from the two position pattern select switch.
Activate left and right pilot control levers forward and backward.
YES: Continue with check.
LOOK: Does backhoe boom move when left pilot control lever is activated?
Does backhoe crowd move when right pilot control lever is activated?
dealer.
Select excavator from the two position pattern select switch.
Activate left and right pilot control levers forward and backward.
LOOK: Does backhoe crowd move when left pilot control lever is activated?
Does backhoe boom move when right pilot control lever is activated?
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-19/46
•
9
Pilot Control Valve
Check (If Equipped)
Move pilot control levers in all directions.
FEEL/LOOK: Do levers move freely in all directions?
FEEL/LOOK: Do levers spring back to neutral when released?
NO: If pilot control levers
bind during travel or do not
return to neutral position,
inspect controls and towers.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-20/46
•
10 Pilot Control
Accumulator Check
(If Equipped)
Run engine at 1500 rpm.
Operators seat in backhoe position.
Disengage boom from boom lock.
Hold boom up function over relief for 10 seconds.
Turn engine off, and turn key switch to on.
NOTE: Pilot control enable switch must be cycled after key switch
is turned back into on position.
Cycle pilot enable switch to enable position.
Activate boom down function.
LOOK: Does boom lower when boom down function is activated?
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-21/46
•
11 Backhoe Position
Control Pattern
Operator's seat facing backhoe position.
Activate stabilizer lever to lower and raise left stabilizer.
Activate stabilizer lever to lower and raise right stabilizer
YES: Continue check.
LOOK: Do both stabilizers raise and lower?
dealer.
4-2-9
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-22/46
020113
PN=189
•
12 Stabilizer Cylinder
Check
Engine speed at approximately 1500 rpm.
Position loader bucket off the ground.
Operator's seat facing backhoe position.
CAUTION: Machine will move forward as transmission control
lever (TCL) is moved into forward (F).
Lower stabilizers to raise rear of machine off the ground.
Specification
16 140 lb
LOOK/FEEL: Do cylinders extend smoothly and hold machine up?
Raise stabilizers.
LOOK/FEEL: Do cylinders retract smoothly and remain up?
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-23/46
•
13 Hydraulic and
Transmission Oil
Warmup Procedure
IMPORTANT: For the following checks all systems must be warmed up to
operating range to get accurate test results.
Check hydraulic oil temperature. If hydraulic oil temperature is not to specification allow
machine time to warm up to normal operating range.
Specification
Hydraulic Oil—Temperature............................................................................. 60—70°C
140—160°F
Check transmission oil temperature. If transmission oil temperature is not to
specification allow machine time to warm up to normal operating range.
Specification
Transmission Oil—Temperature...................................................................... 60—70°C
140—160°F
Are hydraulic and transmission oil temperature to specification?
4-2-10
NO: Warm system to
specification.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-24/46
020113
PN=190
•
14 Cycle Times Check
Engine at fast idle.
Record cycle time for each function.
Does machine perform within specifications?
4-2-11
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-25/46
020113
PN=191
Specification
Loader boom raise (bucket flat on
ground-to-full height)—Maximum Cycle
Time (seconds)............................................................................... 310J - 4.9 (seconds)
310SJ - 5.5 (seconds)
Loader boom lower—Powered
(full height-to-bucket flat on
ground)—Maximum Cycle Time..................................................... 310J - 2.5 (seconds)
Loader boom lower—Float
(full height-to-bucket flat on
ground)—Maximum Cycle Time..................................................... 310J - 2.5 (seconds)
Loader bucket dump (boom just above
ground—Maximum Cycle Time....................................................... 310J - 2.6 (seconds)
Loader bucket curl (boom just above
ground)—Maximum Cycle Time................................................................ 2.6 (seconds)
Backhoe boom raise (backhoe at
maximum reach, bucket teeth on
ground-to-boom at cushion)—Maximum
Cycle Time................................................................................................. 2.9 (seconds)
Backhoe boom lower (backhoe at
maximum reach, bucket teeth on
ground-to-boom at cushion)—Maximum
Cycle Time................................................................................................. 2.9 (seconds)
Crowd in (boom in transport
position)—Maximum Cycle Time............................................................... 3.1 (seconds)
Crowd out (boom in transport
position)—Maximum Cycle Time............................................................... 2.7 (seconds)
Backhoe bucket dump—Maximum Cycle
Time........................................................................................................... 2.4 (seconds)
Backhoe bucket curl—Maximum Cycle
Time........................................................................................................... 3.2 (seconds)
Backhoe swing (boom raised
to cushion, bucket curled,
dipperstick parallel to ground
cylinder-cushion-to-cylinder-cushion
(180°))—Maximum Cycle Time.................................................................. 3.3 (seconds)
Extendible dipperstick extend—If
Equipped—Maximum Cycle Time.............................................................. 2.4 (seconds)
Extendible dipperstick retract—If
Equipped—Maximum Cycle Time.............................................................. 2.6 (seconds)
Right stabilizer down (full up-to-ground
level)—Maximum Cycle Time.................................................................... 2.5 (seconds)
Right stabilizer up (ground level-to-full
up)—Maximum Cycle Time........................................................................ 2.5 (seconds)
Left stabilizer down (full up-to-ground
level)—Maximum Cycle Time.................................................................... 2.5 (seconds)
Left stabilizer up (ground level-to-full
up)—Maximum Cycle Time........................................................................ 2.5 (seconds)
Steering right to left—Turns................................................................................. 2.3 to 3
Steering left to right—Turns................................................................................. 2.3 to 3
Steering right to left (MFWD)—Turns.................................................................. 2.3 to 3
Steering left to right (MFWD)—Turns.................................................................. 2.3 to 3
NO: Check hydraulic
oil level. See Check
Hydraulic Reservoir Oil
Does machine perform within specifications?
dealer.
4-2-12
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-26/46
020113
PN=192
•
15 Brake System Leakage
Check
NO: Go to next check.
T134626 —UN—19OCT00
Depress and hold left brake pedal, then right brake pedal using approximately 267 N
(60 lb-force).
Specification
Brake Pedal—Force................................................................................................267 N
60 lb
LOOK: Brake pedal must not feel spongy (caused by air in the system). Does pedal
settle more than 25 mm (1.0 in.) per minute.
YES: Bleed brake system.
See Brake Bleeding
Procedure. (Section 4-1.)
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-27/46
•
16 Brake Drag/Park
Brake Check
T6171AL —UN—09DEC88
Operator's seat in loader position.
Position machine on a gradual slope with front of machine facing downhill.
Lift loader bucket off the ground.
Transmission control lever (TCL) to neutral.
Differential lock not actuated.
TX1016611 —UN—12APR10
Release park brake.
Release service brakes.
Let machine coast freely for several feet.
Apply park brake.
LOOK: Did machine stop?
Release park brake.
LOOK: Did machine coast freely?
NOTE: If machine does not move freely on slope, drive the machine for 5 minutes.
Feel axle housing area to locate which brake is dragging.
dealer.
4-2-13
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-28/46
020113
PN=193
•
17 Engine Speed Select
Knob Check
TX1003184 —UN—30JAN06
Engine speed slow idle.
Auto-Idle OFF.
Lower all equipment to the ground.
Operator’s seat facing backhoe position.
Transmission control lever (TCL) in neutral.
Move speed control knob to slow idle, then to fast idle position.
LOOK: Does tachometer read 900—925 rpm (Slow Idle) and 2400—2425 rpm (Fast
Idle)?
dealer.
Move speed select knob to increase engine speed to 1200 rpm.
Raise rear wheels of machine off the ground.
Specification
16 140 lb
Mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) not actuated.
Move transmission control lever (TCL) to 1st gear forward.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to slow idle?
dealer.
Operator’s seat facing loader position.
Move speed select knob to increase engine speed to 1200 rpm.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to slow idle?
dealer.
Release service brakes.
NO: Go to next check.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to 1200 rpm?
YES: See your authorized
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-29/46
•
18 Engine Speed Control
Pedal Check
Move the engine speed control pedal from slow idle to fast idle.
LOOK: Does tachometer read 900—925 rpm (Slow Idle) and 2400—2425 rpm (Fast
Idle)?
dealer.
4-2-14
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-30/46
020113
PN=194
•
19 Auto-Idle Circuit
Check (If Equipped)
TX1002663 —UN—13JAN06
Engine speed fast idle.
Auto-Idle switch OFF (Indicator light OFF).
Push Auto-Idle Switch to ON.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed decrease after 4 to 6 seconds? Does Auto-Idle
indicator light come ON?
dealer.
Slowly actuate any boom backhoe function.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to its original setting?
dealer.
Rotate operator's seat to loader position.
LOOK/LISTEN: Does engine speed return to slow idle.
LOOK: Does Auto-Idle indicator light go OFF?
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-31/46
•
20 Engine and Torque
Converter Check
(Without MFWD)
T6171AM —UN—09DEC88
Position machine with loader bucket at ground level against a dirt bank or immovable
object.
Move transmission control lever (TCL) to forward (F) position.
Engage differential lock.
Increase engine speed to fast idle.
Release park brake.
LOOK: Do rear wheels stall?
NOTE: This test will give a general indication of engine, transmission
and torque converter performance.
dealer.
4-2-15
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-32/46
020113
PN=195
•
21 Transmission Neutral
Disconnect Circuit
Check
Fasten seat belt. Operator’s seat facing loader position.
Engine speed approximately 2000 rpm.
Raise loader bucket off the ground.
Shift transmission into 4th gear.
Release park brake.
Shift transmission control lever (TCL) to forward (F).
LISTEN: Does engine rpm drop (approximately 50 rpm) when the transmission control
lever (TCL) is shifted into forward (F)?
Press button on loader control lever and note sound of engine.
LISTEN: Does engine rpm increase when the neutral disconnect button is pressed?
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-33/46
•
22 Differential Lock
Check
T6295AD —UN—19OCT88
Raise machine off the ground.
Specification
16 140 lb
Release park brake.
Unlock the brake pedals.
Turn mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) switch OFF (if equipped).
Depress differential lock control.
Operate machine at approximately 1200 rpm in 1st forward (1F).
Apply one brake pedal.
LOOK: Both rear wheels must stop.
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-34/46
•
23 Differential Gear and
Pinion Check
Release park brake.
Shift transmission to first gear and operate engine at approximately 1500 rpm.
Steer machine in a maximum left turn and depress left brake pedal to stop the left wheel.
Steer machine in a maximum right turn and depress right brake pedal to stop the right
wheel.
LISTEN: Can excessive gear noise be heard in the differential or pinion gear area?
dealer.
4-2-16
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-35/46
020113
PN=196
•
24 Front Wheel Alignment
(Toe-In) Check
T6264AI —UN—22OCT91
Drive machine in fourth gear forward on a surface with loose material.
LOOK: Is material from behind front wheels thrown excessively inward or outward?
NO: See Toe-In Check and
Adjust. (Section 4-1.)
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-36/46
•
25 Mechanical Front
Wheel Drive (MFWD)
Driving Check (If
Equipped)
T131717B —UN—15JUN00
MFWD Switch
Specification
16 140 lb
Release park brake.
Shift transmission to first gear and operate engine at approximately 1500 rpm.
Press and hold and then release the top half of the mechanical front wheel drive
(MFWD) switch.
LOOK: Do the front wheels turn when the switch is pressed and stop when it is
released?
dealer.
Press the bottom of the mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) switch to engage
mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD).
LOOK: Do the front wheel continue to turn.
dealer.
4-2-17
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-37/46
020113
PN=197
•
26 Mechanical Front
Wheel Drive (MFWD)
Differential Check
Specification
16 140 lb
Release park brake.
Shift transmission in first gear forward (1F).
Engage mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD).
Lower front wheels to just contact ground.
LOOK: Does at least one front wheel turn?
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-38/46
•
27 Mechanical Front
Drive machine at transport speed with mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) engaged,
Wheel Drive (MFWD)
then disengage.
Gear and Pinion Check
LISTEN: Does mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) “whine” when disengaged?
NOTE: It is normal for mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD) to “whine”
when engaged at transport speeds.
NO: If mechanical front
wheel drive (MFWD)
“whines”, check oil levels
and fill to correct level.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-39/46
•
28 Ride Control System
Check (If Equipped)
Run engine at fast idle.
Turn ride control ON.
Operator’s seat facing loader position and locked.
Raise loader boom to maximum height.
Power boom down half-way to the ground.
Stop suddenly by releasing the joystick.
LOOK: Is boom cushioned when joystick is released?
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-40/46
•
29 Hydraulic Loader
Coupler Check (If
Equipped)
CAUTION: Avoid unexpected movement. Position attachment
on ground before releasing pin.
Operator’s seat facing loader position and locked.
Move coupler switch to disengage position.
LOOK/LISTEN: Do coupler pins retract?
LISTEN: Does chime sound?
LOOK: Does coupler indicator light come ON?
dealer.
4-2-18
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-41/46
020113
PN=198
•
30 Steering System
Checks
Raise the loader bucket off the ground with the bottom level with the ground.
Raise rear of machine off the ground.
Specification
16 140 lb
Operate engine at approximately 1000 rpm.
Turn the steering wheel full left to full right several times.
LOOK: Did the front wheels move smoothly in both directions? When the steering
wheel was stopped, did the wheels stop moving?
NOTE: Internal leakage or a sticking steering valve spool can cause wheels to
continue to move after steering wheel is stopped.
NO: Wheels did NOT move
smoothly in both directions.
Wheels continued to
move after steering wheel
was stopped. See your
authorized dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-42/46
•
31 Cylinder Cushion
Check
Engine speed idle.
Raise rear of machine off the ground.
Specification
16 140 lb
Boom must be lowered from the transport position.
Activate backhoe swing left and right.
Make a note of the sound and speed as cylinders near end of their stroke.
LOOK: Does swing speed decrease near the end of the cylinder stroke?
Repeat check using backhoe boom raise function.
dealer.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-43/46
•
32 Backhoe and Loader
Function Drift Check
Warm hydraulic oil to operating temperature for this check.
Specification
Hydraulic Oil—Temperature............................................................................. 60—70°C
140—160°F
Position backhoe fully extended with bucket at a 45° angle to the ground.
Lower boom until the bucket cutting edge is 50 mm (2.0 in.) off the ground.
Position loader bucket the same distance off of the ground as backhoe bucket.
Observe both bucket cutting edges for 1 minute.
LOOK: Are both bucket cutting edges still off the ground after 1 minute?
dealer.
4-2-19
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-44/46
020113
PN=199
Cab System Checks
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-45/46
•
1
Cab System Checks
Operational Checkout
Do the following work properly?
• Seat adjustment
• Seat belt
• Tilt wheel console
• Dome light
• Horn
• Front and rear windshield wiper and washer
• Four speed (five position) blower fan
• Air conditioning
• Heater
• Door and window latches
• Front and rear work lights
• Drive and brake lights
• Warning lights
• Turn signals
• Side shield latches
• Grill housing
• Fuel fill cap
• Loader boom lock check
• Backhoe boom lock check
• Service decal check
• Beacon (if equipped)
• Auxiliary hydraulics (if equipped)
YES: Operational checkout
complete.
NO: Repair.
MD04263,000014E -19-06MAY10-46/46
4-2-20
020113
PN=200
Troubleshooting Procedure
Step 1. Operational Checkout Procedure
NOTE: Troubleshooting charts are arranged from the
simplest to verify, to least likely, more difficult
to verify. When diagnosing a problem, use
all possible means to isolate the problem to a
single component or system. Use the following
steps to diagnose problems:
Step 2. Troubleshooting Charts
Step 3. Adjustments
Step 4. See your authorized John Deere dealer.
HG31779,0000020 -19-06MAY10-1/1
4-3-1
020113
PN=201
Engine
Symptom
Problem
Solution
Engine Cranks, But Will Not Start
or Starts Hard
Fuel tank empty
Check fuel quantity.
Fuel tank vent plugged
Remove cap and listen for sound of
air entering tank. Replace cap.
No electrical power to ECU
Turn key switch to ON position.
Replace fuse. Repair wiring.
Water in fuel or water frozen in fuel line Drain water from fuel tank. Inspect
fuel filter for water. Change filter.
Debris in fuel or incorrect grade of fuel Check fuel tank outlet strainer for type
of fuel debris. Check bottom of fuel
tank for debris. Clean tank. Add fuel.
Check grade of fuel. Add correct fuel.
Air leak on suction side of fuel system Check for bubbles in fuel filter and
tighten connections. Inspect fuel lines
for damage.
Fuel transfer pump diaphragm leaking Check engine oil for fuel dilution.
Slow cranking speed
Check battery and connections.
Incorrect engine oil (cold weather).
Restricted air filter
Check air filter restriction indicator and
air filters. Clean.
Restricted fuel filter
Replace fuel filter.
ECU fuse
Replace fuse.
Engine Surges or Stalls Frequently Air in fuel
Inspect filter for evidence of air in fuel.
Tighten connections and bleed fuel
system.
Fuel tank vent plugged
Remove cap and listen for sound of
air entering tank. Replace cap.
Debris in fuel or incorrect grade of fuel Check fuel tank outlet strainer for
debris. Check bottom of fuel tank for
debris. Clean tank. Add fuel. Check
grade of fuel.
Water in fuel
Drain fuel tank and inspect filter
element for water. Replace filters.
Fuel filter plugged
Replace filter.
Improper valve clearance
Check and adjust valve clearance.
4-3-2
HG31779,0000021 -19-07MAR07-1/3
020113
PN=202
Symptom
Problem
Solution
Engine Misses
Air in fuel
Check for evidence of air in filter.
Tighten connections and bleed fuel
system.
Debris in fuel or incorrect grade of fuel Check fuel tank for water. Check fuel
tank strainer and fuel filter for debris.
Clean. Check grade of fuel.
Engine Does Not Develop Power
Engine Emits Excessive Black or
Gray Exhaust Smoke
Engine Emits Excessive Blue or
White Smoke
Slow Acceleration
Incorrect valve clearance
Check and adjust valve clearance.
Fuel tank outlet strainer plugged
Check fuel tank for water or debris.
Remove and clean.
Fuel filter plugged
Replace fuel filter.
Wrong grade of fuel
Drain and add correct fuel.
Air system restricted
Check air filter restriction and air
filters. Clean.
Incorrect valve clearance
Adjust valve clearance.
Restricted air filter
Check air filter restriction and air
filters. Clean or replace.
Incorrect grade of fuel
Cranking speed too slow
Check batteries and connections.
Wrong grade of fuel
Detonation (Excess Engine Knock) Low engine oil level
Add oil.
Abnormal Engine Noise
Low or incorrect engine oil (too thin)
Add correct oil to proper level.
Engine oil diluted with fuel
Inspect engine oil. See your
authorized dealer.
Low oil level
Add oil to proper level. Inspect engine
oil.
Wrong viscosity oil/oil diluted with
diesel fuel
Change oil and see your authorized
dealer.
Low Oil Pressure (Oil Pressure
Light On—Red "Stop" Flashing)
Engine Overheats (Engine Coolant Low coolant level
Indicator Light On and Red "Stop"
Flashing)
Low engine oil level
Engine overloaded, operating in
incorrect gear
4-3-3
Fill cooling system and check for leaks.
Add oil.
Reduce load.
HG31779,0000021 -19-07MAR07-2/3
020113
PN=203
Symptom
Excessive Fuel Consumption
Problem
Solution
Improper fuel
Radiator cap
Replace cap.
Air system restricted
Check filter restriction indicator and
air filters. Replace.
Leakage in fuel system
Inspect. Repair.
Refill with correct fuel.
Operator holding hydraulics over relief Return control levers to neutral
position.
Excessive Drag In Turbocharger
Rotating Members
Bearing seizure or dirty or worn
bearings caused by excessive
temperature, unbalanced wheel,
dirty oil, oil starvation, or insufficient
lubrication
Check for plugged air filters.
HG31779,0000021 -19-07MAR07-3/3
4-3-4
020113
PN=204
Electrical System
Symptom
Problem
Solution
Nothing Works
Battery undercharged or dead
Disconnect switch
Check switch knob position.
Start fuse
Replace fuse.
Battery cables making poor
connections
Clean cable connections at battery
and starter solenoid.
Power circuit components
Battery undercharged or dead
Starter Will Not Crank Engine
Battery cables making poor connection Clean connections at battery, starter,
and ground to frame.
Engine Cranks Slowly
Starting Motor Turns, but Engine
Will Not Crank
Starting Motor Continues to Run
after Engine Starts
Starter relay problem
Starter solenoid problem
Starter motor problem
Starter motor pinion stuck in flywheel
gear
Repair starter motor. See your
authorized dealer.
Key switch
Major engine problem
Battery cable connections loose or
corroded
Batteries undercharged
Clean and/or tighten connections.
Starter armature bearings worn
causing starter "drag"
Repair or replace starter. See your
authorized dealer.
Starter pinion not engaging flywheel
ring gear
Starter pinion or flywheel gear teeth
broken
Starter solenoid stuck
Starter not disengaging
Starter relay stuck
Key switch problem
Wiring harness shorted
4-3-5
VD76477,000122C -19-21DEC06-1/5
020113
PN=205
Symptom
Problem
Solution
Battery Using Too Much Water
High ambient temperature
Refill with distilled water.
Cracked battery case
Replace battery. Install hold-down
correctly.
Battery being overcharged
Low water level
See Battery Using Too Much Water in
this group.
Dirty or wet battery top, causing
discharge
Corroded or loose battery cable ends
Clean battery and wipe dry.
Low Battery Output
Starter Solenoid Chatters
Engine Cranks but Does Not Start
Start Aid Does Not Work
Noisy Alternator
Clean and tighten cable end clamps.
Recharge battery. If machine has two
batteries, recharge separately.
Broken or loose battery posts
Wiggle posts by hand. If posts are
loose or will turn, replace battery. If
machine has two batteries, replace
both batteries.
Loose fan/alternator belt or worn
pulleys
Inspect belt or pulley. Adjust or
Poor connections at batteries or starter Clean connections.
Low battery charge
Recharge or replace batteries.
Starter solenoid "hold-in" windings
open
Key switch problem
Engine circuit electrical problem
Check diagnostic trouble codes.
Wiring harness problem
Empty or misaligned start aid can
A click, not a hiss, is heard when
start aid button is pushed. Replace or
adjust can.
Start aid switch
Start aid solenoid
Worn drive belt
Inspect and replace.
Pulley misaligned
Adjust alternator mount.
Alternator bearing worn
Loosen alternator belts. Turn pulley
by hand. If any roughness is felt,
repair alternator.
4-3-6
VD76477,000122C -19-21DEC06-2/5
020113
PN=206
Symptom
Display Monitor Does Not Work
Problem
Solution
Internal alternator
Display monitor fuse
Replace fuse.
Wiring harness
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Wire harness or bad connection at
bulkhead connector
Always Indicates HIGH
Gauge
Torque Converter Oil Temperature
Gauge Always Indicates HOT
Fuel Gauge Does Not Work
Engine Oil Pressure Indicator
Indicates Low
Engine Air Filter Restriction
Indicator Light Stays On All the
Time
Sender
Wiring harness
Gauge
Sender
Wiring harness
Fuel gauge problem
Fuel gauge sender problem
Display monitor problem
Low oil level
Stop engine. Check level.
Low oil viscosity
Drain and add correct oil.
Wiring harness
Sender
Restricted engine air filter
Replace filter.
Engine air filter restriction switch
Voltage Indicator Light Remains On Loose or glazed alternator belt
Check belt. Replace if glazed; tighten
if loose.
Engine rpm low
Raise engine rpm. If light remains on,
see your authorized dealer.
Excessive electrical load from added
accessories
Remove accessories or install higher
output alternator.
4-3-7
VD76477,000122C -19-21DEC06-3/5
020113
PN=207
Symptom
Problem
Solution
Loose or corroded electrical
Inspect, clean, or tighten electrical
connections on battery, ground strap, connections.
starter or alternator
Alternator excitation diode
Hydraulic Oil Filter Restriction
Indicator Light Stays On All the
Time
Alternator problem
Display monitor problem
Restricted hydraulic oil filter
Replace filter.
Hydraulic oil filter restriction switch
Hydraulic Oil Temperature Indicator Wiring harness
Light Stays On All the Time
Sender
Horn Does Not Sound
Backup Alarm Does Not Sound
Horn
Horn fuse
Horn switch
Wiring harness
Wiring harness
Backup alarm
Front or Rear Wiper Does Not Work Wiper fuse
Blower Motor Does Not Work
Cab Work Lights Do Not Operate
Replace fuse.
Wiper switch problem
Wiper motor problem
Blower motor fuse
Replace fuse.
Fan motor switch problem
Fan motor resistor problem
Fuse
Replace fuse.
Light switch problem
4-3-8
VD76477,000122C -19-21DEC06-4/5
020113
PN=208
Symptom
Driving Lights Do Not Work
Dome Light Does Not Work
Dim Lights
Return-to-Dig Does Not Operate
Problem
Solution
Cab work light relay problem
Fuse
Replace fuse.
Driving light switch problem
Bulb
Replace bulb.
Fuse
Replace fuse.
Dome light switch problem
Low battery charge
Check battery connections.
Low alternator output
Check belt tension.
Poor ground at lights
Clean and tighten connections.
Alternator excitation/Return-to-dig
fuse
Boom switch out of adjustment
Replace fuse.
Check cam to see if it activates switch.
Adjust as required.
VD76477,000122C -19-21DEC06-5/5
Steering System
Symptom
Problem
Solution
Slow or Hard Steering
Air in system
Check oil level.
Check suction hose clamps.
Erratic ("Spongy") Steering
Steering lines or load sensing "LS"
lines damaged (bent)
Air in system
Check and replace.
Check oil level.
Check suction hose clamps.
No Response When Steering Wheel Low or no oil
Is Turned
Check reservoir oil level.
VD76477,000126B -19-21DEC06-1/1
4-3-9
020113
PN=209
Hydraulic System
Symptom
Problem
Reservoir Drains When Changing
Hydraulic Filter
Return tube vent hole in reservoir may Remove, inspect and repair.
be plugged
Vent tube broken off inside reservoir Remove and repair.
No Loader Or Steering Hydraulics
Low oil level
Add oil to correct level.
Pump problem
Remove hydraulic filter and inspect. If
filter contains excessive amounts of
metal material, see your authorized
dealer.
Obstruction in oil lines or valves
Inspect for pinched lines or stuck
valve spools.
Hydraulic oil aerated
Incorrect oil; drain and refill. Suction
hose has air leak; inspect and tighten.
Low oil level
Check oil levels.
Low oil level
Engine rpm too low
Increase rpm or check engine speed.
(See Check Engine Speed in this
manual.)
Hose or line leakage
Inspect and tighten fittings.
Slow Loader And Backhoe
Hydraulics (Low Pump Output)
Low Hydraulic Power (Low
Hydraulic Pressure)
Low oil level (no aeration of oil)
Low oil level
Excessive load
Reduce load.
Operator holding hydraulic system
over relief
Return levers to neutral when not in
use.
Oil levels too low in reservoir
Check levels and add oil. Use
recommended oil.
Low Hydraulic Power
Slow Hydraulic Functions
Hydraulic Function Makes
Chattering Noise
Hydraulic Oil Overheats
Solution
4-3-10
HG31779,0000023 -19-21DEC06-1/2
020113
PN=210
Symptom
Foaming Oil
Excessive Pump Noise
Problem
Solution
Using low viscosity oil in hot weather
Use recommended oil.
Hydraulic cooling system restricted
Clean around radiators and coolers.
Plugged oil cooler
Clean oil cooler.
Oil level too low or too high
Check oil level. Adjust to full mark on
sight gauge.
Incorrect type of oil
Use recommended oil.
Oil maintenance not performed
Perform correct maintenance.
Low oil level
Hydraulic filter bypass valve chattering Replace filter. Inspect, clean, and
repair.
No Response When Steering Wheel Low oil level
Is Turned
Machine Turns In Opposite
Steering cylinder lines not connected
Direction
properly
Check reservoir oil level.
Connect steering cylinder lines to
opposite ports.
HG31779,0000023 -19-21DEC06-2/2
4-3-11
020113
PN=211
Transmission
Symptom
Problem
Solution
Machine Will Not Move In Forward
or Reverse
Low oil level in transmission
Broken drive shafts
Inspect drive shafts and universal
joints for external damage. See your
authorized dealer.
Low oil level
Add oil.
Wrong oil grade
Change oil.
Oil level is low
Wrong oil, aerated oil
Change oil.
Brake dragging
Check for excessive heat in brake
area of axle housing after operating
machine. See your authorized dealer.
Low or high oil level (aeration of oil)
Add oil or drain.
Wrong oil
Change oil.
Oil level too high or too low
Check oil level and correct.
Incorrect type of oil
Drain and replace oil.
Oil cooler air flow restricted
Inspect and clean exterior of cooler.
Transmission or coolant oil leak
Fan or shroud damaged
Engine low idle too slow
Oil level low
Fill to correct oil level.
Transmission Slippage
Machine Lacks Power or Moves
Slow
Transmission Shifts Too Slow
Transmission Overheats
Excessive Power Train Noise
NOTE: If any other problems are encountered which
require special tools or machine knowledge to
correct, see your authorized dealer.
VD76477,000125F -19-21DEC06-1/1
MFWD
Symptom
Problem
Solution
Excessive Noise
Oil level low
Fill to correct oil level.
VD76477,0001260 -19-14NOV06-1/1
4-3-12
020113
PN=212
Rear Axle
Symptom
Problem
Solution
No Differential Lock Operation
Problem in electrical circuit to solenoid With engine stopped and key switch
turn to accessory, activate differential
lock and listen for a click from solenoid
valve.
Do Differential Lock Operational
Checks.
Stuck foot switch
Inspect.
Problem in electrical circuit
With engine stopped and key switch
on, activate differential lock and listen
for a click from solenoid valve.
Air in brake valve or lines or piston
Bleed brakes. See Brake Bleeding
Procedure. (Section 4-1.)
Low oil level
Check oil level and fill.
Excessive Noise/Heat
Low oil level
Check oil level and fill.
Park Brake Will Not Engage
Tow release screws turned in
Differential Lock Will Not Release
Poor Service Brakes
NOTE: If any other problems are encountered which
require special tools or machine knowledge to
correct, see your authorized dealer.
VD76477,0001261 -19-06MAY10-1/1
4-3-13
020113
PN=213
Air Conditioning
Symptom
Problem
Solution
Air Conditioning System Does Not
Operate
A/C and heater blower fuse
Replace fuse.
Blower motor switch
Check switch.
A/C and heater ON/OFF switch
Check switch.
A/C and heater relay
Check relay.
Fresh air filter restricted
Clean or replace filter.
Condenser fins restricted with debris
Clean condenser fins.
Recirculating air filter restricted
Refrigerant hose kinked, pinched or
collapsed
Heater or evaporator core fins
restricted with dirt or dust
A/C and heater blower motor failed or
operating too slowly
Warm outside air leaking into cab
Check hose routing.
Heater valve remaining open
Inspect, repair, adjust or replace
heater valve or cable.
Air Conditioner Runs Constantly,
Too Cold
Freeze control switch, capillary tube
not positioned in evaporator properly
Reposition capillary tube in evaporator
coil.
Interior Windows Continue to Fog
A/C system off
Put A/C and heater ON/OFF switch to
A/C position.
Symptom
Problem
Solution
Heater System Does Not Operate
A/C and heater blower fuse
Replace fuse.
Air Conditioner Does Not Cool
Interior of Cab
Heater Does Not Warm Interior of
Cab
Clean heater or evaporator core fins.
Check blower motor.
Inspect, repair or replace door and
window seals.
Blower motor switch/Blower motor fan Check switch.
switch (if equipped)
Recirculating air filter restricted
Heater hose kinked, pinched or
collapsed
Re-route or re-index hoses. Replace
collapsed hoses.
Heater coil fins clogged with dirt or
dust
Clean heater fins.
4-3-14
VD76477,0001236 -19-21DEC06-1/2
020113
PN=214
Symptom
Interior Windows Continue to Fog
Problem
Solution
A/C and heater blower motor/Heater
blower motor (if equipped) failed or
operating too slowly
Heater valve remaining closed
Check motor.
Inspect, repair, adjust or replace
heater valve or cable.
A/C system off (if equipped)
Put A/C and heater ON/OFF switch to
A/C position.
VD76477,0001236 -19-21DEC06-2/2
4-3-15
020113
PN=215
Prepare Machine for Storage
3. Wash the machine. [Use low pressure wash
operations (less than 1379 kPa (13.8 bar) (200 psi)
until 30 days after receipt of machine.] Paint areas to
prevent rust. Replace decals, where needed.
IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage, do not use
biodiesel during machine storage. When
using biodiesel blends, switch to petroleum
diesel for long term storage.
4. Fill fuel tank, to prevent condensation.
1. Before storage, operate engine on at least one
complete tank of petroleum diesel fuel to purge the
fuel system. Ensure that the fuel tank is full during
storage to prevent water build up due to condensation.
NOTE: For blends up to and including B20, it is
recommended that biodiesel be used within three
months of its manufacture. For blends greater
than B20, it is recommended that the biodiesel
be used within 45 days. The poor oxidation
stability characteristic of biodiesel can result in
long-term storage problems. John Deere does not
recommend using biodiesel in engines powering
standby applications or vehicles operating on a
seasonal basis. Consult your John Deere dealer or
fuel supplier for additives to improve fuel storage
and performance of biodiesel fuels. These additives
must be added to the biodiesel close to its time
of production for them to be effective.
2. Repair worn or damaged parts. Install new parts, if
necessary, to avoid needless delays later.
5. Ensure tires are properly inflated.
6. Park machine on a hard surface to prevent tires from
freezing to ground.
IMPORTANT: LPS 3® Rust Inhibitor can destroy
painted finish. DO NOT spray LPS 3 Rust
Inhibitor on painted surfaces.
7. Retract all hydraulic cylinders if possible. If not, coat
exposed cylinder rods with LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor.
8. Apply grease at all lubrication fittings.
9. Remove batteries or disconnect terminals from
batteries.
10. Store machine in a dry, protected place.
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible machine damage
from unauthorized persons operating machine.
Attach a DO NOT OPERATE tag to steering wheel.
11. Put a DO NOT OPERATE tag on the steering wheel.
IMPORTANT: High pressure washing [greater than
1379 kPa (13.8 bar) (200 psi)] can damage freshly
painted finishes. Paint should be allowed to
air dry for 30 days minimum after receipt of
machine before cleaning parts or machine
with high pressure. Use low pressure wash
operations until 30 days have elapsed.
12. Close all vent louvers in the cab.
13. Lock all covers and doors.
LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor is manufactured by Holt Lloyd Corporation.
VD76477,00015C2 -19-06MAR12-1/1
CAUTION: Prevent possible injury or death
from asphyxiation. Engine exhaust fumes
can cause sickness or death. Start engine
ONLY in a well-ventilated area.
1. Drain water and sediment from fuel tank when air
temperature is above freezing.
2. Remove LPS 3® Rust Inhibitor from cylinder rods with
a cleaning solvent.
T6191AA —UN—18OCT88
Monthly Storage Procedure
LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor is a trademark of Illinois Tool Works.
4-4-1
VD76477,00016A3 -19-13JUN11-1/2
020113
PN=216
T6181AU —UN—18OCT88
IMPORTANT: Prevent possible engine damage.
During cold temperatures, check fluidity of
engine oil on dipstick. If the oil appears waxy
and/or jelly-like rather than liquid, DO NOT
attempt to start engine. Use external heat source
to warm the crankcase until oil appears fluid.
3. Check all fluid levels. If low, check for leaks and add
oil as required.
4. Check belts.
5. Check condition of all hoses and connections.
6. Check battery electrolyte level. Charge and install
battery.
7. For machines with tires, check condition of tires and
tire pressure.
For machines with tracks, check condition of tracks
and track sag.
On crawler machines with non sealed-and-lubricated
track chains, apply oil to the pin-to-bushing joints. Run
machine back and forth several times.
8. Park machine on a hard surface to prevent tracks from
freezing to ground.
9. Fill fuel tank.
run until it reaches operating temperature. Run at 1/2
speed for five minutes. Do not run at fast or slow idle.
• If engine fails to start or runs poorly after starting,
change fuel filter(s). Bleed fuel system.
12. Operate all controls, levers, seat adjustments, etc.
unexpected machine movement. Clear the
area of all persons before running machine
through the operation procedure.
13. Make sure the area is clear to allow for movement.
Cycle all hydraulic functions several times. Check
condition of all hoses and connections.
10. Pre-lubricate turbocharger bearings, if equipped:
a. Disconnect fuel shutoff fuse.
14. Park the machine with cylinder rods retracted, if
possible. Turn key switch to OFF.
b. Crank engine for 10 seconds.
c. Connect fuel shutoff fuse.
11. Inspect engine compartment, and remove any foreign
material that may have accumulated. Start engine and
15. Apply LPS 3 Rust Inhibitor to exposed cylinder rod
areas.
VD76477,00016A3 -19-13JUN11-2/2
4-4-2
020113
PN=217
Record Product Identification Number (PIN)
Purchase Date
Product Identification Number
T132526B —UN—13JUL00
NOTE: Record all 13 characters of Product
Identification Number.
A—Product Identification
Number Tag
CED,OUO1079,460 -19-13JUL00-1/1
Record Engine Serial Number
Engine Serial Number
TX1014141A —UN—26OCT06
A—Engine Serial Number Tag
VD76477,0001148 -19-09NOV06-1/1
Record Transmission Serial Number
Transmission Serial Number
TX1003410A —UN—07FEB06
A—Transmission Serial
Number Tag
VD76477,0001149 -19-25OCT06-1/1
4-5-1
020113
PN=218
Record Rear Axle Housing Serial Number
Rear Axle Housing Serial Number
TX1003412A —UN—07FEB06
A—Rear Axle Serial Number
Tag
VD76477,000125B -19-13NOV06-1/1
Record Mechanical Front Wheel Drive
(MFWD) Front Axle Housing Serial
Number—If Equipped
TX1014904A —UN—21NOV06
MFWD Front Axle Housing Serial Number
A—Mechanical Front Wheel
Drive (MFWD) Front Axle
Serial Number Tag
VD76477,000124B -19-14DEC06-1/1
1. Maintain in a secure location an up-to-date inventory
of all product and component serial numbers.
2. Regularly verify that identification plates have not
been removed. Report any evidence of tampering to
law enforcement agencies and order duplicate plates.
3. Other steps you can take:
- Mark your machine with your own numbering system
- Take color photographs from several angles of each
machine
TS1680 —UN—09DEC03
Keep Proof of Ownership
DX,SECURE1 -19-18NOV03-1/1
4-5-2
020113
PN=219
1. Install vandal-proof devices.
2. When machine is in storage:
- Lower equipment to the ground
- Set wheels to widest position to make loading more
difficult
- Remove any keys and batteries
3. When parking indoors, put large equipment in front of
exits and lock your storage buildings.
4. When parking outdoors, store in a well-lighted and
fenced area.
5. Make note of suspicious activity and report any thefts
immediately to law enforcement agencies.
6. Notify your John Deere dealer of any losses.
TS230 —UN—24MAY89
Keep Machines Secure
DX,SECURE2 -19-18NOV03-1/1
4-5-3
020113
PN=220
Travel Speeds
Travel speeds are as follows for machines using 19.5L-24
rear tires:
Item
Measurement
Specification
1 Forward
Speed
5.7 km/hr
3.5 mph
2 Forward
Speed
10.5 km/hr
6.5 mph
3 Forward
Speed
21.3 km/hr
13.2 mph
4 Forward
Speed
35.9 km/hr
22.3 mph
1 Reverse
Speed
7.2 km/hr
4.5 mph
2 Reverse
Speed
13.2 km/hr
8.2 mph
3 Reverse (310SJ only)
Speed
21.1 km/hr
13.1 mph
Travel Speeds
NOTE: Heavily equipped machines and smaller tires
may result in slower travel speeds.
VD76477,0001150 -19-05FEB08-1/1
Backhoe Loader Drain and Refill Capacities
Item
Measurement
Specification
Capacity
25 L
6.6 gal
Capacity
21 L
5.5 gal
Item
Measurement
Specification
Engine Oil (including filter)
Capacity
13 L
3.5 gal
Torque Converter and Transmission
System
Capacity
15 L
4.0 gal
Rear Axle and Planetary Housing
Capacity
18 L
4.8 gal
MFWD Front Axle Housing
Capacity
6.5 L
1.7 gal
MFWD Front Wheel Planetary
Housing (each)
Capacity
1L
1 qt
Fuel Tank
Capacity
155 L
41 gal
Hydraulic System Reservoir
Capacity
39 L
10.3 gal
Cooling System
MD04263,000014F -19-07MAY09-1/1
4-6-1
020113
PN=221
T115805 —UN—11JUN98
310J Backhoe Loader Dimensions
Item
Measurement
Specification
Backhoe w/o Ext. Dipperstick
Height
3.33 m
10 ft 11 in.
Backhoe w/Ext. Dipperstick
Retracted
Height
3.38 m
11 ft 1 in.
Extended
Height
4.24 m
13 ft 11 in.
A—Loading Height, Truck
Loading Position
4-6-2
VD76477,00010D9 -19-13JUL09-1/4
020113
PN=222
Item
Measurement
Specification
Distance
5.44 m
17 ft 10 in.
Retracted
Distance
5.51 m
18 ft 1 in.
Extended
C—Reach from Center of
Rear Axle
Distance
6.53 m
21 ft 5 in.
Distance
6.50 m
21 ft 4 in.
Retracted
Distance
6.58 m
21 ft 7 in.
Extended
D—Maximum Digging Depth
Distance
7.59 m
24 ft 11 in.
Depth
4.34 m
14 ft 3 in.
Retracted
Depth
4.39 m
14 ft 5 in.
Extended
Depth
5.46 m
17 ft 11 in.
Distance
4.32 m
14 ft 2 in.
Retracted
Distance
4.37 m
14 ft 4 in.
Extended
F—Digging Depth (SAE)—2440
mm (8 ft) Flat Bottom
Distance
5.44 m
17 ft 10 in.
Distance
3.96 m
13 ft 0 in.
Retracted
Distance
4.06 m
13 ft 4 in.
Distance
5.18 m
17 ft 0 in.
Distance
305 mm
12 in.
Rotation
190°
B—Reach from Center of
Swing Pivot
E—Digging Depth (SAE)—610
Extended
G—Ground Clearance Minimum
Ground Clearance Minimum
H—Bucket Rotation
Bucket Rotation
4-6-3
VD76477,00010D9 -19-13JUL09-2/4
020113
PN=223
Item
Measurement
Specification
Height
3.43 m
11 ft 3 in.
Length
7.09 m
23 ft 3 in.
Width
2.18 m
7 ft 2 in.
Width
3.10 m
10 ft 2 in.
Width
3.53 m
11 ft 7 in.
Width
2.08 m
6 ft 10 in.
Height
2.74 m
9 ft 0 in.
Heavy Duty 0.77 m3 (1.00 yd3)
Length
2.03 m
6 ft 8 in.
Length
2.03 m
6 ft 8 in.
Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m3 (1.25 Length
yd3)
2.18 m
7 ft 2 in.
Multipurpose 0.77 m3 (1.00 yd3)
Length
2.15 m
7 ft 1 in.
Length
2.20 m
7 ft 3 in.
Length
2.11 m
6 ft 11 in.
I—Transport Height
J—Overall Length, Transport
Backhoe
K—Stabilizer Width, Transport
with ROPS
Backhoe
L—Stabilizer Spread, Operating
Backhoe
M—Overall Width, Stabilizer
Spread (less loader bucket)
Backhoe
N—Width Over Tires
Backhoe
O—Height to Cab/ROPS Top
Backhoe
P—Front Axle Centerline to
Bucket Cutting Edge
Q—Wheelbase
Non-Powered Front Axle
Mechanical Front Wheel Drive Axle Length
2.14 m
7 ft 0 in.
R—Maximum Height to Loader
Bucket Hinge Pin
Maximum Height to Loader Bucket
Hinge Pin
Height
3.38 m
11 ft 1 in.
4-6-4
VD76477,00010D9 -19-13JUL09-3/4
020113
PN=224
Item
Measurement
Specification
Clearance
2.69 m
8 ft 10 in.
Clearance
2.69 m
8 ft 10 in.
S—Dump Clearance, Loader
Bucket at 45°
Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m3 (1.25 Clearance
yd3)
2.48 m
8 ft 2 in.
Clearance
2.59 m
8 ft 6 in.
Clearance
2.59 m
8 ft 6 in.
Angle
45°
Distance
785 mm
30.9 in.
Distance
767 mm
830.2 in.
Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m3 (1.25 Distance
yd3)
809 mm
31.9 in.
Distance
818 mm
32.2 in.
Distance
818 mm
32.2 in.
Loader Bucket Rollback at Ground
Level
W—Dig Below Ground—Loader
Bucket Level
Angle
40°
Depth
160 mm
6.3 in.
Depth
175 mm
6.9 in.
Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m3 (1.25 Depth
yd3)
147 mm
5.8 in.
Depth
197 mm
7.8 in.
Depth
197 mm
7.8 in.
T—Maximum Loader Bucket
Dump Angle
Maximum Loader Bucket Dump
Angle
U—Reach at Full Height, Loader
Bucket at 45°
V—Loader Bucket Rollback
at Ground Level
VD76477,00010D9 -19-13JUL09-4/4
4-6-5
020113
PN=225
310J Backhoe Loader Specifications
NOTE: Specifications and design subject to change
without notice. Wherever applicable, specifications
are in accordance with Standards.
Item
Measurement
Specification
Net Peak Power @ 2000 rpm
Power
84 hp
Cylinders
Quantity
4
Displacement
Volume
4.5 L
276 in.3
Engine Torque Rise
Torque
47%
Maximum Engine Net Torque @
1300 rpm
Torque
367 N·m
270 lb-ft
Electrical System
Voltage
12-volt
Alternator Rating
Amperage
90 amps
Capacity
0.20 L/kW
Net Peak Power @ 2000 rpm
Power
79 hp
Cylinders
Quantity
4
Displacement
Volume
4.5 L
276 in.3
Engine Torque Rise
Torque
34%
1400 rpm
Torque
335 N·m
246 lb-ft
Electrical System
Voltage
12-volt
Amperage
90 amps
Rated Power @ 2000 rpm
Power
SAE gross 53 kW
71 hp
Cylinders
Quantity
4
Displacement
Volume
4.5 L
276 in.3
Engine Torque Rise
Torque
37%
1000 rpm
Torque
283 N·m
208 lb-ft
Electrical System
Voltage
12-volt
Alternator Rating
Amperage
90 amps
Tier 3/Stage IIIA Engine—John
Deere 4045H
Oil Pan Size
Tier 2/Stage II Engine—John
Deere 4045T
Alternator Rating
Engine—John Deere
4045D—Naturally Aspirated
MD04263,0000150 -19-07JUL09-1/1
4-6-6
020113
PN=226
310J Backhoe Loader Weight
Item
Measurement
Specification
SAE Operating Weight with ROPS
Weight
6295 kg
13 880 lb
Cab Added
Weight
263 kg
580 lb
MFWD with Tires Added
Weight
168 kg
370 lb
Extendible Dipperstick
Weight
200 kg
440 lb
Front Loader Coupler
Weight
286 kg
630 lb
Backhoe Bucket Coupler
Weight
59 kg
130 lb
Transporting
MD04263,0000151 -19-20FEB09-1/1
310J Buckets
Width
Weight
Heaped Capacity
Loader:
mm
(In.)
m3
(Cu Yd)
kg
lb
Heavy duty long lip
2180
(86)
0.86
(1.12)
426
(940)
2180
(86)
0.86
(1.12)
426
(940)
Multipurpose
2180
(86)
0.76
(1.00)
725
(1600)
Backhoe:
mm
(in.)
m3
(cu ft)
Standard duty
457
(18)
0.13
610
(24)
0.18
305
(12)
457
610
762
Width
Heavy duty with lift loops
Weight
Heaped Capacity
kg
(lb)
(4.6)
118
(260)
(6.5)
136
(300)
0.11
(2.8)
109
(240)
(18)
0.13
(4.6)
132
(290)
(24)
0.18
(6.5)
154
(340)
(30)
0.25
(8.8)
172
(380)
VD76477,00010DB -19-09JUL09-1/1
4-6-7
020113
PN=227
Capacities—Standard Dipperstick
16 5
Lifting capacity ratings are made with bucket hinge pin,
loader bucket and stabilizers on firm, level ground. Lift
capacities are hydraulically limited. Lifting capacities are
87 percent of the maximum lift over any point on the swing
arc and do not exceed 75 percent of the tipping load. Angle
between boom and ground is 65 degrees. Machine is
equipped with 610 mm (24 in.) standard bucket, standard
or extendible dipperstick, and standard equipment.
4,859 (2204)
3,232 (1466)
3,123 (1417)
4,420 (2005)
4,968 (2253)
DIPPER
LIFT
WITH
BOOM
AT 65
3
2
2,875 (1304)
2,758 (1251)
4
2,645 (1200)
2,545 (1154)
SWING PIVOT
4
8
3,002 (1362)
4,446 (2017)
7,656 (3473)
12
1
0
0
4
1
NOTE: Loader bucket on ground significantly improves
side stability, therefore improving lift capacity to the
side. Lift capacity over the rear is not affected.
BOOM
LIFT
2,366 (1073)
2,292 (1040)
2
8
2,236 (1014)
3
2,223 (1008)
12
4
FEET
0
0
METERS
4
1
8
2
12
3
16
5
4
20
6
7
TX1015209 —19—09JAN07
2,453 (1113)
Lift Capacity, Backhoe with Standard Dipperstick
Based on SAE J31 (Except with Loader Bucket on Ground)
VD76477,00010DD -19-16OCT06-1/1
(Retracted)
16 5
4,437 (2013)
12
2,867 (1300)
2,775 (1259)
4,050 (1837)
4,533 (2056)
6,525
(2960)
3
8
2,662 (1207)
4,067 (1845)
DIPPER
LIFT
WITH
BOOM
AT 65
2
2,545 (1154)
4
2,432 (1103)
2,327 (1056)
2,227 (1010)
SWING PIVOT
4
1
0
0
4
1
2,136 (969)
BOOM
LIFT
2,058 (933)
1,984 (900)
2
1,931 (876)
8
3
1,914 (868)
12
4
FEET
METERS
0
0
4
1
8
2
12
3
4
16
5
20
6
7
TX1015210 —19—12DEC06
Lift Capacity, Backhoe with Extendible Dipperstick, Retracted
VD76477,00010DE -19-16OCT06-1/1
4-6-8
020113
PN=228
(Extended)
16 5
2,841 (1289)
1,966 (892)
12
1,936 (878)
2,723 (1235)
3
1,892 (858) 8
2,723 (1235)
1,844 (836)
2,858 (1296)
DIPPER
3,176 (1441)
1,792 (813) 4
LIFT
WITH
BOOM
AT 65
3,919 (1778)
4
SWING PIVOT
2
1
1,740 (789)
1,697 (770) 0
0
1,653 (750)
1,614 (732) 4
BOOM
LIFT
1,579 (716)
1,557 (706)
1
2
8
3
1,549 (703)
1,575 (714)
12
4
FEET
METERS
0
0
4
1
8
2
12
3
4
16
5
20
6
7
TX1015211 —19—09JAN07
VD76477,00010DF -19-16OCT06-1/1
4-6-9
020113
PN=229
T115805 —UN—11JUN98
310SJ Dimensions
NOTE: Specifications and design subject to change
without notice. Whenever applicable, specifications
are in accordance with SAE Standards. Unless
otherwise noted, these specifications are based
on a standard machine with 19.5L-24, 8PR, R4
Item
rear tires; 11L-16, 12PR, F3 front tires; 0.86
m3 (1.12 cu yd) loader bucket; 610 mm (24 in.)
backhoe bucket; ROPS/FOPS; full fuel tank
and 79 kg (175 lb) operator.
Measurement
Specification
Height
3.43 m
11 ft 3 in.
A—Loading Height, Truck
Loading Position
4-6-10
VD76477,00010E0 -19-09JUL09-1/5
020113
PN=230
Item
Measurement
Specification
Retracted
Height
3.43 m
11 ft 3 in.
Extended
B—Reach from Center of
Swing Pivot
Height
4.29 m
14 ft 1 in.
Distance
5.56 m
18 ft 3 in.
Retracted
Distance
5.66 m
18 ft 7 in.
Extended
C—Reach from Center of
Rear Axle
Distance
6.68 m
21 ft 11 in.
Distance
6.63 m
21 ft 9 in.
Retracted
Distance
6.73 m
22 ft 1 in.
Extended
D—Maximum Digging Depth
Distance
7.72 m
25 ft 4 in.
Depth
4.42 m
14 ft 6 in.
Retracted
Depth
4.55 m
14 ft 11 in.
Extended
E—Digging Depth (SAE)—610
Depth
5.61 m
18 ft 5 in.
Distance
4.37 m
14 ft 4 in.
Retracted
Distance
4.50 m
14 ft 9 in.
Extended
F—Digging Depth (SAE)—2440
Distance
5.56 m
18 ft 3 in.
Distance
4.06 m
13 ft 4 in.
Retracted
Distance
4.19 m
13 ft 9 in.
Distance
5.33 m
17 ft 6 in.
Clearance
330 mm
13 in.
Extended
G—Ground Clearance Minimum
Ground Clearance Minimum
4-6-11
VD76477,00010E0 -19-09JUL09-2/5
020113
PN=231
Item
Measurement
Specification
Rotation
190°
Height
3.51 m
11 ft 6 in.
Height
3.48 m
11 ft 5 in.
Length
7.16 m
23 ft 6 in.
Width
2.18 m
7 ft 2 in.
Width
3.10 m
10 ft 2 in.
Width
3.53 m
11 ft 7 in.
Width
2.18 m
7 ft 2 in.
Height
2.79 m
9 ft 2 in.
Length
2.03 m
6 ft 8 in.
Length
2.03 m
6 ft 8 in.
Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m3 (1.25 Length
yd3)
2.18 m
7 ft 2 in.
Length
2.03 m
6 ft 8 in.
Length
2.20 m
7 ft 3 in.
Length
2.15 m
7 ft 1 in.
Non-Powered Front Axle
Length
2.11 m
6 ft 11 in.
Mechanical Front Wheel Drive
Length
2.14 m
7 ft 0 in.
H—Bucket Rotation
Bucket Rotation
I—Transport Height
Retracted
J—Overall Length, Transport
Backhoe
K—Stabilizer Width, Transport
Backhoe
L—Stabilizer Spread, Operating
Backhoe
M—Overall Width, Stabilizer
Spread (less loader bucket)
Backhoe
N—Width Over Tires
Backhoe
O—Height to Cab/ROPS Top
Backhoe
P—Front Axle Centerline to
Bucket Cutting Edge
Q—Wheelbase
4-6-12
VD76477,00010E0 -19-09JUL09-3/5
020113
PN=232
Item
Measurement
Specification
Height
3.4 m
11 ft 2 in.
Clearance
2.69 m
8 ft 10 in.
Clearance
2.69 m
8 ft 10 in.
R—Maximum Height to Loader
Bucket Hinge Pin
Maximum Height to Loader Bucket
Hinge Pin
S—Dump Clearance, Loader
Bucket at 45°
Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m3 (1.25 Clearance
yd3)
2.48 m
8 ft 2 in.
Clearance
2.64 m
8 ft 8 in.
Clearance
2.62 m
8 ft 7 in.
Clearance
2.62 m
8 ft 7 in.
Angle
45°
Distance
785 mm
30.9 in.
Distance
767 mm
30.2 in.
Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m3 (1.25 Distance
yd3)
911 mm
35.9 in.
Distance
765 mm
30.1 in.
Distance
818 mm
32.2 in.
Distance
818 mm
32.2 in.
Loader Bucket Rollback at Ground
Level
W—Dig Below Ground—Loader
Bucket Level
Angle
40°
Depth
160 mm
6.3 in.
Depth
175 mm
6.9 in.
T—Maximum Loader Bucket
Dump Angle
Maximum Loader Bucket Dump
Angle
U—Reach at Full Height, Loader
Bucket at 45°
V—Loader Bucket Rollback
at Ground Level
4-6-13
VD76477,00010E0 -19-09JUL09-4/5
020113
PN=233
Item
Measurement
Specification
3
Heavy Duty Long Lip 0.96 m (1.25 Depth
yd3)
147 mm
5.8 in.
Depth
206 mm
8.1 in.
Depth
185 mm
7.3 in.
Depth
185 mm
7.3 in.
VD76477,00010E0 -19-09JUL09-5/5
310SJ Backhoe Loader Weight
Item
Measurement
Specification
SAE Operating Weight with ROPS
Weight
6580 kg
14 510 lb
Cab Added
Weight
263 kg
580 lb
MFWD with Tires Added
Weight
220 kg
485 lb
Extendible Dipperstick
Weight
222 kg
490 lb
Front Loader Coupler
Weight
286 kg
630 lb
Backhoe Bucket Coupler
Weight
63 kg
138 lb
Transporting
MD04263,0000153 -19-20FEB09-1/1
4-6-14
020113
PN=234
310SJ Buckets
Width
Weight
Heaped Capacity
Loader:
mm
In.
m3
Cu Yd
kg
lb
Heavy duty long lip
2180
86
0.86
1.12
426
940
2340
92
1.00
1.30
476
1050
Multipurpose
2180
86
0.76
1.00
725
1600
2340
92
0.96
1.25
762
1680
Width
Weight
Heaped Capacity
Backhoe:
mm
In.
m3
Cu Ft
kg
lb
Standard duty
610
24
0.21
7.5
159
350
Heavy duty with lift loops
305
12
0.09
3.3
117
258
457
18
0.14
5.1
151
334
610
24
0.21
7.5
180
396
610
24
0.25
8.8
216
476
762
30
0.28
10.0
202
444
914
36
0.35
12.5
231
510
457
18
0.14
5.1
164
362
610
24
0.21
7.5
192
424
610
24
0.25
8.8
206
455
762
30
0.28
10.0
215
475
914
36
0.35
12.5
231
510
Severe duty
Ditch cleaning
VD76477,00010E3 -19-13JUL09-1/1
Capacities—Standard Dipperstick
16 5
5,585 (2533)
12
3,745 (1699)
3,658 (1659)
5,664 (2569)
8
2
3,406 (1545)
6,609 (2998) DIPPER
LIFT
WITH
BOOM
AT 65
11,389 (5166)
3
3,537 (1604)
5,785 (2624)
3,276 (1486)
4
3,154 (1431)
3,045 (1381)
SWING PIVOT
4
1
0
0
4
1
2,945 (1336)
2,854 (1295)
BOOM
LIFT
2,780 (1261)
2
8
2,723 (1235)
3
2,732 (1239)
12
4
FEET
METERS
0
0
4
1
8
2
12
3
4
16
5
20
6
7
TX1015212 —19—12DEC06
Lift Capacity, Backhoe with Standard Dipperstick
VD76477,00010E4 -19-16OCT06-1/1
4-6-15
020113
PN=235
(Retracted)
16 5
4,384 (1989)
12
3,119 (1415)
4,981
(2259)
5,078 (2303)
5,712 (2591)
3,119 (1415)
3
8
3,049 (1383)
2
2,958 (1342)
DIPPER
LIFT
WITH
BOOM
AT 65
8,334
(3780)
4
4
2,862 (1298)
1
2,771 (1257)
2,684 (1217)
SWING PIVOT
0
0
4
1
2,536 (1150)
BOOM
LIFT
2,484 (1127)
2
8
2,462 (1117)
3
2,514 (1140)
3,306 (1500)
12
4
FEET
METERS
0
0
4
1
8
12
2
3
16
5
4
20
6
7
TX1015213 —19—12DEC06
2,606 (1182)
VD76477,00010E5 -19-16OCT06-1/1
(Extended)
16 5
2,674 (1213)
2,184 (991) 12
2,197 (997)
2,945 (1335)
2,188 (992) 8
2,158 (979)
3,155 (1431)
3,373 (1530)
DIPPER
LIFT
WITH
BOOM
AT 65
3,691 (1674)
4,390 (1991)
2,127 (965) 4
2,092 (949)
2,053 (931) 0
4
3
2
1
0
2,023 (918)
1,975 (896)
1
2
1,971 (894)
8
3
1,988 (902)
2,058 (933)
12
4
FEET
METERS
0
0
4
1
8
2
12
3
4
16
5
20
6
7
TX1015214 —19—12DEC06
1,997 (906) 4
BOOM
LIFT
VD76477,00010E6 -19-16OCT06-1/1
4-6-16
020113
PN=236
Index
Page
A
Accessory outlets, 12-volt........................................ 2-1-21
Accumulator
Ride control, checking.......................................... 4-1-18
Acid
Battery, check electrolyte level............................... 3-7-2
Adjustment
Engine valve clearance........................................ 3-10-1
Air
Cleaner elements clean ...............................3-3-7, 3-3-8
Air cleaner, engine
Elements, replace ........................................3-9-3, 3-9-4
Intake hose ............................................................ 3-8-1
Air conditioning ........................................................ 4-3-14
Controls....................................................2-1-13, 2-1-17
Receiver-dryer ....................................................... 4-1-3
Alternator
Indicator ................................................................. 2-1-3
Precaution.............................................................. 4-1-5
Anti-theft security system
Configuration.......................................................... 2-1-4
Operation ............................................................... 2-1-6
Attachments
Adding safely ......................................................... 1-3-4
Operating safely..................................................... 1-3-4
Axle
Front, non-powered
Lubricate oscillating pivot and steering
pivots ....................................................3-4-9, 3-4-10
Lubricate wheel bearings ................................... 3-3-9
MFWD
Change oil, housing.......................................... 3-10-2
Change oil, planetary ....................................... 3-10-2
Check oil, housing .............................................. 3-7-1
Check oil, planetary............................................ 3-7-1
Lubricate drive shaft splines............................... 3-3-8
Lubricate oscillating pivot and universal joints ... 3-4-9
Operating.......................................................... 2-2-24
Troubleshooting................................................ 4-3-12
Rear
Oil change ........................................................ 3-10-3
Operating differential lock................................. 2-2-24
Troubleshooting................................................ 4-3-13
Axles
Oil specification.................................................... 3-1-11
B
Backhoe
Adjustment
Boom lock........................................................... 4-1-2
Boom-to-dipperstick pin bolt torque.................... 3-8-1
Auxiliary hydraulic function
Adjusting flow control valve .............................. 2-2-18
Auxiliary hydraulic functions
Operation.......................................................... 2-2-19
Page
Auxiliary hydraulic selective flow
Operation.......................................................... 2-2-18
Bucket teeth installation ....................................... 4-1-27
Counterweights
Frame ............................................................... 4-1-16
Liquid, in front tires ........................................... 4-1-17
Lubricate
Pivots and cylinders .................................3-4-7, 3-4-8
Stabilizers........................................................... 3-4-6
Operating
Auxiliary hydraulic functions ............................. 2-2-19
Auxiliary hydraulic selective flow ...................... 2-2-18
Boom lock......................................................... 2-2-10
ISO excavator two-lever controls ..................... 2-2-13
John Deere two-lever controls.......................... 2-2-12
Stabilizers........................................................... 2-2-9
Swing lock ........................................................ 2-2-11
Swing lock pin .................................................. 2-2-11
Stabilizers
Lubrication.......................................................... 3-4-6
Reversing feet .................................................. 4-1-16
Backhoe coupler
Grease .......................................................3-4-10, 3-5-1
Lubricate ....................................................3-4-10, 3-5-1
Safety signs ........................................................... 1-5-3
Backhoe Loader
Weight
310J.................................................................... 4-6-7
310SJ ............................................................... 4-6-14
Backover accidents
Avoid ...................................................................... 1-3-3
Ballast
Counterweights, front of frame............................. 4-1-16
Liquid, in front tires............................................... 4-1-17
Batteries
Boost starting ......................................................... 4-1-6
Using battery charger............................................. 4-1-6
Battery
Acid
Burns from battery acid ...................................... 3-7-2
Electrolyte level check ........................................... 3-7-2
Explosion ............................................................... 3-7-2
Handling, checking, servicing ................................ 4-1-7
Rating..................................................................... 4-1-8
Removal................................................................. 4-1-9
Replacement.......................................................... 4-1-8
Terminals................................................................ 3-7-2
Bearings, front wheel................................................. 3-9-1
Belt inspection ........................................................... 3-9-5
Bleed fuel system .................................................... 4-1-21
Bleediing procedure
Brakes.................................................................. 4-1-22
Bolt and screw torque values
Metric ................................................................... 4-1-30
Unified inch .......................................................... 4-1-29
Boom
Lowering .............................................................. 4-1-20
Index-1
020113
PN=1
Index
Page
Page
Boom lock
Backhoe ................................................................. 4-1-2
Brake
Park brake
Check ............................................................... 4-1-20
Service brake
Inspection, external ............................................ 4-1-1
Brakes
Bleediing procedure ............................................. 4-1-22
Break-in
Engine.................................................................... 3-6-1
Break-In engine oil..................................................... 3-1-6
Breather, fuel
Replace.................................................................. 3-9-6
Breather, hydraulic reservoir...................................... 3-9-2
Bucket
Backhoe
Installing teeth .................................................. 4-1-27
Front loader
Changing buckets............................................. 4-1-15
Bucket specification
310J ....................................................................... 4-6-7
310SJ................................................................... 4-6-15
Bulb replacement, halogen lights ............................ 4-1-13
Cooling system
Check..................................................................... 3-4-3
Draining.................................................... 3-11-1, 3-11-2
Filling........................................................ 3-11-3, 3-11-4
Service safely......................................................... 1-4-1
COOLSCAN PLUS test kit....................................... 3-3-10
Counterweights
Frame................................................................... 4-1-16
Liquid, in front tires............................................... 4-1-17
Coupler, backhoe
Grease .......................................................3-4-10, 3-5-1
Lubricate ....................................................3-4-10, 3-5-1
Operating ............................................................. 2-2-21
Coupler, loader
Grease ................................................................... 3-4-9
Coupler, Loader
Operating ............................................................. 2-2-22
Cruise control ............................................................ 2-2-9
Cylinder service ....................................................... 4-1-27
C
Cab air filters ...................................................3-3-4, 3-9-4
Capacities
Drain and refill........................................................ 4-6-1
Checklist .................................................................... 3-2-7
Codes
Standard display monitor ....................................... 2-1-9
Cold weather
Machine warm-up .................................................. 2-2-6
Starting................................................................... 2-2-4
Controls
Backhoe, ISO excavator two-lever
Operation.......................................................... 2-2-13
Backhoe, John Deere two-lever
Operation.......................................................... 2-2-12
Steering console
Locations .......................................................... 2-1-14
Steering wheel tilt lever........................................ 2-1-20
Coolant
Add coolant extender ........................................... 3-3-10
Additional information .......................................... 3-1-15
Check.........................................................3-3-10, 3-9-8
Diesel engine ....................................................... 3-1-12
Drain ........................................................ 3-11-1, 3-11-2
Heater .................................................................... 2-2-5
Hoses..................................................................... 4-1-4
John Deere Cool-Gard II Coolant Extender ......... 3-1-13
Level ...................................................................... 3-4-3
Sample................................................................... 3-8-6
Supplemental additives........................................ 3-1-14
Test ...................................................................... 3-3-10
Testing.................................................................. 3-1-16
Warm temperature climates................................. 3-1-14
D
Decals
Safety..................................................................... 1-5-1
Defroster controls ........................................2-1-13, 2-1-17
Diagnose malfunctions
Troubleshooting procedure .................................... 4-3-1
Diagnostic trouble codes ........................................... 2-1-9
Messages, standard display monitor (SDM) .......... 2-1-8
Diesel fuel........................................................3-1-1, 3-1-3
Sample................................................................... 3-8-6
Diesel fuel, testing
Testing Diesel Fuel................................................. 3-1-4
Differential lock ........................................................ 2-2-24
Dipperstick, extendible
Lock
Operation.......................................................... 2-2-17
Drain engine coolant.................................... 3-11-1, 3-11-2
Drain Intervals for Diesel Engine Coolant
Diesel Engine Coolant, Drain Intervals ................ 3-1-13
Driving
Steering wheel tilt lever........................................ 2-1-20
Driving the machine................................................... 2-2-7
E
Effect of Cold Weather on Diesel Engines
Diesel Engines, Cold Weather Effect..................... 3-1-5
Electrical
Accessory outlets, 12-volt .................................... 2-1-21
Troubleshooting ..................................................... 4-3-5
Element
Primary
Cleaning and inspecting ..................................... 4-1-3
Secondary
Inspecting and cleaning...................................... 4-1-3
Emissions control warranty statement............................ -3
Enable/disable switch
Pilot control .......................................................... 2-1-15
Index-2
020113
PN=2
Index
Page
Page
Engine
Air filter restriction indicator.................................... 2-1-3
Alternator voltage indicator .................................... 2-1-3
Break-in........................................................2-2-3, 3-6-1
Coolant heater ....................................................... 2-2-5
Coolant temperature gauge ................................... 2-1-3
Crankcase vent tube .............................................. 3-8-6
Filter service intervals
Tier 2/Stage II..................................................... 3-1-8
Tier 3/Stage III A .............................................. 3-1-10
Hood, opening and closing .................................... 3-2-5
Identification........................................................... 3-2-2
Oil change.............................................................. 3-8-3
Oil check ................................................................ 3-4-2
Oil filter................................................................... 3-8-3
Oil pressure indicator ............................................. 2-1-3
Oil specification
Break-In.............................................................. 3-1-6
Tier 2 and Stage II.............................................. 3-1-7
Tier 3 and Stage III A ......................................... 3-1-9
Serial number......................................................... 4-5-1
Starting................................................................... 2-2-3
Troubleshooting ..................................................... 4-3-2
Valve clearance adjust ......................................... 3-10-1
Engine speed
Control knob......................................................... 2-1-16
Engine speed control knob ............................2-1-16, 2-2-9
Extendible dipperstick
Lock operation ..................................................... 2-2-17
Operating ............................................................. 2-2-16
Extendible dipperstick w/ attachments
Operating ............................................................. 2-2-17
Changing buckets ................................................ 4-1-15
Lubrication ...................................................3-4-5, 3-4-6
Operating ............................................................. 2-2-23
Ride control
Checking accumulator...................................... 4-1-18
Discharge pressure for service......................... 4-1-19
Front wheel drive
Fuel
Diesel ...........................................................3-1-1, 3-1-3
Filter
Replace element ......................................3-8-4, 3-8-5
Handling and storing .............................................. 3-1-2
Level gauge ........................................................... 2-1-3
Lubricity.................................................................. 3-1-1
Tank
Capacity ............................................................. 3-2-5
Drain water and sediment .................................. 3-8-2
Fuel breather
Replace.................................................................. 3-9-6
Fuel filter
Auxliary water separator ........................................ 3-8-5
Fuel Filter
Auxiliary water separator ....................................... 3-3-6
Fuel system, bleed .................................................. 4-1-21
Fuses
Location ................................................................. 4-1-9
F
Feet, stabilizer
Reversing............................................................. 4-1-16
Filter
Cab air
Clean and replace elements.....................3-3-4, 3-9-4
Engine air cleaner
Replace elements.....................................3-9-3, 3-9-4
Engine oil
Replace element ................................................ 3-8-3
Fuel
Replace element ......................................3-8-4, 3-8-5
Hydraulic
Replace element ................................................ 3-9-6
Filter service intervals
Tier 2/Stage II ........................................................ 3-1-8
Tier 3/Stage III A .................................................. 3-1-10
Fires, prevent............................................................. 1-2-4
Fluid analysis test kit ................................................. 3-2-6
Fluid sample
Taking samples .................................................... 4-1-14
Front loader
Boom service lock
Inspect.............................................................. 4-1-30
Operate .............................................................. 3-2-5
G
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature................................... 2-1-3
Fuel level................................................................ 2-1-3
Transmission and torque converter oil
temperature.......................................................... 2-1-3
Grease
Alternative and synthetic lubricants ....................... 3-1-6
Axle
MFWD drive shaft splines .................................. 3-3-8
MFWD oscillating pivot and universal joints ....... 3-4-9
Non-powered front wheel bearings .................... 3-3-9
Axle, non-powered front
Oscillating pivot and steering
pivots ....................................................3-4-9, 3-4-10
Backhoe
Stabilizers and cylinders..................................... 3-4-6
Coupler, loader....................................................... 3-4-9
Extreme pressure and multipurpose .................... 3-1-12
Front loader
Pivots.................................................................. 3-4-5
Pivots, bucket ..................................................... 3-4-6
Ground speeds .......................................................... 4-6-1
H
Hand trottle .............................................................. 2-1-16
Handholds
Use correctly .......................................................... 1-3-1
Index-3
020113
PN=3
Index
Page
Page
Hardware torque values
Metric ................................................................... 4-1-30
Unified inch .......................................................... 4-1-29
Hazards
Work Site ............................................................... 1-3-2
Heater controls ............................................2-1-13, 2-1-17
High-pressure oils
Avoid ...................................................................... 1-2-3
Hood, opening and closing ........................................ 3-2-5
Horn button..................................................2-1-12, 2-1-16
Hose
Crankcase ventilation............................................. 3-8-6
Engine air intake .................................................... 3-8-1
Radiator upper and lower....................................... 4-1-4
Hour meter................................................................. 3-2-1
Hydraulic
Backhoe auxiliary function
Flow control valve adjustment .......................... 2-2-18
Backhoe auxiliary functions
Operation.......................................................... 2-2-19
Backhoe auxiliary selective flow
Operation.......................................................... 2-2-18
Oil
Change............................................................. 3-10-1
Filter, replace element ........................................ 3-9-6
Oil filter restriction indicator.................................... 2-1-3
Reservoir
Breather, replace ................................................ 3-9-2
Fill screen, inspect and clean ........................... 3-10-4
Oil level check .................................................... 3-4-1
Troubleshooting ................................................... 4-3-10
Hydraulic oil ............................................................. 3-1-11
Hydraulic pressure
Pilot control system.............................................. 4-1-19
JDLink in-line fuse
Unswitched power.................................................. 4-1-9
Job timer
Standard display monitor ..................................... 2-1-11
I
Indicator
Engine air filter restriction ...................................... 2-1-3
Engine alternator voltage ....................................... 2-1-3
Engine oil pressure ................................................ 2-1-3
Hydraulic oil filter restriction ................................... 2-1-3
Park brake.............................................................. 2-1-3
Ride control.......................................................... 2-1-12
Seat belt................................................................. 2-1-3
Stop........................................................................ 2-1-3
Water in fuel (WIF)............................................... 2-1-14
Injection
Nozzle .................................................................... 4-1-5
Pump...................................................................... 4-1-5
Inspection, pre-start................................................... 2-2-1
Instrument
Check before starting............................................. 2-2-2
L
Lever
Steering wheel tilt................................................. 2-1-20
Levers and pedals ..................................................... 2-1-1
Lifting ....................................................................... 2-2-25
Lifting capacities
310J
Extendible dipperstick ..............................4-6-8, 4-6-9
Standard dipperstick........................................... 4-6-8
310SJ
Extendible dipperstick ...................................... 4-6-16
Standard dipperstick......................................... 4-6-15
Lights ....................................................................... 2-1-14
Loader
Boom service lock
Inspect.............................................................. 4-1-30
Operate .............................................................. 3-2-5
Changing buckets ................................................ 4-1-15
Lubrication ...................................................3-4-5, 3-4-6
Operating ............................................................. 2-2-23
Ride control
Checking accumulator...................................... 4-1-18
Discharge pressure for service......................... 4-1-19
Loader backhoe
Operating ............................................................. 2-2-21
Loader coupler
Operating ............................................................. 2-2-22
Lowering boom
Without electrical power....................................... 4-1-20
Lubricants
Lubricate
Axle
MFWD drive shaft splines .................................. 3-3-8
MFWD oscillating pivot and universal joints ....... 3-4-9
Non-powered front wheel bearings .................... 3-3-9
Axle, non-powered front
Oscillating pivot and steering
pivots ....................................................3-4-9, 3-4-10
Backhoe
Stabilizers and cylinders..................................... 3-4-6
Coupler, loader....................................................... 3-4-9
Front loader
Pivots.................................................................. 3-4-5
Pivots, bucket ..................................................... 3-4-6
Lubricity of diesel fuel ................................................ 3-1-1
M
J
JDLink........................................................................ 4-1-9
Machine
Maintenance, preparation for ................................. 3-2-1
Index-4
020113
PN=4
Index
Page
Page
Warm-up
Cold weather ...................................................... 2-2-6
Normal conditions............................................... 2-2-5
Machine modifications
Avoid ...................................................................... 1-2-2
Machine movement
Unintended
Prevent .....................................................1-3-1, 1-3-2
Machine tipover
Avoid ...................................................................... 1-3-3
Machine, inspect........................................................ 1-2-2
Main menu
Maintenance
Chart ...................................................................... 3-2-1
Preparation for ....................................................... 3-2-1
Record ................................................................... 3-2-7
Mechanical front wheel drive
Metric bolt and screw torque values ........................ 4-1-30
MFWD
Lubricate
Change axle housing oil ................................... 3-10-2
Change planetary housing oil........................... 3-10-2
Check axle housing oil level ............................... 3-7-1
Check planetary housing oil level....................... 3-7-1
Drive shaft splines .............................................. 3-3-8
Oscillating pivot and universal joints .................. 3-4-9
Operation ............................................................. 2-2-24
MFWD front axle housing
Serial number......................................................... 4-5-2
Monitor
Codes..................................................................... 2-1-9
Engine air filter restriction indicator........................ 2-1-3
Engine alternator voltage indicator ........................ 2-1-3
Engine coolant temperature gauge........................ 2-1-3
Engine oil pressure indicator.................................. 2-1-3
Fuel level gauge..................................................... 2-1-3
Hydraulic oil filter restriction indicator .................... 2-1-3
Job timer .............................................................. 2-1-11
machine settings .................................................. 2-1-11
Main menu ............................................................. 2-1-8
Normal display ....................................................... 2-1-7
Seat belt/park brake indicator ................................ 2-1-3
Standard display .................................................... 2-1-2
Stop indicator ......................................................... 2-1-3
Transmission and torque converter oil
temperature gauge............................................... 2-1-3
Monitor functions ....................................................... 2-1-3
Monitor options ........................................................ 2-1-10
Motor service ........................................................... 4-1-27
N
Normal display
O
Oil
Axle sample ........................................................... 3-8-6
Change
Engine ................................................................ 3-8-3
Hydraulic reservoir ........................................... 3-10-1
MFWD front axle housing................................. 3-10-2
MFWD planetary housing................................. 3-10-2
Planetary housing............................................. 3-10-3
Rear axle housing ............................................ 3-10-3
Transmission ...................................................... 3-9-7
Engine sample ....................................................... 3-7-4
Hydraulic sample ................................................... 3-8-6
Level
Engine ................................................................ 3-4-2
Hydraulic reservoir ............................................. 3-4-1
MFWD housing................................................... 3-7-1
MFWD planetary housing................................... 3-7-1
Transmission ...................................................... 3-5-1
Level, rear axle ...................................................... 3-7-4
Specification
Axles................................................................. 3-1-11
Hydraulic system .............................................. 3-1-11
Mechanical front wheel drive............................ 3-1-11
Transmission .................................................... 3-1-11
Transmission sample ............................................. 3-8-6
Oil, engine
Tier 2 and Stage II ................................................. 3-1-7
Tier 3 and Stage III A ............................................. 3-1-9
Operating
Use special care .................................................... 1-3-4
Operating backhoe coupler ..................................... 2-2-21
Operating loader coupler ......................................... 2-2-22
Operating tips
Lifting ................................................................... 2-2-25
Operation qualification............................................... 1-2-1
Operational checkout procedures.............................. 4-2-1
Operator convenience features ................................. 1-1-1
P
Park brake
Check operation of............................................... 4-1-20
Indicator ................................................................. 2-1-3
Switch .................................................................. 2-1-12
Park brake switch ............................................1-3-1, 1-3-2
Parking
Machine ............................................................... 2-2-25
Parts, moving
Stay clear ............................................................... 1-2-2
Pattern select switch................................................ 2-1-15
Pedal
Sixth-function ....................................................... 2-2-19
Pedals and levers ...................................................... 2-1-1
Pilot controls .......................................................... 2-1-1
Periodic maintenance chart ....................................... 3-2-1
Index-5
020113
PN=5
Index
Page
Page
Pilot control enable/disable switch........................... 2-1-15
Pilot control system
Discharge hydraulic pressure .............................. 4-1-19
Pilot control wrist rest
Adjusting .............................................................. 4-1-25
Pilot controls .............................................................. 2-1-1
Adjusting wrist rest............................................... 4-1-25
Pins, metal
Drive safely ............................................................ 1-4-2
Planetary housing
Oil change............................................................ 3-10-3
Pre-start inspection.................................................... 2-2-1
Pump
Service of pumps ................................................. 4-1-27
Screen, hydraulic reservoir fill
Inspect and clean................................................. 3-10-4
Seat
Air suspension
Controls ............................................................ 2-1-19
Switch, height adjustment ................................ 2-1-13
Mechanical suspension
Controls ............................................................ 2-1-19
Seat belt
Indicator ................................................................. 2-1-3
Use and maintain ................................................... 1-3-1
Secondary and primary element
Cleaning................................................................. 4-1-3
Secondary exits ....................................................... 2-1-18
Security system, anti-theft
configuration .......................................................... 2-1-4
operation ................................................................ 2-1-6
Serial number
Engine.................................................................... 4-5-1
Machine ................................................................. 4-5-1
MFWD front axle housing ...................................... 4-5-2
Rear axle housing .................................................. 4-5-2
Transmission.......................................................... 4-5-1
Service
Control valves, cylinders, pumps, and motors ..... 4-1-27
Ride control, discharge pressure ......................... 4-1-19
Service brake
Inspection............................................................... 4-1-1
Service interval checklist ........................................... 3-2-7
Service record ........................................................... 3-2-7
Settings
Standard display monitor ..................................... 2-1-11
Sixth-function pedal ................................................. 2-2-19
Specification
310SJ................................................................... 4-6-10
Backhoe boom-to-dipperstick pin bolt torque......... 3-8-1
Hardware torque .................................................. 4-1-28
Oil
Axle .................................................................. 3-1-11
Hydraulic .......................................................... 3-1-11
Mechanical front wheel drive............................ 3-1-11
Transmission .................................................... 3-1-11
Oil, differential ...................................................... 3-1-11
Oil, hand-operated cab tilt hydraulic pump .......... 3-1-11
Oil, park brake...................................................... 3-1-11
Wheel fastener torque............................................ 3-3-4
Specifications
310J .................................................. 4-6-2, 4-6-6, 4-6-9
310SJ.......................................................4-6-15, 4-6-16
Speed ........................................................................ 4-6-1
Stabilizers
Lubricate ................................................................ 3-4-6
Operating ............................................................... 2-2-9
Reversing feet...................................................... 4-1-16
Stage II
Identification........................................................... 3-2-2
Standard Display Function ........................................ 2-1-3
Standard display monitor...................2-1-2, 2-1-10, 2-1-11
R
Rear axle housing
Serial number......................................................... 4-5-2
Receiver-dryer
Check sight glasses ............................................... 4-1-3
Recognize
Safety, information ................................................. 1-2-1
Regulator precaution ................................................. 4-1-5
Relays
Location ................................................................. 4-1-9
Required parts ........................................................... 3-2-9
Ride control
Checking accumulator ......................................... 4-1-18
Discharge pressure for service ............................ 4-1-19
Operation ............................................................... 2-2-6
Switch and indicator............................................. 2-1-12
Riders
Keep off machine ................................................... 1-3-3
Right side console
Functions ............................................................. 2-1-12
Roads
Operating or traveling ............................................ 1-3-4
ROPS
Inspect ................................................................... 1-3-5
Keep properly installed ........................................ 4-1-28
Maintain ................................................................. 1-3-5
S
Safety
Clean debris from machine .................................... 1-2-6
Operator's seat ...................................................... 1-3-1
Park and prepare for service safely ....................... 1-4-1
Protective equipment ............................................. 1-2-2
Safety features .......................................................... 1-1-1
Safety signs ............................................................... 1-5-1
Backhoe coupler .................................................... 1-5-3
Safety, Avoid High-Pressure Fluids
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids ................................... 1-2-3
Safety, information
Recognize .............................................................. 1-2-1
Sample test ports
Fluid sample......................................................... 4-1-14
Index-6
020113
PN=6
Index
Page
Page
Main menu
Settings ............................................................ 2-1-11
Settings ................................................................ 2-1-11
Standard display monitor (SDM)
Diagnostic trouble codes popup messages ........... 2-1-8
Starting fluid, cold weather start ................................ 2-2-4
Starting system check ............................................. 4-1-14
Starting the engine .................................................... 2-2-3
Steering
Toe-in, check and adjust ...................................... 4-1-26
Steering system......................................................... 4-3-9
Steps
Use correctly .......................................................... 1-3-1
Stop indicator............................................................. 2-1-3
Storage
Machine ................................................................. 4-4-1
Monthly .................................................................. 4-4-1
Storing fuel ................................................................ 3-1-2
Swing Lock Pin
Operating ............................................................. 2-2-11
Switch
Air suspension seat height adjustment ................ 2-1-13
Defroster, heater, and air conditioner ......................................................2-1-13, 2-1-17
Differential lock switch ......................................... 2-2-24
Locations, steering console ................................. 2-1-14
Mechanical front wheel drive (MFWD)................. 2-2-24
Park brake............................................................ 2-1-12
Ride control.......................................................... 2-1-12
Turn signal ........................................................... 2-1-14
Warning lights ...................................................... 2-1-14
Work and drive lights ........................................... 2-1-14
Switch functions....................................................... 2-1-12
Oil level .................................................................. 3-5-1
Serial number......................................................... 4-5-1
Transporting
On a trailer ........................................................... 2-2-26
Towing.................................................................. 2-2-27
Travel speeds ............................................................ 4-6-1
Traveling
On public roads...................................................... 1-3-4
Troubleshooting
Electrical system .................................................... 4-3-5
Troubleshooting procedure........................................ 4-3-1
T
Teeth, backhoe bucket............................................. 4-1-27
Tire
Pressure................................................................. 3-3-2
Pressure check ...................................................... 3-3-1
Toe-in
Check and adjust ................................................. 4-1-26
Toolbox
Removal................................................................. 4-1-9
Torque charts
Metric ................................................................... 4-1-30
Unified inch .......................................................... 4-1-29
Torque converter
Oil temperature gauge ........................................... 2-1-3
Towing ..................................................................... 2-2-27
Transmissioin
Oil temperature gauge ........................................... 2-1-3
Transmission
Oil change.............................................................. 3-9-7
U
Unified inch bolt and screw torque values ............... 4-1-29
V
Valve
Backhoe auxiliary hydraulic function flow control.. 2-2-18
Hydraulic control valve service ............................ 4-1-27
Vent tube, engine ...................................................... 3-8-6
W
Warm-up
Machine, cold weather ........................................... 2-2-6
Machine, normal conditions ................................... 2-2-5
Warranty statement
Emissions control........................................................ -3
Water separator
Auxiliary, fuel filter ........................................3-3-6, 3-8-5
Drain ............................................................3-3-6, 3-4-4
Weight
Backhoe Loader
310J.................................................................... 4-6-7
310SJ ............................................................... 4-6-14
Welding repairs
Make safely............................................................ 1-4-2
Wheel bearings, front ................................................ 3-9-1
Wheel fasteners......................................................... 3-3-4
Windows
Rear ..................................................................... 2-1-18
Side, secondary exits........................................... 2-1-18
Work site hazards
Avoid ...................................................................... 1-3-2
Wrist rest
Adjusting .............................................................. 4-1-25
Index-7
020113
PN=7
Index
Index-8
020113
PN=8

Backhoe Loader310J and 310SJEngines 4045DT060, 4045HT054

Transcription

Similar documents

G8.3 And GTA8.3. - Cummins Engines

FD620D

Dual Port, Four Barrel, Aluminium lnlet Manifold. Crane Cam and

automotive features in a compact package.

MOTORUP XTREME 800 Engine Treatment PDF

engines - Yamaha

The Holset VG Turbocharger

World Wide Web 1 Basics - the Greenville Public Library

the Honda BF5 sales sheet

the Honda BF50 sales sheet